Skip to main content

Full text of "Researches into Chinese superstitions. Translated from the French with notes, historical and explanatory by M. Kennelly"

See other formats


=  00 


St*- 


I       ISI- 

I    tr; 


iO~> 
■O 


•CD 


00 


is 

12.1 


ESSg&MSE! 


INTO 


CHINESE    SUPERSTITIONS 


By  Henry  Dor6,  S.J. 


TRANSLATED   FROM   THE   FRENCH 
WITH   NOTES,   HISTORICAL  AND   EXPLANATORY 

By  M.   Kennelly,  S.J. 


First   Part 

SUPERSTITIOUS    PRACTICES 
Profusely    illustrated 

Vol.     I 


T'USEWEI    PRINTING    PRESS 
Shanghai 

1914 


i£s*f 


.  ypy  /y7y    ^  ,  ?  ,  /fttWsp^z^rZJLT 


I 


iiiisiijyiic 


INTO 


CHINESE    SUPERSTITIONS 


By  Henry  Dore,  S.J. 


/H 


TRANSLATED    FROM   THE   FRENCH 
WITH    NOTES,   HISTORICAL  AND    EXPLANATORY 

By   M.   Kennelly,   S.J. 


First    Part 

SUPERSTITIOUS    PRACTICES 

Profusely    illustrated 

Vol.     I 


T'USEWEI    PRINTING    PRESS 
Shanghai 

1914 


111 

D£/3 
v.  I 


BRA'is; 


t^Siry  OF  T<>£: 


31.1832 


PREFACE. 

The  present  work,  entitled  "Researches  into  Chinese  Supersti- 
tions",, belongs  to  the  well  known  series  "Varietes  Sinoloijiques", 
or  Miscellanies  on  China,  published  by  the  Jesuit  Fathers  of  the 
Shanghai  Mission.  The  first  volume  was  issued  from  the  T'usewei 
Press  in  the  year  1911.  Three  others  followed  successively  in  1912 
and  1913,  and  were  so  appreciated  that  the  French  Academy  of 
"Inscriptions  and  Literature"  granted  them  a  special  award.  A  fifth 
is  now  in  the  press.  The  whole  collection  is  to  be  completed  in  1915, 
and  will  comprise  about  eight  volumes.  The  subject  treated  is  of  the 
highest  importance,  not  only  from  the  religious  standpoint,  but  also 
because  of  the  many  interesting  sidelights  it  casts  on  the  social  and 
familv  life  of  the  Chinese  people.  As  the  original  is  in  French,  and 
hence  accessible  only  to  a  limited  number  of  readers,  it  has  been 
requested  to  translate  it  into  English.  Such  a  vast  undertaking  and 
the  scholarly  attainments  it  supposes  would  have  appalled  many. 
The  translator  himself  felt  rather  diffident,  but  encouraged  by  the 
genial  Director  of  the  "Varietes  Sinolog iques" ' ,  various  Missionary 
bodies,  and  several  scholars  in  the  East  and  at  home,  he  energet- 
ically set  to  work,  and  the  volume  now  offered  to  the  public  is  the 
fruit  of  his  labours. 

The  Author  of  the  work  is  the  Rev.  Henry  Bore,  S.J.  Labour- 
ing as  a  Missionary  for  over  twenty  years  in  the  two  provinces  of 
Kiangsu  and  Nganhwei,  he  ever  pursued  the  study  of  religions  in 
China,  and  the  countless  superstitions  which  swayed  the  social  and 
familv  life  of  the  people.  For  this  purpose,  he  visited  cities  and 
hamlets,  temples  and  monasteries,  questioning  the  people  about 
their  Gods  and  Goddesses,  their  local  divinities  and  deified  Worthies, 
thus  collecting  valuable  materials  for  his  future  great  work.  What 
he  tells  us  therein,  he  has  witnessed  with  his  own  e}Tes,  or  heard 
from  the  lips  of  the  people  with  whom  he  came  into  daily  contact. 
Real  China  exists  little  in  the  Open  Ports.  Civilisation  has  there 
done  its  work,  and  raised  the  Chinaman  to  a  higher  level  than  his 
fellow  countrymen.      Whosoever,  therefore,   would  study  him  in  real 


—  II  — 

life,  must  needs  see  him  in  the  remote  regions,  the  quaint  old  towns, 
and  the  secluded  villages  of  some  distant  province.  This  is  what  the 
Missionary  has  done,  and  hence  his  descriptions  ring  genuine,  and 
echo  his  impressions  in  a  manner  which  interest  and  charm  the 
general  reader.  To  his  personal  observations,  he  has  added  a  long 
and  serious  study  of  all  books  relating  to  his  subject.  The  learned 
list  of  Chinese  works  placed  at  the  head  of  this  volume  amply  bears 
out  this  assertion.  From  these,  quotations  and  copious  extracts  are 
given  throughout  the  work.  To  the  foreign  authors  indicated  in 
the  French  edition,  the  translator  has  added  a  few  others,  which 
he  thinks  will  be  helpful  to  English  readers.  Mention  may  be  par- 
ticularly made  of  Dooliltle,  who  has  written  interestingly  of  "Pop- 
ular Gods  and  Goddesses"  in  Southern  China,  also  of  Samuel  Benl. 
Sir  Monier  Williams,  Hackmann,  Macgowan,  Legge  and  <lc  Groot's 
extensive  work  on  the  "Religious  System  of  China".  Several  titles, 
untranslated  in  the  original  French,  have  been  rendered  into  English 
in  this  edition,  while  short  historical  and  explanatory  notes  have 
been  inserted,  with  a  view  to  elucidating  abstruse  points  of  history 
and  doctrine  which  would  otherwise  remain  a  puzzle  to  many  a 
reader. 

Pictures  of  Gods  and  Goddesses,  of  Genii  and  fabulous  beings, 
deified  Worthies  and  Heroes  have  next  been  secured.'  The  rich  store 
of  albums  in  the  Sicawei  Library  has  wonderfully  helped  in  this 
matter.  Almost  every  article  is  illustrated.  These  pictures  complete 
the  text,  and  exhibit  graphically  to  the  reader  the  belief  of  the 
people. 

The  work  will,  doubtless,  fulfil  a  useful  and  scientific  purpose 
both  in  the  Far  Fast  and  at  home.  The  principal  intention  of  the 
Author  in  publishing  it  has  been  to  help  his  fellow  Missionaries  in 
the  held,  chiefly  those  recently  arrived  from  home,  and  yet  unac- 
quainted with  the  life  and  religious  conditions  of  the  Chinese  people. 
These  men  shall  one  day  be  brought  into  contact  with  the  super- 
stitions nt  the  country.  They  must,  therefore,  have  some  knowledge 
-I  what  the  people  think,  believe  and  worship.  Thus  equipped, 
they  will  offend  less  native  prejudice  and  promote  better  the  great 
work  of  implanting  Christian  truth  in  the  land. 


—  TIT  — 

The  work  will  also  prove  valuable  to  the  large  and  ever  increas- 
ing" number  of  scholars  interested  in  the  study  of  "Comparative 
Religion".  In  this  field  of  laborious  research,  the  Missionary  has 
ever  proved  a  most  useful  helper.  His  intimate  knowledge  of  the 
people,  his  life  spent  among  them,  enable  him  to  appreciate  thor- 
oughly their  religious  ideas,  and  grasp  the  cryptic  meaning  and 
purpose  which  underlie  so  many  customs  and  practices. 

A  third  and  no  less  important  service  will  be  to  exhibit  to  the 
intelligent  reading  public  the  real  aspect  and  conditions  of  religious 
life  among  the  Chinese  people.  Persons  frequently  ask  the  Mission- 
ary "what  is  China's  real  religion?  What  do  the  people  believe 
and  worship?  What  is  their  knowledge  of  the  true  God,  of  the  soul 
and  of  man's  destiny?  Uo  they  believe  in  an  after-life  and  what  are 
the  conditions  of  this  life"?  —  The  work  here  offered  to  the  public  is 
the  best  reply  to  all  these  questions. 

To  begin  by  the  soul,  the  generally  accepted  opinion  is  as  follows: 
Man  has  two  souls  —  The  first,  or  superior  one,  is  called  the  Shen  f^l 
or  Ilwun  t$L,  and  emanates  from  the  ethereal  part  of  the  Cosmos, 
the  great  Yang  j^  principle  (1).  It  is  manifested  by  the  K'i  ^  or 
breath  (vital  force).  After  death,  it  ascends,  according  to  the  Anci- 
ents, to  the  higher  regions,  there  to  live  on  as  lucid  matter,  Shen- 
ming  %$  B£).  According  to  modern  Confucianists  it  vanishes  entirely 
at  death.  Buddhists  would  have  it  be  re-incarnated  into  men  or 
animals  (See  on  the  System  of  the  Metempsychosis  p.  135-138), 
while  Taoists  place  it  after  death  amidst  the  stars,  ordinarily  around 
the  Polar  regions.  The  second,  or  material  soul,  is  the  Kwei  $&, 
which  operates  in  living  man  under  the  name  of  P'eh  fjj|.  The 
Kwei  emanates  from  the  earth  or  Yin  f%  principle  (2),  returning 
thereto  after  death.  It  remains  with  the  body  in  the  grave,  and 
forms  the  ghost  (see  Note  1.  p.  143)  of  the  departed  person  (3). 

(1)  Williams  defines  this:  "the  pure,  ethereal,  subtle  part  of  matter,  out  of  which 
Gods  and  souls  are  formed".    Dictionary  of  the  Chinese  Language  |^. 

(2)  According  to  Chinese  philosophy,  it  is  one  of  the  primeval  forces  of  Nature,  from 
which  by  its  interaction  with  the  Yang  ||  principle,  the  whole  universe  has  been  produ- 
ced. The  inferior  of  the  dual  Powers,  quiescent  matter  (Giles  and  William's  Chinese 
Dictionaries  $$.). 

(3)  For  more  ample  details  See  de  Groot.  The  Religious  System  of  China.  Vol.  IV, 
p.  5,_  VVieger.     Folk-Lore  Chinois  Moderne.  Introduction  §  9). 


—  IV  — 

The  notion  of  the  true  God  has_almost  disappeared,  or  at  least 
is  but  dimly  known.  For  the  greater  part  of  the  people,  their  God 
is  the  "Pearly  Emperor",  Yuh-hwang  3£  Jl,  of  Taoist  origin  ;  Budd- 
ha or  Fuh  f);  Amitabha  |$pJ  $$  |?g  $J  (O-mih-t'o-fuh),  the  Ruler  of 
the  Western  Paradise;  Kwan-yin  ||  "&,  the  Goddess  of  Mercy; 
some  local  or  tutelary  divinity  to  whom  they  give  the  title  of  ''Ven- 
erable Sire  or  Lord",  Lao-yeh  %  ff?  5  the  God  of.Jtliches,  the  God  of 
the  Hearth,  the  God  of  Fire.  Carpenters  have  their  Patron  God,  also 
play-actors,  wrestlers,  fencers,  musicians,  and  even  gamblers.  It 
would  seem  that  every  need  of  man  has__its  corresponding  divinity, 
the  Gods  being  thus,  as  with  the  Romans,  largely  names  for  these 
various  needs,  JNumina  nomina".  The  literati  acknowledge  "Shang- 
//"  J-  ^-,  the  Supreme  Ruler;  Heaven,  T'ien  ^  ;  the  Gods  of  Liter- 
ature: Wen-ch'ang  ^  ^§  and  Kw'ei-sing  5£t  j§k  The  modernists 
among  them  are  utter  atheists  and  materialists.  For  them,  God  is 
but  an  abstract  principle,  identified  with  Reason  or  Law,  that  is,  he 
is  nothing  else  but  the  moral  sense  of  man,  exalted  thus  to  be  his 
own  Lord  and  Lawgiver.  Practically,  they  are  as  superstitious  as 
the  masses,  and  will  burn  mock-money,  though  this  is  a  Buddhist 
practice,  at  the  tombs  of  their  ancestors. 

China's  popular  religion  is,  therefore,  a  medley  of  superstitions, 
varying  according  to  places,  but  essentially  the  same  in  their  fun- 
damental features.  Hence  the  popular  adage:  "the  three  religions 
■  in'  one",  Sun -hi  no  wei-yih  J£  ^  ^  — .  Each  person  in  fact  selects 
or  adopts  what  suits  best  his  fancy,  or  meets  his  present  require- 
ments. The  Powers  of  Nature,  Spirits,  the  Hosts  of  Heaven,  Genii 
and  deified  Heroes,  Ancestors  are  also  worshipped;  even  animals, 
especially  the  Dragon  and  the  Tortoise,  not  omitting  the  mineral 
world.  The  whole  affords  a  pitiful  spectacle  which  excites  compass- 
ion, and  has  held  the  people  in  bondage  throughout  the  past,  as 
well   as  it  degrades  them  at  the  present  daw 

The  work,  according  to  the  Author's  plan,  will  be  divided  into 
three  parts.  —  The  first  treats  of  ' 'superstitious  practices  in  general" . 
Whosoever  has  lived  among  the  Chinese  will  readily  acknowledge 
that  such  practices  are  bound  up  with  their  every-day  life,  and 
influence  their  actions  from  the  cradle  to  the  tomb.     This  part  deals 


—  V  — 

also  with  ancestor  worship,  the  ancestral  tablet,  burial  of  the  dead, 
and  the  sending  of  clothing  and  mock-money  to  the  "Land  of  Shades" 
for  the  use  of  the  departed  soul.  Illustrations  accompany  each  article, 
depicting  vividly  Gods  and  Goddesses,  Genii  and  Immortals,  the 
worship  of  the  dead,  amulets,  charms  and  even  ghosts.  These 
artistic  pictures  are  all  due  to  the  T'usewei  Press,  and  the  intelli- 
gent co-operation  of  M1'.  Foucret,  S..T.,  to  whom  I  wish  to  express 
here  my  sincere  thanks. 

The  second  part  of  the  work  shall  offer  to  the  reader  a  full  and 
interesting  "biograplnj  of  Gods  and  Goddesses",  mythical  personages 
and  deified  Heroes  worshipped  in  the  two  provinces  of  Kiangsu  and 
Nganhwei.  A  short  description  of  the  various  practices  performed 
by  the  people  to  honour  them  will  complete  this  part. 

The  third  part  will  be  a  "popular  Iiistory  of  the  Founders  of  the 
three  great  religions  of  China:  Confucius,  Lao-tze  and  Buddha". 
Some  account  will  be  also  given  of  their  principal  doctrines,  ethical 
systems  and  general  influence  on  the  Chinese  people.  This  part, 
like  the  second,  will  be  fully  illustrated. 

Such  is,  in  brief,  the  great  work  undertaken  by  Father  Henry 
Dore,  S.J.  Though  not  exhaustive,  it  will  fill  a  serious  gap,  and  is 
possibly  the  best  account  we  can  get  on  "Superstitions  in  China". 
The  book  is  written  for  the  general  piTblic,  avoiding  purposely  too 
abstruse  discussions,  and  is  based  throughout  on  personal  investi- 
gations made  on  the  spot.  The  first  volume,  now  translated  into 
English,  is  here  offered  to  the  public.  The  others  will  follow  in 
due  succession,  and  render,  it  is  hoped,  valuable  service  to  all  those 
interested  in  China's  religious  life  and  customs. 

M.   Kennelly,  S.J. 
Sicawei  College,  Shanghai. 
May  30,  1914. 


—  VII  — 


LIST  OF  WORKS  CONSULTED  FOR 


THIS   FIRST   PART,    1  NT1TLED  I 


SUPERSTITIOUS    PRACTICES    IN    CHINA. 


IE 


ft  iS  S  M 
3.  it  it  ^ 

6  ^  M 

b  &  $* 

nil 


It  n£  H 
^  "?  In  p|I 
#fc  ffil  IS  ft 

/BE    3E    §5    jljS 

"^7   «=t   ^  'Ira. 

A  S  WL  * 

91  *  P  &  &  1  IB 


WORKS   WRITTEN    IN   THE    CHINESE   LANGUAGE. 

Li-ki. 

Sang-li. 

Tuh-li-t'ung-k'ao. 


Ml  fit  ft  $c 

Ml  a  §  t?  *  ^  i\ 6 

*  &  m  &  m  a 


«i^ 


-if 


#(• 


Wu-li  t'ung-k'ao. 

T'ung-tien. 

Peh-lu-t'ung. 

Yii-chow  ta-i-i. 

Sze-shu  jen-wuh-k'ao. 

Chu-tze  yii-luh. 

Jeh  chi-hih. 

Wu-king-i-i. 

Li-ki  tsih-shwoh. 

Li-ki  shuh. 

Chu-tze  yii-lei. 

Yao-lu-lu-shu. 

Fung-shen-kia  li-tsih-shwoh. 

Sheng-ki  chuh-wen. 

Sung-t'ao-knh  ts'ing-i-luh. 

Ming-ta-muh  t'ing-yii-ki-t'an. 

Chow-li  chu-shuh. 

Chow-li  t'ien-kwan-shen-lu. 

Chow-li  ch'un-kwan   ta-tsung-peh. 

T'ung-suh-pien. 

Tze-chi-t'ung-kien  kang-muh. 

Official  Annals. 
Ch'eu-chen  pien-wang. 

Peter  Hwang,  S.  J.         \chwan). 
Ts'ien-Han-shu  (Chang  t'ang 


m  r  m  %  be 

jt  #  oe  &  f#) 
m  m  m  a 

n  *  is  m 

*  »  a  *  lg  » 

*  if  &  ft  efc  $J  it  *b 

m  H  H£ 

iHii 

$r£P  ft 
£$* 
K  ft  *  * 

*  #  *  fE  # 

ep  #  if  ii  ^ 


7C 


,-iV. 


msm  m 

gist  m  fx  m  mmvt 

mm  m 

M  H#  IB 


li  ^  it  4b  ft 

mm  « 

3E  ft 

*  &  ffl 
M  £  ft  ffl  || 


—  VIII  — 

Heu-Han-shu  (Ts'ai-lun-chwan). 
Fung-shi  wen-kien-ki. 
T'ang-shu  (Wang-yiX-chwan) 
T'ung-kien-kang-muh.     Historical 

Records    reconstructed    by    Chu- 
Sbeng  Sung-  toh-i.  j  hsi. 

Li  Tsi-wung  tze-hsia-luh. 
Yeh-hwoh-pien. 
Sung  Yii  Wen-pao,  ch'ui-kien-luh 

wai-tsih. 
Shi- with  yuen-hui. 
Ts'ing-kia-luh. 
Kien-hu  pu-tsih. 
Sin-chi-luh. 
Meng-hwa-luh. 
Hai-yii  ts'ung-k'ao. 
T'ien-hsiang-leu  ngeu-teh. 
Yin-hsiieh-hsien-sui-pih. 
Yuan-tien-chang. 
Chao-king-ngan  yun-luh-man- 
Ta-hsioh.  [ch'ao. 

Chwang-tze. 
Book  of  Odes  §  Ta-ya. 
Kang-muh-tsih-lan. 
Fan-yih-ming-i. 
Wu   Man-yun   kiang-hsiang-tsieh- 

wuh-shi. 
Shan-hai-king. 
Sui-shi-ki. 
Sui-yuan-sui-pih. 
Kien-hu-tsih. 

Luh-k'i-hsiung  Pen-king  sui-hwa- 
Kwah-ti-chi.  [ki. 

Yuh-hai. 
Lih-hsioh-i-wen. 
Lih-hsioh-i-wen-pu. 


—  IX 


#  fa 


£# 

£# 


*  *  4@  & 


♦  *  it  *P 

*  *  i  9  jB( 
ft  * 

it  f*  n  «  £  i» 
n  faftig  %k  t  *  # 

tjj  ^  *  f ii 


H^  ^  ^ 


ItJfifiS 


If  tt: 


^  *  $  ft  IE 


IE 


Kiu  T'ang-shu. 

Sin  T'ang-shu. 

Luh-ming-shu. 

Han-shu. 

Sung-shu. 

Tso-chwan. 

Lo-king-kiai. 

Ma-i-siang-fah  (Physiognomy). 

Ts'an-sing-pi-yao-tseu-kih-pien- 
lan. 

Ming-hsioh  su-chi  (Fortune-tell- 
ing). 

Ta-luh-jen-sin-yuan  (Divination). 

Ta-Han  hsieh-t'ien  kwan-fu-tze 
tsi-shi  kiu-kih-wen. 

T'ai-shang  san-kwan-king. 

Siao-siang  i-yao-ts'iien-chwan. 

Sze-ming-ti-kiin  king-tsao-ts'iien- 
shu. 

Sze-ming  pao-hsiin  (Hod  of  the 
Kitchen). 

Shen-men  jeh-sung  (Prayer-book 
of  Buddhist  monks). 

Hwang-lih  (Imperial  Calendar). 

Hwui-t'u  siang-meng  ts'iien-shu 
(On  dreams). 

Tseng-pu-pi  chwan  wan-fah-kwei- 
tsung  (Talismans  and  charms). 

Kan-pao  sheu-shen-ki  (A  work  in 
20  volumes,  composed  by  Kan- 
pao  -^  ^,  a  native  of  Honan, 
and  published  A.  I).   317). 

Sheu-shen-ki    (Lire*   of  Hods    and 
Genii).  A  later  edition.  The  same 
■  work    modified    and    augmented 
was  subsequently  entitled  : 


—  X 


s  «  =  «  #>  fit  a  ft  ft  am 

S  W  IE 

$  Bjf  *  ^  m  he 


*  ^  $  BE 


MfSM 
£  Sffl  f£ 
MiE 

s  #  sir 

in 


fi 


#® 

&  ft 

s§#  Jl 

$B#if 

*tt 

.*  fcM 

if  j£ 


-»? 


Chung-tseng-sheu-shen-ki  ('/i/su 
called)  : 

Chung-tseng  san-kiao  yuen-liu 
sheng-ti  Foh-shi  sheu-shen-ki. 

Li-fang  T'ai-p'ing  kwang-ki. 

Encyclopedia  composed  by  Li- 
/'<•"'</  ^  Wj  A.  D.  977.  He  was  a 
native  of  Chih-li  and  a  Hanlin. 
The  work  is  more  generally 
known  under  the  following  title: 

T'ai-p'ing-kwang-ki.  Published 
A.  D.  981  .  It  was  composed  by 
order  of  T'ai-tsung  fc  9^,  second 
emperor  of  the  Sung  dynasty. 
Li-lung  wrote  it  assisted  by  12 
other  literati.  It  contains  much 
that  is  valuable  about  Spirits 
and  superstitions. 

Yiu-hsioh. 

Fung-suh-t'ung. 

Kin-kang-king. 

Si-yiu-ki. 

Fung-sh  en-yen- i. 

Yuh-lih  ch'ao-chwan. 

Ch'un-ts'iu. 

Tsang-shu. 

Ch'un-ts'iu -chwan. 

Hsioh-king. 

Yih-king. 

Sien-cheh-lih-shu. 

Sheu-shi-shnh. 

Ta-t'ung. 

Ta-t'ung-lih. 

T'ung-shu. 

Liang-k'i-man-chi. 

Siin-tze. 


9§  &  M  §  ft 

%&%. 

m  m  ft  b  $s 
m  i  $ 

jfi  #i  *&  h  t* 


5  1M  IE  M  * 

It*  #  If  £  ft 
Pf  # 

n  Ji  -£  ii  ^  ixj 
m  m  m  ®  & 

M  $*  fk  M  it 

mm  n 

M  4i  >h  ppp 


0  £p  H  & 

&  IE  (i£  SS  #  $) 

£  ii  as  II  #  ^ 
#  ?  as  as  n  & 


<i>,> 


« 


xi  — 

Shui-king-tsih. 
Fung-meng-cheng  chi-nang. 
K'i-men-ta-ts'iien. 
Ling-ts'ien-shu. 
T'iao-ts'ien-king. 
Lang-ya-tai-tsui-picn. 
Yen-wang-king. 
Luh-lun-king. 
Ku  Mei  chi-Aven-luh. 
Meng-tze. 

Tuh-shu-ki-shu-lioh. 
Yuh-hsiah-ki-t'  ung-shu . 
Shi-wen-lei-tsii. 
Chu-tze  yii-luh. 

Wang-wei  ts'ing-yen-ts'ung-luh. 
Tsin-shu. 
Sui-shu. 

Ki-k'ang-tseh-wu-kih-hsiung-lun. 
Wang-fu  ts'ien-fu-lun . 
Ch'en-liu-fung-suh-chwan. 
T'ung-tien  (Chao-hwun-tsang-i). 
Lia  n  g  -  pa  n-ts '  i  u  -y  ii  -  n  ga  n . 
Ts'ih-siu-lei-kao. 
Leng-kiah-king. 
Yung-chwang  siao-p'in. 
Yoh-ki. 
Shi-ming. 
Jeh-chi-luh-chu. 
Kung-sun-shuh-chwan. 
Fan-shu. 

Shi-ki  (Han  Hsiao  Wu-ti). 
Wang-vih  ch'u-tz'o-chang-kiu. 
Chu-tze  ch'u-tz'e-tsih-chu. 
Lu-shi. 

San-kwoh-chi. 
Tsih-shwoh  ts'iien-chen. 
by  Peter  Hwang,  S.  J. 


—  xn  — 


FOREIGN    WORKS. 


Rudiments  du  Parler  Chiriois. 
Textes  Historiques. 
Folk-Lore  Chinois  Moderne. 
Synchronismes  Chinois. 
The  Folk-Lore  of  China. 
Chinese  Folk-Lore. 
Vegetarian  Sects. 
China  and  Religion. 
Studies  in  Chinese  Religion. 
Chinese  Buddhism. 
Buddhism  in  China. 

\  Catena  of  Buddhist  Scriptures  from  the  Chinese. 
Four  Lectures  on  Buddhist  Literature  in  China. 
I  land-Book  of  Chinese  Buddhism. 
Buddhism:  Its  Historical  and  Popular  Aspects,  in 

Three  Lectures. 
Buddhism. 

Buddhism  as  a  Religion. 
Calendar  of  the  Gods  in  China. 
Social    Life  of  the  Chinese. 
Chinese  Repository  (Canton.  XX   Vol.) 
The  Chinese  Recorder  (Shanghai). 
The  Religious  System  of  China  (VI.  Vol.) 
The  Li   Ki  or  Book  of  Rites. 
The  Shi   King  or   Book  of  Poetry. 
Memoires  concernant  les  Chinois  (XVI  Vol. 


L.   Wieger,  S.  ./. 

Id. 

Id. 
M.  Chang,  S.  J. 
N.  B.  Denny*. 
J.  Mr  Gowa  n. 
G.  Miles. 
E.  H.  Parker. 

Id. 
J.  Edkins. 
S.  Beal. 

Id. 

Id. 
E.  J.  Eitel. 

Id. 
Monier  Williams. 
H.  Hackmann. 
Timothy     Richard, 
J.  Doolittle. 


J.  de  Groot. 
J.  Legge. 
Id. 
Jesuit  Missionaries  in 


Peking. 


Lettres     Edifiantes    et    Curieuses    (Vol.  IX-X1II    on    China).      Jesuit 

Missionaries  in  China. 
Lettres  de  Jersey  (1880*1914).  Shanghai  Jesuit  Mission. 

Annates  duMuse^Guimet (Vol.  XI-XII.  1886).  he  Groot  et-Chavannes. 
Revue  de  I'Extreme-Orient    IL  Cordier). 
Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Beige  d'Etudes  Coloniales. 
Chinese  Reader's  Manual.  \y.  F.  Mayers 


—  XIII  — 

Notes  on  Chinese  Literature  (New  Edition). 
Syllabic  Dictionary  of  the  Chinese  Language. 


Chinese-English  Dictionary 


,4.   Wylie. 

Williams. 

II.  A.  Giles. 

Chinese  Biographical  Dictionary.  Id'. 

De  Natura  Deorum  (On  the  Nature  of  the  Gods.    Book  II).      Cicero. 
Metamorphoses.  Ovid. 

La  Cite  Antique.  Fustel  de  Coulangei- 

The  Religions  of  the  Ancient  World.  G.  Rawlinson. 

Classical  Dictionary.  J.   Lempriere. 

Smaller  Classical  Dictionary  of  Biography  and 

Mythology.  W.  Smith. 


CONTENTS. 

FIRST   PART  — VOLUME  I. 


—   ^S|.*'|^H 


CHAPTER    I. 
Birth  and  Childhood. 

Page . 

Article  I.     Before  Birth      1 

Gods  specially  worshipped  in  order  to  obtain  children.  —  Super- 
stitions practices  in  cases  of  laborious  childbirth  —  Exposing 
tablet  of  Goddess  in  house. — Consulting  fortune-tellers  to  as- 
certain sex  of  child. — Magic  mirror  to  ward  off  evil  influen- 
ces.—  Little  images  or  statues  representing  children. — New-born 
child  offered  to  a  God      2 — 7. 

Article  II.     After  Birth. 

The  first  tubbing. — The  seven-star  lamp. — The  peach-wood 
arrows. — The  devil  thai  ravishes  children.  —  Peach-wood  amu- 
lets preventing  demons  from  approaching  children. — Amulet 
made  of  dog's  hair.  —  Wearing  a  necklace  of  copper  coins. — 
Killing  a  cock. — Names  of  animals  or  of  slave-girls  given  to 
male  children.  —  Bell-charms  attached  to  feet  of  children.  —  The 
vermilion  mark  on  the  forehead.  —  Ill-treating  corpses  of  little 
children        8  —  12. 

Article  III.     Superstitious  customs  concerning  children. 

Wearing  the  silver  padlock. — The  silver  collar.  —  Ear-rings. — 
A  string  of  cash. — The  eight  diagrams. — The  crown  of  hair 
shaven  oil. — The  habit  of  a  Buddhist  priest  or  bonze. — The 
dress  of  "the  hundred  families".  —  Burning  old  shoes. — Sus- 
pending a  fishing-net  —  Employing  a  sieve  to  scare  away  the 
demons  that  ravish  children.  Amulets  to  ward  off  diseases  from 
children. — Dry  (nominal)  adoption.  —  Red  cloth  attached  to  the 
extremity  of  the  queue. — The  peach-stone  padlock. — Auspicious 
wood  for  the  child's  cot 13—25. 


—  XV  — 

Page. 

Article  IV.     Crossing  the  bamm 26  —  27. 


CHAPTER    II, 


Betrothal  and  Marriage* 


Article  I.     Betrothal       29  —  31. 

Article  II.     Marriage. 

Fixing  its  date.  —  Month.  —  Day.  —  Sending-  auspicious  presents 
(flowers,  fruit) 32  —  33. 

Article  III.     Departure  of  the  Bride     34  —  35. 

Article  IV.     The  Bride  enters  the  house  of  the  Bridegroom. 

Arrival.  —  The  marriage  ceremony  before  the  tablet  of  Heaven 
and  Earth,  and  the  ancestral  tablet. — Ordeal  of  seeing  the  bride. 
Visiting  the  ancestral  hall.  —  Burial  rite  of  bride  who  has  not 
accomplished  this  latter  ceremony 36  —  39. 


CHAPTER    III. 
Death  and  Burial. 

Article  I.     Before  Heath. 

Fetching  the  temple-god  into  the  dying  person's  house.  —  Outfit 
of  the  dead  (Case  of  a  man,  a  woman). — Garters  —  Girdle. — 
Buttons.  —  Not  allowed  to  expire  on  the  family  bed.  —  Bed- 
curtains  removed. —  Also   the    pillow      41  —  44. 

Article  II.     After  Death. 

Consulting  the  Imperial  calendar.  —  Faying  out  the  dead  per- 
son.— -Paper  streamers  suspended  over  door-way.  —  Informing 
the  local  tutelary  deity  of  the  death  of  a  person.  —  Bringing 
back  from  the  temple  the  soul  of  the  deceased. — -Victuals  provi- 
ded for  the  journey. — -Paper  sedan-chair  for  the  soul. — -Burning 
some  old  shoes  of  the  deceased.  —  Attaching  wisps  of  cotton- 
wool round  the  neck  of  the  corpse 45  —  46. 

Article  III.     Placing  the  corpse  In  the  coffin. 

1°.      Putting  the  corpse  in  the  coffin.    Choosing  a  lucky  day. — 


—  XVI  — 

Big  nail  used  for  closing  the  coffin.  —  Putting  a  copper  coin  in 
the  mouth  of  the  corpse. — The  coffin.  —Rice  for  appeasing  the 
hungry  dugs  in  the  nether  world.  —  Mirror  placed  at  feet  of  the 
corpse. — (doth  placed  over  the  mouth. — Nails  entwined  with 
some  hairs  of  the  deceased. — Closing  down  the  lid  of  the  coffin. 
2".  Objects  placed  beside  the  coffin.  Paper  tablet  containing 
the  soul  of  the  departed.  —  Rice  placed  at  the  rear  of  the  deceas- 
ed person's  head. --Lamp  with  seven  wicks. — Escorting  the 
soul  over  the  bridge  of  anguish.  —  Condoling  visitors  bring  mock- 
money  for  benefit  of  the  dead.  — Funeral  repasts  given  to  relatives 
and  friends. — Children  who  leap  over  the  coffin. — -Eating  an 
egg  to  get  courage 47 —  52. 

Article  IV      Burial. 

Selecting  a  lucky  site. — Carrying  out  the  coffin. — Order  of  the 
funeral  procession. — -At  the  grave-side. — Coffins  exposed  and 
covered  with  straw 53  —  57. 

Article  V.     Alter  the  Burial. 

Fixed  times  for  mourning  services.  --  Hounding  off  the  mound  or 
tumulus.  — The  departed  spirit  returns  in  search  of  daylight. — 
Preparations  made  to  receive  him.  —  Anxiety  entertained  about 
his  destiny. — -Forwarding  a  paper  house  to  the  "world  of 
shades".  -Burning  straw -tresses  for  the  benefit  'of  the  dead.- 
I  Hfering  a  lamp  for  the  ghost.  —  "Ts'ing-ming",  or  annual  festival 
in  honour  of  the  dead.  —  Gathering  the  hungry  and  wandering 
ghosts.  —  Sending  winter-garments  to  the  dead.  —  Floating  little 
lamps  on  streams  to  guide  wandering  ghosts. — Celebrating  the 
ghosts  festival  (fifteenth  of  the  seventh  month). — Various  other 
ceremonies  to  help  departed  souls 58  —  62. 

Article  VI.     Superstitious  papers  burnt  .at  funerals. 

Propitiating  the  funeral-god.  —  Burning  a  superstitious  paper  in 
honour  of  the  ten  kings  of  Hades. — A  god-undertaker  supplies 
,i  conveyance  lor  the  departed  soul. — The  god  of  the  "hungry 
ghosts" H3  —  66. 

Article  VII.     Purchasing  the  right  of  way 67  —  68. 


—  XVII  — 

CHAPTER    IV. 
Petition-talismans  (written  charms)  for  the  benefit  of  the  Dead. 

Article  1.     Ordinary  cases  of  dead  persons. 

Why  the  Chinese  send  petitions  to  their  gods  and  burn  written 
charms  in  their  honour.  — Purifying-  and  rescuing  charm  granted 
by  Lao-kiin  for  the  benefit  of  the  dead. — Written  charm  burnt 
and  forwarded  to  Amitabha. — Another  petition  in  similar  style. — 
Written  charm  burnt  to  obtain  a  happy  rebirth. — Permit 
delivered  to  the  departed  soul.  Passport  granting  free  passage 
to  soul  on  the  way  to  the  infernal  regions. — Opening  the  cere- 
mony of  the  "Lemuria"  (for  the  benefit  of  wandering  souls). — 
Written  charm  opening  the  portals  of  the  Buddhist  paradise.  — 
Informing  the  ruler  of  Hades  of  the  exemplary  life  of  the 
deceased. — Temporary  seat  of  the  soul  (before  the  burial  takes 
place).  — Wrapper  designed  to  receive  the  soul.  —  Burning  mock- 
clothing  for  the  benefit  of  the  dead. — Forwarding  a  patent  safe 
to  the  nether  world 69  —  83. 

Article  II.     Petition-talismans  (written   charms)  rescuing  from  the 
"Moody  pond". 

Women  who  die  in  childbirth  plunged  into  this  pond. — Budd- 
hist priests  can  deliver  them  therefrom. — Precious  formula 
burnt  for  this  purpose.  —  Howling  ceremony  performed  by 
witches  at  Hai  Chow       84  —  87. 

Article  III.     Petition-talismans  (written  charms)  for  special  cases. 

For  a  person  who  has  committed  suicide. — For  a  person  ass- 
assinated.—  For  a  person  under  a  spell  from  evil  spirits. — For 
the  victim  of  an  unjust  lawsuit. — For  the  victim  of  a  felonious 
murder.  — For  the  benefit  of  a  drowned  person. — For  a  person 
who  has  died  in  prison.  —  For  the  victims  of  calumny.  —  For  a 
person  poisoned  by  doctors'  prescriptions     88  —  96. 


CHAPTER    V. 
Divers  Superstitions  for  the  benefit  of  the  Dead. 

Article  I.     The  Ancestral  Tablet 97  —  108. 


—  XVIII  — 

II.  "Kotowing"  to  the  Dead     

III.  Sacrifices  offered  to  the  Dead 

IV.  Mock-money    

V.  Buddhist  Bells 

VI.  Sending  Paper-houses  to  the  Dead 

VII.  Placing  Streamers  on  Graves     ... 

VIII.  The  Metempsychosis    

IX.  Murderous  Ghosts 

X.  Evocation  of  the  Dead    

XI.  Ceremonies  for  rescuing  departed  Souls 


Pag 
...109  — 

no 

...111  — 

116 

...117  — 

123 

...124  — 

■127 

...128  — 

129 

...130  — 

■132 

...133  — 

■138 

...139  — 

■146 

...147  — 

■150 

...151  — 

■154 

■     *»    f     I — «=»- 


—  XIX  — 

LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 
IHagrams  ami  "Charaels". 

Page 

1.  Kwan-yin    presenting    a    child    to    mothers     praying    for 

offspring     (Frontispiece) 

2.  Paper  print  (charm)  representing  the    White-robed  Kwan- 

yin  burnt  in  her  honour  to  obtain  posterity 1 

3.  Kw'ei-sing,  the  God  of  Literature,   protects   from  on  high 

the    new-born    child.      On    a   car  is   seen    the    academic 
head-dress   worn  by  scholars      2 

4.  Chang  Kwo-lao  offers  a  descendant  to  a  newly  married  couple     3 

5.  The    Celestial   Fairy   that    bestows    children.     Borne    on   a 

chariot,  she  presents  a  child  to  a  happy   household      ...        4 

6.  The    Ki-lin    or   Unicorn    bestowing   a    child        5 

7.  Written    charm    for    hastening  delivery.      The    charm    is 

burnt,  and  the  ashes  mingled    with    wine    are    given    to 

the  woman  in  labour 6 

7L"S.  Another  efficacious  charm  for    hastening    delivery      7 

8.  Bowman  shooting  peach-wood  arrows   to    scare   away   the 

heavenly    dog        8 

9.  Chang  the  Immortal,  who   protects    children      10 

10.  Padlock  assuring  a  long  and  happy  life       13 

11.  Child  wearing  the   silver  collar     14 

12.  Boy   wearing   an    ear-ring       15 

13.  Wearing  a  string   of  cash      17 

14.  Charm  representing  the  eight  diagrams       18 

15.  Child  with  crown  of  hair  shaven  off     19 

16.  Habit  of  Buddhist    monk    worn    by    children      20 

17.  Variegated  dress  known  as  that  of  the  "hundred  families"  21 

18.  The  God  of  Longevity  issuing  from  a  peach        22 

19.  Luck}7  charm.     May  you  have  five  male  children,  healthy, 

rich,  and  attaining  to  the  highest  honours     24 

19Lls.  Allusion  to  the  numerous  children  of  Wen  Wang.  May 
you  have  many  children,  and  ma}7  one  of  them  be  a 
first  tripos 25 

20.  Brass  mirror      34 


—  XX  — 

Page 

21.  Conducting-   the    bride    to    the    bridegroom's    house.      The 

slipper  and   the   saddle        36 

Tablet    of   Heaven    and     Earth        37 

22.  Nao  Sin-fang.     Ribald  jesting        38 

23.  Han-k'eu-ts'ien.  Coin  pressed   in   the    mouth    of  a    corpse  47 

24.  Tao  t'eu-fan.    Rice  placed  behind  the  head  of  a  corpse  50 

25.  Hearse  accompanied   b}r  the  funeral   God    63 

26.  Ming-fu  shih-wang.   Charm  for  propitiating  the  ten  kings 

of    Hades        64 

21.     Lung    ch'eh    Pu-sah.      The    God    of   the    Dragon    chariot 

(hearse"),  Undertaker  in   the   nether   world      65 

28.  Ku-hwun  Pu-sah.   The  God  protector  of  wandering  ghosts  66 

29.  Purchasing  the    right    of  way 67 

30.  Purifying    charm    bestowed    by    Laotze         70 

3 1 .  Written  charm  despatched  to  Ti-ts'ang  Wang,  ruler  of  Hades  71 
31bis.  Passport   to   the   nether  world.     Written  charm    burnt  in 

honour  of  Ti-ts'ang  Wang,  ruler  of  Hades    73 

32.  Written  charm  begging  a  happy  rebirth     74 

33.  Permit  exempting  from  tolls  on   the    way   to   the    Infernal 

regions  75 

34.  Lu-yin   tan-tze.    Passport    delivered    to    the    departed    soul  76 

35.  K'ai-tan  for  wandering  souls  on  the  way  to  Hades 77 

36.  The  ke}'   to   the    Ruddhist    paradise     78 

37.  Certificate  of  good  conduct  sent  to  the  ruler  of  Hades  79 

38.  Temporary  seat  of  the  departed  soul     80 

.'!'.).      Wrapper   containing   the   soul       81 

40.  Mock-clothing  burnt  for  the    benefit   of  the   dead      82 

41.  Fire-proof  safe  burnt  and  forwarded   to   the   dead     83 

42.  Fac-simile    of    the    precious    charm    delivering    from    the 

"bloody   pond"      84 

13.      Written    charm    for    the     benefit    of    a    woman    dying     in 

childbirth       86 

44.  Charm  delivering  from    Hades   a   person    hanged      88 

45.  Charm  delivering   from    Hades    a    person    assassinated      ...  89 

46.  Charm  for  the  benefit  of  a  soul  under  a  spell     90 

m.      Charm   delivering   from    Hades    the    victim    of   an    unjust 

lawsuit  91 


—  XXI  — 

Pag 

48.  Charm    delivering    from     Hades    a    person    who    has    been 

murdered        92 

49.  Charm  for  the    benefit   of  drowned    persons       93 

50.  Charm  for  the  benefit  of  persons  who  have  died  in  prison  94 

51.  Charm  for  the  benefit  of  persons  calumniated ...  95 

52.  Charm  for  the   benefit    of  a   person    poisoned    by    doctors' 

prescriptions        96 

53.  Ancestral  tablet  (front  and  back  parts)       107 

54.  "Kotowing"    before    a   grave        109 

55.  Offerings  placed  before  the  Ancestral  tablet      Ill 

56.  Various  kinds  of  mock-money      117 

57.  Buddhist  bell  and    beads       124 

58.  Paper-house   burnt   for  the  benefit  of  the  dead       128 

59.  Paper  streamers  placed  on  graves       130 

60.  The  Wheel  of  the  Metempsychosis     133 

61-1.  Metamorphosed  into  insects,  worms,  fish,  and  other  animals  134 

61-2.  Metamorphosed  into  various  kinds  of  shell-fish        135 

61-3.  Metamorphosed    into     various    products    of  the    vegetable 

kingdom       136 

61-4.  Metamorphosed  into   various    household   articles,    utensils 

and    instruments         137 

62bis.  Hsiung-shah.   Ghost    of    deceased    in    masculine    form. 

—  Tz'e-shah.   Ghost  of  deceased   in   female   form       ...  143 

62.  Sung  T'ai-tsu  and  the  Ghost       144 

63.  Evocation    of  the    Dead          147 

64.  Tso-chai.    Buddhist  service  for  releasing  souls  out  of  Hades  151 

65.  Written  charm  suspended  in  the   midst   of  the    hall      ...  152 

Charm  suspended  facing  the  North    >> 

Charm  suspended  facing  the  East       >» 

Charm  suspended  facing  the  South    >> 

Charm  suspended  facing  the  West     >> 


Fig.  1 


La  "Koang-yng"  aux  enfants. 
Kwan-yin  presenting  a  child  to  mothers  praying  for  offspring. 


Fig.   2 


-t-tL  ■*ii*A*& 


'/'cJie-ma"  de  "Koang-yng"  aux  habits  blancs,  brule"  en  son  honneur  pour  obtenir  des  enfants. 
Paper  print  (charm)  representing  the  White-robed  Kwan-yin, 
burnt  in  her  honour  to  obtain  posterity. 


tsHr'^^ 


Temple  of  Heav 


CHAPTER      I. 

BIRTH    AND    CHILDHOOD 
II     £      %J     P# 


Tan     Sheng     Yin     Shi 


ARTICLE    I. 
BEFORE     BIRTH 

To  have  a  numerous  posterity,  is  the  great,  if  not  the  greatest 
desire  of  all  Chinese.  Hence  many  are  the  divinities  invoked  in  order 
to  obtain  children  !  The  following'  are  a  few  of  these  Gods  selected 
from  among  hundreds. 

A),     (*ods  specially  worshipped  in  order  to  obtain  children. 

First  of  all  we  find  the  famous  Goddess  Kwan-yin  or  Kwan-yin 


Pus  ah  M 


*£■     4* 


;,    whose    worship    is    ever    on    the    increase.      A 


picture  representing  her  is  found  in  all  temples,  and  almost  every- 
where, one  can  see  a  small  shoe  or  several  of  them  deposited  at  the 
foot  of  her  statue.      This  is  an  offering  made  by  some   woman,    who 

1 


has  begged  the  Goddess  to  grant  her  a  child.  As  a  pledge  of  her 
trust,  the  shoe  has  been  placed  there.  Various  are  the  customs 
connected  with  this  offering.  Elsewhere,  one  of  a  pair  of  shoes 
deposited  at  the  feet  of  the  Goddess,  is  borrowed,  and  when  the 
expected  child  is  born,  the  shoe  is  restored,  and  as  an  ex-voto,  a 
new  pair  is  added  into  the  bargain.  A  sacred  banquet  frequently 
accompanies  the  above  act,  to  return  thanks  for  the  favour  received. 
In  such  cases  a  bonze  recites  a  prayer  in  thanksgiving. 

T'ien-sien  Sung-tze  ^i  j\\i  :M  ~f  (lne  Celestial  Fairy  granting 
children),  is  exposed  in  several  houses  of  pagans.  This  Goddess, 
ol  Taoist  origin,  seems  to  be  none  other  than  the  daughter  of  the 
God  who  dwells  in  the  Sacred  Mountain  of  the  East.  She  is  called 
the  T'ai-shan  ^  |Jj  Goddess,  T'ai-shan  Niayig-niang  ^  (Jj  i$  t£ 
(1),  and  is  specially  worshipped  in  Shantung  \\]  j|f,  and  all  the 
adjoining  provinces.  <  >ther  inferior  Goddesses  serve  her  as  assist- 
ants and  seem  charged  with  carrying  out  her  orders.  They  may  be 
generally  seen  beside  her,  either  in  temples,  or  in  pictures  which 
represent  her.  The  following  are  the  names  of  those  commonly 
found  attending  on  her : 

Ts'ui-sheng  Niang-niang  f||   ££.  1$  M- 

The  Goddess  accelerating   birth. 

Sung-sheng  Niang-niang  gf  ^  t&  i$. 

The  Goddess  granting  children. 

Tze-sun  Niang-niang  tF  ^  ^  ^. 

The  Goddess  bestowing  posterity  (sons  and  grandsons). 

Chu-sheng  Niang-niang  ^  ^  fl|  i$. 

The  Goddess  of  fecundity. 

This  last  Goddess  is  particularly  worshipped  in  several  of  the 
Southern  provinces.  She  is  attended  on  by  a  host  of  female  genii, 
whose  duty   is  to  protect  children. 

The  festival  of  this  Chinese  '-Fatal  Sister"  falls  on  the  fifteenth 
day  o|  the  sixth  month;  meats  placed  on  the  family  bed  are  offered 
to  honour  her. 


(1)     See  T  ii    ban  Nianj!  nianp  Pao  kiien  ^  [\\  Q&  £g  't!f  5g  p.  g.  ->; 


Fig.   3 


Rising  du  haut  des  cieux  protege  le  nouveau-nd.    Sur  un  char  on  voit  le  bonnet  des  academiciens. 
Kw'ei-sing,  the  God  of  Literature,  protects  from  on  high  the  new-born  child. 
On  a  car  is  seen  the  academic  head-dress  worn  by  scholars. 


Fig.   4 


Tchang  Kouo-lao,  le  pourvoyeur  d'enfants. 
Chang  Kwo-lao  offers  a  descendant  to  a  newly  married  couple. 


—  3  — 

Pictures  represent  her  riding  on  a  unicorn,  or  a  phoenix,  or 
borne  on  the  clouds  of  heaven  ;  she  holds  a  child  in  her  arms,  and 
her  attendant  ladies  throng  round  to  render  her  every  service. 

According  to  popular  belief,  at  least  in  many  places,  this 
Goddess  receives  from  Yen  Wang  HI]  3E,  the  God  of  Hades,  the 
souls  purified  by  expiations  in  the  Buddhist  hell,  and  by  the  series 
of  transmigrations  deserved  through  their  faults  in  some  previous 
existence.  It  is  she  who  decides  into  what  bodies  these  souls  are 
to  be  reborn  on  earth. 

Elsewhere,  prayers  are  preferably  addressed  to  the  Holy  Mother, 
Queen  of  Heaven,  T'ien-heu  Sheng-mu  Ji  fe  H  -fij:,  whose  statue 
occupies  the  most  honourable  place  in  the  temples  known  as  Peh- 
l:e  fang  ~gf  -^  ^,  or  temples  of  the  "Hundred  Children". 

Among  other  female  deities,  tutelary  guardians  of  children, 
mention  may  also  be  made  of  the  Goddess  that  guides  childhood, 
the  Goddess  presiding  over  suckling,  the  Holy  Mother,  who  grants 
fecundity:    Pao-sheng  Sheng-mu  f!£   d^  M  -0J:  etc... 

Female  deities  are  not  alone  invoked;  a  lew  gods  are  likewise 
particularly  disposed  to  graciously  hear  the  prayers  addressed  to 
them  for  the  obtaining  of  children.  Thus  Ngan-kung  ^  Q,  has 
great  repute  in  the  district  city  of  Fan-chang  hsien  fj|  J|  $£, 
province  of  Ngan-hwei  -^  $fr,  and  he  is  constantly  worshipped  in 
order  to  obtain  male  children. 

Families  of  official  standing  and  literati  frequently  invoke  Kwei- 
sing  ^[-  j^,  the  God  of  Literature,  and  beg  him  grant  them  talented 
offspring,  who  may  win  academic  laurels  at  the  examinations.  For 
the  same  purpose,  a  picture  of  Kwan-kimg  ||j  ^,  is  exposed  in  the 
nuptial  chamber  of  the  young  couple,  offering  them  a  youthful 
descendant  wearing  the  official  academic  head-dress. 

At  other  times,  we  find  Lit  Tung-pin  g  -j|?j  %  and  Kwan-kung 
||  ^,  bearing  in  their  arms  a  male  child.  This  is- an  assurance 
that  the  new  home  will  be  blessed  with  numerous  progeny,  reckon- 
ing amongst  them  learned  literati  and  remarkable  state  officials.  It 
is  indeed  a  well  known  fact  that  Lu  Tung-pin  g  -j|p]  JfC,  is  one  of  the 


__  4  — 

Immortals  honoured  by  the  literati,  and  that  Kwan-kung  |ffj  £> , 
combines  in  his  person  the  title  of  God  of  War  and  patron  of 
Literature. 

Chang  Kwo-lao  ;Jj|  ^  ^,  sitting  on  a  donkey,  offers  also  a 
descendant  to  the  newly  married  couple,  and  a  picture  representing 
him  is  often  found  in  the  nuptial  chamber. 

Pagans  employ  many  luck-bearing  pictures  to  secure  the  above 
purpose.  It  is  thus  that  one  generally  finds,  either  a  unicorn  with 
a  child  sitting  on  it,  or  a  phcenix  holding  a  child,  and  wending  its 
flight  towards  some  home  ;  also  the  well  known  pictures  called  the 
"Hundred  Children",  on  which  are  represented  one  hundred  male 
children,  who  share  among  themselves  all  the  honours  and  dignities 
of  the  world. 


Fig.  5 


T'ien  sien  song  tse.     Assise  sur  son  char,  elle  porte  un  enfant  a  un  heureux  manage. 
The  Celestial  Fairy  that  bestows  children.     Borne  on  a  chariot, 
she  presents  a  child  to  a  happy  household. 


Fig.  6 


Ivi-ling  song-tse,  ou  la  licorne  apportant  un  enfant. 
The  Ki-lin  or  Unicorn  bestowing  a  child. 


—  5  — 
B).     Sonic  other  superstitious  practices. 

1".      Exposing  the  tablet  (of  a  certain  Goddess)  in  the  house. 

Tslui~sheng  Niang-niang  0  ^  i$  $g.  the  Goddess  hastening 
birth,  is  held  in  great  veneration. 

When  childbirth  is  too  laborious,  incense  is  burnt  in  her 
temple,  vows  are  made,  or  even  her  tablet  is  fetched  with  great 
pomp  and  exposed  in  the  house  of  the  woman  in  labour  ;  the  clothes 
of  the  latter  are  laid  upon  this  tablet,  to  urge  the  protection  of  the 
Goddess. 

K'o-ku  Niang-niang  ^  jfc  ^  t&-  formerly  midwife  at  ffu-0 
Chow  ^p  jH"|,  in  the  province  of  Ngan-hwei  4£  $fc.  and  subsequently 
deified,  on  account  of  the  services  she  rendered  during  her  earthly 
career,  is  worshipped  by  all  the  women  of  the  place,  who  organize 
an  annual  procession  in  her  honour.  Shrines  are  erected  to  venerate 
her,  and  her  tablet  occupies  a  prominent  position  in  the  temples 
dedicated  to  the  other  local  deities.  This  tablet  is  taken  from  house  to 
house,  so  that  she  may  extend  her  protection  to  all  cases  of  childbirth. 

2°.      Talismans. 

Should  childbirth  be  too  delayed,  recourse  is  had  to  Taoist  or 
Buddist  monks,  who  write  out  paper  talismans  and  charms.  It  is 
but  required  to  paste  these  on  the  woman's  body  to  secure  the 
desired  effect. 

Many  of  these  charms  enjoy  great  repute.  The  common  people 
are  thoroughly  convinced,  that  when  applied,  the  child  will  see  the 
light  of  day,  even  were  it  necessary  that  the  mother's  womb  be  rent 
and  split  open. 

Sometimes  these  charms  are  burnt,  and  the  ashes,  mingled 
with  some  beverage,  are  administered  to  the  patient  in  order  to 
hasten  the  delivery. 

Annexed  herewith  (figures  7  and  7bifa)  are  models  of  two  paper 
charms,  reputed  infallible  for  hastening  the  delivery  of  women  with 
child. 

Manner  of  using  these  charms.  — They  are  burnt,  and  the  ashes 
steeped  in  wine,  are  given  to  the  woman  in  labour. 


—  6  — 

3°.     Fortune-tellers. 

Women  with  child  frequently  consult  fortune-tellers,  to  ascer- 
tain the  sex  oi  the  child,   which  they  are  going  to  bring  forth. 

4°.      The  magic  mirror. 

Many  women,  while  child-bearing,  keep  on  their  persons  a 
small  brass  mirror.  This  is  intended  as  a  charm  to  ward  off  all 
evil  influences,  which  might  affect  the  child  they  bear  in  their 
womb. 

Thus  protected,  they  may,  without  incurring  danger,  enter  a 
house  where  people  wear  mourning  for  a  deceased  person,  and  their 
child  will  not  thereby  be  exposed  to  die. 

5°.      Drawing  lh<>  horoscope. 

The  hour  and  day  in  which  a  child  may  be  born  affect 
wonderfully,  according  to  common  belief,  the  future  destiny  of  the 
new-born  babe.  All  details  relating  to  these,  are  carefully  noted 
down,  and  the  fortune-teller  bases  his  conjectures  thereon  to  draw 
the  horoscope  of  the  child.  Fancy  figures  are  also  used  for  simplify- 
ing operations.  On  each  of  the  members,  represented  in  a  diagram, 
is  written  one  of  the  twelve  horary  characters  :  one  on  the  forehead, 
another  on  the  right  arm,  a  third  on  the  abdomen  and  so  forth. 

When  the  child  is  born,  a  glance  is  quickly  cast  on  the  part 
oi  the  body  coi  responding  with  the  hour- mark  of  his  birth,  and 
l hence  the  future  destiny  of  the  child  is  augured  (1). 

6°.      Little  statues  representing  childreyi. 

In  some  temples  are  found  little  statues  representing  children, 
and   people  may  wish  to  know  why  they  have  been   placed  there. 

Consider  a  little  the  women  who  examine  these  statues  most 
carefully  :  when  one  of  them  has  found  a  suitable  little  figure,  she 
places  a  string  of  cash  around  its  neck;  one  of  the  Buddhist  monks 
attached  to  the  temple,  imposes  a  name  on  the  little  figure  selected, 
and     the    devotees    are    henceforth    convinced     that    thev    will    obtain 


See  Dt  nn\  i.      flu    Folklore  of  China.  Ch  IT.  p.  S. 
"In  birth,  tlir  forehead  shows, 
A  fa'i'  that  never  sorrow  knows." 


Fig.  7 


3f 

ft 


Amulette  pour  hater  la  d^livrance.     On  brule  la  feuille,  puis 

on  donne  les  cendres  a  boire  dans  du  vin. 

Written  charm  for  hastening  delivery.    The  charm  is  burnt,  and  the  ashes  mingled 

■with  wine  are  given  to  the  woman  in  labour. 


Autre  talisman  tres  efficace  pour  activer  la  dt'livrance. 
Another  efficacious  charm  for  hastening  delivery. 


children,  who  will  bear  the  name  applied  to  the  little  statue.  This 
means  is  frequently  employed  by  those  who  have  no  male  offspring 
in  the  family. 

7°     New-born  child  offered  to  a  God. 

In  other  families,  the  following  means  is  adopted.  A  vow  is 
offered  to  a  particular  divinity,  and  a  promise  made,  that  the  new- 
born child  will  be  offered  to  him  as  a  Buddhist  monk,  and  that  he 
will  don  the  monkish  garb,  in  grateful  acknowledgment  of  the 
favour  received. 

In  both  cases,  the  child  is  ransomed,  by  offering  an  alms  to  the 
temple,  either  in  money  or  in  kind.  The  practical  side  of  the 
bargain  is  never  neglected  ! 

A  child-bearing  woman  should  carefully  avoid  entering  a  place 
where  silk- worms  are  reared,  and  this  for  two  reasons.  Woman 
being  of  the  female  or  dark  principle  Yin  (%,  is  bound  to  affect 
them  adversely,  but  the  principal  reason  is  that  the  silk-worms  are 
smothered  in  their  cocoons,  and  hence  it  is  to  be  feared  that  the 
child  in  the  mother's  womb  will  meet  with  a  similar  fate. 


—  8  — 

ARTICLE    II. 
AFTER     BIRTH. 

1°     The  first  tubbing.  Si-tsao  -j£  $|. 

On  the  third  day  after  a  child  is  born,  it  is  placed  in  a  tub, 
and  carefnllv  washed.  When  the  operation  is  over,  a  fortune- 
teller is  summoned.  Considering  the  circumstances  of  the  day  and 
hour  of  birth,  he  forecasts  what  obstacle  or  ill-starred  barrier,  may 
beset  the  pathway  of  the  new-born  child.  In  a  word,  he  casts  his 
horoscope. 

2°.      The  secen-slar  lamp.   Ts'ih-sing  teng  -£    Jfr  j^. 

If  he  must  meet  on  his  way  the  barrier  of  the  seven  early 
diseases,  Ts'ih-chao  fung-kwan  ^  i|Fj  ||[  |||,  he  is  destined  to  die 
within  seven  days.  In  this  untoward  circumstance,  seven  lights, 
called  the  seven-star  lamp,  Ts'ih-sing  teng  ^  Jjr  j§.  must  be 
prepared  without  delay,  and  are  to  be  kept  burning  beside  the  child 
during  seven  days  and   nights. 

3°.      The  peach-wood  arrows.  Tao-tsien  ^  ^. 

If  the  wiles  of  some  evil  genius  are  feared,  peach-wood  arrows 
are  very  often  prepared,  and  shot  by  an  archer  in  all  directions,  or 
simply  placed  over  the  cradle  of  the  child.  Peach-wood,  as  we  shall 
see  further  on,  is  a  powerful  antidote  against  attacks  by  evil  spirits. 


Fig.  8 


rcher  tirant  des  fleches  en  bois  de  pecher,  pour  mettre  en  fuite  le  chien  celeste. 
Bowman  shooting  peach-wood  arrows  to  scare  away  the  heavenly  dog. 


i°.      The  devil  that  ravishes  children.  T'eu-sheng  kweijfft  £$&. 

Frequently  the  fatal  visit  of  the  devil  that  ravishes  children 
T'eu-sheng  kwei  ifa  &  %.,  is  the  object  of  the  greatest  anxiety  on 
the  part  of  parents.  This  matter  shall  be  treated  subsequently,  when 
dealing"  with  the  superstitions  concerning  children.  While  writing 
these  lines,  let  me  be  allowed  to  adduce  as  an  illustration  of  the 
above  superstition,  a  quite  dramatic  incident,  which  occurred  in  the 
town  of  1 1  wo  Chow  ^fl  j>\].  The  evil  spirit  T'eu-sheng  hwei  jfo  £ 
^,  appeared  at  first  in  the  shape  of  a  yellow  dog,  apparently  that 
of  a  neighbour,  and  threatened  to  ravish  a  child,  who  happened  to 
be  then  ailing. 

The  dog  is  immediately  driven  away  ;  then  a  dozen  watchmen 
are  summoned,  and  armed  with  knives,  they  keep  watch  day  and 
night.  The  child  thus  escapes  for  the  first  time.  A  few  days 
afterwards,  a  cursed  cat  peeps  in  at  the  door.  A  second  battle 
must  be  now  fought.  This  time,  the  mother  herself  takes  an  active 
part  in  the  struggle.  Stripping  off  the  child's  clothes,  she  lays  him 
stark  naked  on  the  bed,  in  order  to  keep  at  a  respectful  distance  the 
villainous  female  form  assumed  by  T'eu-sheng  hwei  f|j  ^r  j^.  This 
done,  she  takes  in  her  hand  the  full  apparel  of  the  child,  ascends 
to  the  house-top,  and  there,  in  presence  of  all  the  neighbours 
assembled  to  contemplate  the  scene,  sets  to  curse  T'eu-sheng-hwei 
1wl  QiL  M,i  casting  in  her  face  all  sorts  of  pagan  abominations,  so 
that,  should  she  still  preserve  a  remnant  o§-  shame,  she  durst  not 
intrude  on  the  gaze  of  her  child,  while  he  is  garbed  as  Adam  in  the 
terrestrial  paradise.  \n  line,  she  pours  out  such  a  volley  of  curses, 
that  the  child  escapes  death,  and  she  is  congratulated  by  all  her 
friends. 

5°.      Peach-wooil  amulets.   Tao-fu  Iffc  ^". 

It  still  happens  that  parents  are  so  credulous  as  to  believe  in 
the  quaint  stories  of  bygone  times,  which  pretend  that  in  order 
to  give  solidity  to  the  foundations  of  a  large  building,  or  to  the 
pillars  of  a  bridge,  the  demons  employ  children  as  propping 
stones.  Soothsayers  employ  this  tricky  practice  even  at  the  present 
day.      Assuming  a  disconsolate  appearance,  they   inform  the  parents 

2 


— 10  — 

that  their  child  has  been  chosen  to  impart  solidity  to  such  or  such 
a  bridge  in  process  of  construction.  Great  anxiety  is  naturally 
experienced.  Peach-wood  amulets  are  then  made,  and  hung  round 
the  neck  of  the  child,  thus  preventing  the  demons  from  approaching 
him. 

6°.  Amulet  made  of  dog's  hair  to  protect  the  child  until  it 
first  /cares  the  house.  Keu-mao-fu  ^pj  ^§  $£.  (dog-hair  charm). 

During  the  first  month  after  birth,  neither  the  child  or  its 
mother  may  cross  the  threshold  of  the  house.  The  child's  head 
must  be  first  shaved;  then  a  lock  of  his  hair  is  mixed  with  some 
dog's  hair,  rolled  up  into  a  ball  and  sewn  on  to  his  clothes,  after 
which  he  may  be  taken  out.  Henceforth,  he  can  visit  neighbours, 
who  have  now  nothing  to  fear  from  his  presence.  It  would  be  a 
great  misfortune  for  a  family,  if  a  new-born  child  entered  their 
house  before  being  a  month  old.  Many  superstitions  would  have 
then  to  be  resorted  to  in  order  to  prevent  impending  evil. 

In  the  Northern  parts  of  China,  even  the  threshing-ground  in 
front  of  the  house,  is  dug  up  to  ward  off  some  terrible  misfortune. 
(1)  The  mother  herself  should  first  of  all  visit  a  member  of  her  own 
family  before  entering  the  house  of  a  stranger. 

7°.  Wearing  a  necklace  made  of  copper  coins  (cash).  Ts'ien- 
lung  U*  ||!. 

Moreover,  it  is  customary  to  hang  a  few  coppers  on  a  red 
string,  and  place  this  on  the  neck  of  the  god  Ch'eng-hwang  jjfc  |$j|, 
in   his  temple. 

Ch'eng-hwang  j$  |g|  is  the  god  of  walled  cities  and  moats,  and 
holds  the  rank  of  celestial  madarin.  When  the  necklace  has  been 
worn  some  time  by  the  god,  it  is  placed  on  the  neck  of  the  child. 
and  used  as  a  charm  to  ward  off  all  untoward  evils. 

8°.      Killing  a  cock.     Sha-ki  ^  |§. 

In  some  places,  it  is  customary  to  kill  a  cock  on  the  third  day 
alter  a  child's  birth.     This  sacrifice  is  offered  to  the  ancestors  of  the 


Foe  "Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Beige  a'etndes  coloniales."  Sep.  Oct.  15th  year. 


Fig.  9 


re- 


TTJ>2 


'C(L 


O 


'/ 


!s 


~o; 


Tchang-sien  song-tse. 
Chang  the  Immortal,  who  protects  children. 


—  11  — 

family,  whose  lineal  descent  is  maintained  in  the  person  of  the 
child.  It  is  also  to  thank  the  (Goddess  Sung-tze  Niang-niang  y£  ^f- 
ijfl^  Jjl,  the  giver  of  children.  Those  who  are  too  poor,  may  purchase 
some  meat,  and  offer  it  instead  of  a  cock.  If  the  fortune-teller 
finds  that  the  new-born  child  must  pass  the  barrier  of  old  age, 
Lao-jen-hwan  -%r  J\  ||,,  there  is  but  one  means  to  rescue  him,  from 
the  mortal  danger  to  which  he  is  exposed.  An  old  man,  willing  to 
take  mourning,  is  chosen,  and  thanks  to  this  device,  the  child  will 
escape  all  danger  of  death. 

9°.      Names  of  animal*  or  of  slave-girls  given    lo  male  children. 
Ch'uh-ming   j§  fa,   Ya-t'eu   y  |jjf . 

It  often  happens  that  children  are  given  the  name  of  an  animal, 
as  "little  pussy",  Siao-mao  j]\  ^\\\ ;  "little  dog",  Siao-heu  ;J-»  ^pj  : 
at  other  times,  they  receive  the  name  of  a  slave-girl,  Ya-teu  y  jpf . 
The  following  is  the  reason  of  such  appellations.  People  imagine 
that  by  using  a  little  cunning  and  trickery,  they  may  succeed  in 
deceiving  the  wily  elves,  who  seek  to  injure  male  children,  but  care 
little  to  molest  girls  or  animals.  To  put  them  on  a  false  track,  the 
name  of  an  animal  or  of  a  girl  is  given  to  the  new-born  male  child, 
whom  one  wishes  to  protect  from  their  vexatious  pursuits.  Hearing 
him  called  by  these  names,  they  are  led  to  believe  that  he  is  indeed 
a  little  animal,  or  at  most  a  girl,  and  will  thus  abandon  the  idea 
of  cutting  short  his  life. 

10°.      Little  hell-charms.  Ling-lze  ^  ^ . 

Many  consider  that  the  custom  of  attaching  little  bells  to  the 
feet  of  a  child,  when  it  begins  to  walk,  has  had  a  superstitious 
origin.  The  purpose  was  to  frighten  the  malevolent  spirits  by  means 
of  these  bells  and  thus  scare  them  off. 

11°.      The  vermilion  mark. 

Red  is  the  colour  betokening  joy,  and  is  employed  on  marriage 
days  and  other  festal  occurrences.  It  is  a  lucky  omen.  Hence 
children  may  be  seen  bearing  a  vermilion  mark  on  the  tip  of  the 
nose,  on  the  forehead,  or  on  the  two  cheeks,  and  this  augurs 
happiness. 


—  12  — 

12°.     Ill-treating  the  corpses  of  little  children. 

When  all  the  children  die  in  a  family,  the  custom  of  horribly 
mutilating"  a  body  is  frequently  resorted  to.  It  is  cut  up  with 
knives,  and  sometimes  even  cruelly  lacerated  with  the  teeth,  in  order 
to  prevent  it  from  returning-,  and  molesting  those  who  may  be 
subsequently  born.  It  is  also  customary  in  some  places  to  hang 
on  the  neck  of  the  corpse  a  magic  charm-bag,  made  of  dog's  hair 
and  other  ingredients,  in  order  to  counteract  any  charms  or  witch- 
craft it  might  use  in  case  it  returned  to  life  once  more. 


Fig.  10 


Le  cadenas,   gage  d'une  vie  longue  et  heureuse. 
Padlock  assuring  a  long  and  happy  life. 


—  13  ^ 


ARTICLE    III. 
SUPERSTITIOUS  CUSTOMS  CO\(F,R\l\G  CHILDREN. 

/.      Wearing  the  padlock.  Tai-suo  J^  ff|. 

Many  children  wear  a  padlock  attached  to  the  neck  with  a 
silver  chain.  This  is  intended  to  enchain  them  in  somewise  to 
existence,  and  prevent  their  being  ravished  by  death  from  their 
affectionate  parents.  These  padlocks  may  be  found  in  all  silver- 
smiths" shops,  and  vary  in  si/e  and  shape.  Sometimes  the  Budd- 
hist or  Taoist  priests,  Tao-shi  p||  ^,  tie  them  on  with  their 
own  hands  round  the  necks  of  children.  There  are  also  the 
"hundred  family  padlocks,"  Peh-kia-suo  Hf  %  f|\  or  those  pur- 
chased bv  general  subscription.  Life  and  death  depend  alone  on 
God's  will,  and  nobody  has  it  in  his  power  to  enchain  a  person  to 
the  present  life.  Experience  proves  every  day,  that  death  does  not 
respect  those  who  wear  padlocks  as  preservatives,  any  more  than 
those  who  fail  to  use  them. 


—  14  — 

//.      Wearing  the  silver  collar.   Tai-k'ilen  ;i£  [f|j. 

The  collar  is  a  ring  made  of  silver,  large  enough  to  be  taken 
off  or  resumed  at  will,  without  it  being  necessary  to  disjoin  it.  It 
is  generally  composed  of  a  single  piece,  and  the  head  can  easily 
pass  through  the  opening.  This  ring  is  worn  round  the  neck,  almost 
in  the.  same  manner  as  a  dog's  collar.  Would  to  heaven,  some  seem 
to  sav,  that  my  child  were  as  easy  to  rear  and  bring  up  as  those 
little  whelps  that  are  seldom  ever  sick,  enjoy  excellent  appetite  and 
die  but  rarely.  Such  is  in  general  the  idea  entertained  about  the 
education  of  a  child.      It  is  merely  the  bringing  up  of  a  little  dog. 

Others,  and  1  have  heard  the  opinion  expressed  in  the  Hsia-ho 
~J*  '(?[  country,  North  Kiang-su  fX  jffc>  pretend  that  this  silver  ring 
hems  in  life,  so  to  say,  in  the  body  of  the  child,  and  hinders  the 
soul  from  being  separated  from  the  body,  much  in  the  same  way  as 
hoops  prevent  a  barrel  from  falling  to  pieces. 

Commonly  this  ring  is  called  Keu-lr  ixen  ^p]  [||J,  or  a  dog-collar. 
A  person  often  meets  friends  of  a  family,  offering  one  of  these  silver 
rings,  as  a  mark  of  congratulation,  whenever  a  male  child  is  born 
to  them. 

Parents,  fearing  to  be  unable  to  bring  up  a  child,  lend  him  for 
form  sake  to  a  neighbour.  This  latter,  through  a  figure  of  speech, 
becomes  his  foster  father,  the  child  being  called  his  dry  son,  Knn- 
eul-lzo  ^  |E   "?<  and  he  presents  him  a  collar  as  an  adopted  son. 

At  times,  one  meets  children  wearing  a  silver  ring  passed 
through  the  nose,  as  is  wont  to  be  done  with  cattle. 


Fig.   11 


Jeune  enfant  portant  le  collier. 
Child  wearing  the  silver  collar 


Fig.   12 


Le  pendant  d'oreille. 
Boy  wearing  an  ear-ring. 


—   15  — 

///..      Wearing  ear-rings.  Tai-eul-ch'ui-lze   y$  J\.  jj||  ^f-. 

Boys  wear  an  ear-ring  attached  to  one  of  their  ears  during 
childhood,  and  often  even  in  more  advanced  age.  Youths  of  twenty 
summers  and  more  may  be  found  with  this  appendage,  which  is 
made   either  of  silver  of  gold. 

The  idea,  generally  connected  with  this  practice,  is  the  follow- 
ing. 

Only  little  girls  wear  ear-rings.  Should  I  attach  one  on  the 
ear  of  my  boy,  the  evil  spirits,  who  ever  seek  to  injure  male  child- 
ren, shall  be  deceived  by  this  device.  Seeing  an  ear-ring,  they  will 
take  the  individual  wearing  it  for  a  girl,  and  thus  will  not  molest 
him.  Some  astrologers  also  say  it  is  intended  to  deceive  the  female 
constellations,  that  preside  over  the  destiny  of  the  family,  and  put 
to  death  all  its  male  offspring. 

Persons  give  to  this  ear-ring  the  form  of  the  weight  of  a  clock, 
as  this  represents  according  to  their  idea  something  heavy  and 
hard  to  raise.  The  evil  spirits  would  thus  be  unable  to  snatch  from 
this  world  my  beloved  child,  the  weight  attaching  him  to  the  ground 
and  riveting  him  to  existence.  Generally,  it  is  the  uncle  of  the 
child  who  fixes  the  ear-ring  on  him. 

If  it  be  necessary  to  take  it  off,  the  child's  own  parents  would 
never  dare  lay  their  hand  on  it.  This  fact,  I  have  witnessed  several 
times. 

In  order  to  deceive  the  evil  spirits,  who  are  thought  to  have 
caused  the  death  of  a  child,  the  name  of  a  girl  is  given  to  the  next 
male  child  born. 

To  this  practice  must  be  generally  ascribed  the  term  "slave 
girl"   Ya-l'eu   y   JM>  which  is  so  frequently  applied  to  male  children. 

In  the  district  of  Suh-tsien  ^  j§,  and  the  departments  of  P'i 
Chow  2|$  4>|>|,  and  Ilni  Chow  $fc  ')]]  (North  Kiangsui,  one  finds 
frequently  little  boys  called  by  their  pet  name,  Lih-k'eu  j£  }n ,  or 
Lik-shwan  j£  f-^.  These  expressions  denote  that  they  have  been 
buckled,  linked,  solidly  pinned  together,  after  enduring  great 
trouble  to  secure  them. 


—  16  — 

It  is  especially  in  the  two  following  cases  that  these  names  are 
given  :  when  parents  have  been  long  childless,  or  when  the  eldest 
children  of  a  family  have  died.  In  almost  all  such  cases,  new-born 
male  children  receive  an  ear-ring,  as  if  they  were  girls. 


Fig.  13 


L'enfilee  de  sapeques. 
Child  wearing  a  string  of  cash  suspended  from  the  neck. 


—  17  — 

IV.      Wearing  a  string  of  cash.   Tai-ts'ien   §^  |^. 

This  practice,  it  may  be  said,  is  universal.  In  some  places, 
all  children  have  one  or  several  copper-coins  (cash),  hung  on  a  red 
string  and  worn  round  the  neck. 

Ancient  coins  of  the  T'ang  J^;,  or  Sung  5jc  dynasty  are  prefer- 
red. Among  those  of  the  late  Manchu  or  T'sing  -^  dynasty,  cash 
dating  from  the  reign  of  K'ang-hsi  j^  JSB,  or  Kia-k'ing  fjL  J|,  are 
also  much  prized. 

This  string  of  cash  (comprising  sometimes  eight  or  ten  coins'  is 
for  the  child  a  kind  of  talisman  portending  happiness,  a  prosperous 
future,  riches  and  well-being.  It  supplies  the  absence  of  the  padlock, 
and  is  an  easier  and  less  expensive  practice. 


*v\  -v  «/^v*i^/V  wvw\/w\ 


—  18  — 

V.      Wearing  the  eight  diagrams.  Tai-p&h-kwa  ^  A  ^ • 

Other  children  wear  in  a  like  manner,  attached  to  a  cord  and 
hanging'  from  the  neck,  a  rather  large  plate  made  of  copper,  silver 
or  mother-of-pearl.  On  one  side  are  inscribed  the  eight  diagrams 
of  Fuh-hsi  ££  .||,  commonly  called  "Puh-kwa  A  i[  \  while  the 
obverse  of  this  large  breast-plate  or  medal,  bears  the  Shih-eul-shuh 
t~  ZL  Mi  ol  twelve  animals  representing  the  cycle  of  sixty  years. 
Sometimes  these  plates  have  the  shape  of  a  real  medal.  They  bear 
inscriptions  resembling  preservative  talismans,  and  are  accompanied 
by  pompons  sentences  assuring  nntold  prosperity  in  the  future. 


Fig.   14 


L'amulette  des  huit  trigrammes. 
Charm  representing  the  eight  diagrayns. 


Fig.   15 


Enfant  portant  la  couronne  de  cheveux. 
Child  with  crown  of  hair  shaven  off. 


—  19  — 

VI.      Wearing  the  crown  of  hair.  Liu-ku  |g  ffi. 

This  practice  consists  in  shaving'  the  summit  of  the  head,  and 
leaving  but  a  ringlet  of  hair  over  the  forehead.  On  no  account 
must  this  crown  be  shaved  till  a  child  has  attained  the  age  of 
sixteen,  otherwise  he  will  be  exposed  to  an  untimely  death.  The 
following  explains  this  apprehension.  According  to  the  fanciful 
stories  told  by  the  Taoist  priests  "Tao.-shV  jg  {^,  before  a  child 
reaches  the  age  of  manhood,  he  must  pass  through  certain  barriers 
occurring  along  the  roadway  of  youth,  and  unless  he  bears  this 
distinctive  mark,  the  road  of  life  is  barred  against  him  and  he  meets 
with  death . 

Fortune-tellers,  after  having  examined  the  eight  horary  charac- 
ters, which  determine  the  exact  time  of  a  child's  birth,  calculate  the 
year  and  month,  at  which  during  the  course  of  his  life,  he  will 
reach  a  particular  barrier,  then  finally  at  what  age  he  will  attain 
the  last  one.  When  all  the  barriers  are  passed,  the  crown  of  hair 
may  be  shaved,  as  there  is  no  further  danger  to  be  feared. 

Note. —  It  seems  that  in  some  places  this  practice  of  shaving 
the  head  is  the  general  fashion,  independently  of  any  superstitious 
notion,  which  may  hare  given  rise  tn  it.  In  such  a  case,  I  consi<ier 
that  christian  j>arents  should  avoid  by  all  weans,  not  only  to  con- 
sult the  fortune  teller,  hut  should  likewise  banish  any  belief  what- 
soever in  these  pretended  passages  through  barriers,  otherwise  the.]/ 
commit  a  real  superstitious  act,  by  allowing  this  crown  of  hair  to 
be  worn  by  their  children. 

These  barriers  are  thirty  in  number;  their  names  will  be  found 
in  one  of  the  subsequent  chapters. 


—  ;=|.  *  i= 


—  20  — 

VII.      Wearing  the  habit  of  a   bonze. 
Chang  hwo-shang  i-shang  If  ^D  foj  ^  ^. 

It  must  be  generally  admitted  that  parents  who  make  their 
children  wear  the  habit  of  a  bonze,  do  so  a  little  through  custom, 
and  without  having  any  settled  idea  on  the  matter.  Jt  is,  however, 
difficult  to  admit  that  there  is  not  at  least  some  hankering  after  the 
protection  of  the  gods,  Pu-sahs  ^  |§,  when  one  makes  a  child  wear 
the  habit  of  their  special  ministers,  the  bonzes. 

Others  practise  this  superstition  after  full  and  mature  consider- 
ation, or  even  after  having  explicitly  vowed  to  do  so.  If  the  god 
or  Pu-sah  ^  f|f,  grants  me  a  child,  I  promise  that  he  shall  wear 
the  habit  of  a  bonze  till  he  reaches  such  an  age. 


Fig.   16 


Forme  de  l'habit  de  bonze. 
Habit  of  Buddhist  monk  worn  by  children. 


Fig.  17 


Specimen  cTun  habit  des  cent  families. 
Variegated  dress  known  as  that  of  the  "hundred  families'". 


—  21  — 

Wearing!  the  dress  cf  the  hundred  families. 

Peh-kia-i  -g  %  £. 

Connected  with  what  has  been  just  stated  on  wearing  the  habit 
of  a  bonze,  is  the  custom  of  begging  from  door  to  door  a  piece  of 
cloth,  and  with  the  various  and  different  pieces  making  a  dress  for  a 
child,  upon  whom  one  wishes  to  call  down  the  blessing  of  the 
gods.  This  child  is  cherished  by  all,  every  one  considers  him  as 
their  own,  and  makes  him  a  present  of  a  dress,  how  then  may 
people  not  hope,  that  he  will  be  preserved  through  the  special 
protection  of  the  gods  or  Pu-sahs  ^  pj$?  Such  is  the  reason  which 
has  given  rise  to  this  curious  custom. 

To  the  same  superstition  may  be  attached  the  one  called  "the 
string  of  the  hundred  families",  Peh-hia-sien  "g"  ^  $|.  A  person 
goes  round  begging  a  bit  of  thread  from  door  to  door.  With  these 
various  coloured  threads,  a  kind  of  tassel  is  made,  and  hung  on  to 
the  dress  of  the  child.  The  purpose  is  the  same  as  in  the  preced- 
ing case. 


—  22  — 

VIII.     Shao-p'o-hai  'Js|  $£  3§j.  Burning  old  shoes. 

Kwa   yu-vjang   ^[.    ^    $£).  Suspending    the   fishing-net. 

It  is  nowadays  admitted  among  the  common  people,  that  evil 
spirits,  generally  known  as  "T'eu-sheng-hwei"  fj|j  ^  j^f,  spirits 
that  ravish  children),  endeavour  during  the  first  hundred  days  alter 
the  birth  of  a  child,  to  spirit  away  its  soul.  These  "T'eu-sheng- 
ftwei"  YfftT  ^  Mi  are  none  other  than  the  souls  of  young  girls  who 
have  died  unmarried. 

They  are  not  considered  as  really  belonging  to  the  human  race, 
and  cannot  be  reborn  as  men,  in  the  world  beyond  the  grave.  It  is 
for  this  reason  that  they  wander  here  below,  in  quest  of  the  soul  of 
a  male  child,  which  they  would  lain  ravish,  in  order  that  through 
this  means  they  may  be  reborn  as  men   in   the  womb  of  a  mother. 

When  the  hundred  days  are  elapsed,  they  have  no  further 
power  over  the  life  of  a  child.  Should  a  child  die  before  the  hund- 
red days  are  over,  a  person  ascends  to  the  house-top,  and  there 
curses  the  "ravishers  of  children",  and  orders  them  to  restore  the 
soul  they  have  spirited  away.  To  obviate  any  possible  attack  on 
their  part,  the  following  devices  are  resorted  to  : 

1°.  All  old  shoes  available  are  gathered,  and  every  day  during 
one  hundred  days,  a  bit  of  one  of  these  shoes  is  burnt  beside  the 
cradle  of  the  child,  in  order  that  the  offensive  smell,  which  fills  the 
room,  may  put  to  flight  the  ravishers. 

2°.  A  large  fishing-net,  Wang  |pf,  is  taken  and  disposed  in  the 
form  of  bed-curtains,  around  the  cot  of  the  child.  These  fishing- 
nets,  as  everybody  knows,  are  smeared  with  hog's  blood,  to  give 
them  more  resistance  and  make  them  last  longer.  It  is  thus 
imagined,  that  the  spirits  who  ravish  children,  T'eu-sheng-kKPi  f|f 
#  ^,  seeing  traces  of  blood  or  the  net,  will  be  frightened  and 
take  to  flight,  without  venturing  to  injure  the  child.  Moreover, 
each  of  the  meshes  of  the  net  gives  the  illusion  of  an  eye,  and 
seeing  so  many  eyes  riveted  on  them,  the  spirits  take  to   flight. 


-£= 

• 

cj 

0) 

C 

J3 

50 

o 

'<l» 

Oh 

C 

CD 

n 

£ 

3 

o 

T3 

S-* 

-*-» 

Oi 

0 

s 

(T, 

*f*J 

+J 

2 

l_ 

CO 

o 

CO 

in 

■~ 

»<D 

3> 

4-" 

•<- 

•  p«a 

> 

» 

*OI 

<u 

hC 

O; 

C 

s 

c 

O 

'     ' 

M 

(T. 

s-» 

CD 

o 

T3 

"■Q 

3 

o 

Q       ~o 


—  23  — 

3°.  A  sieve,  Shai-tze  f$j  -Tf*-,  is  likewise  employed  for  the  same 
purpose,  as  each  of  the  holes  seems  to  be  an  eye. 

IX.      Chi  siao-hai-ping-chi  fu  j-fe  /]^  &  fft  3l  ^F- 

Amulets  to  Kurd  off  diseases  from  children. 

.Numerous  are  the  superstitious  practices  imagined  to  cure  sick 
children.  Taoist  and  Buddhist  monks  find  here  an  inexhaustible 
source  of  profit,  and  consequently  have  invented  all  kinds  of  health- 
giving  devices,  through  invoking  a  particular  divinity,  eluding  every 
unlucky  star,  and  practising  such  and  such  a  ceremony  (See  in  the 
Vth  and  XVIth  volumes  of  superstitions  practised  in  China,  various 
prayer-formulae,  several  lucky  and  unlucky  stars,  and  numerous 
paper-charms  composed  for  this  purpose).   (1). 

X.      l|£  $$,  Han-Lsin.     Dry  (nominal)  adoption. 

When  fear  is  entertained  that  a  child  may  die,  he  is  adopted 
into  another  family,  and  takes  its  name.  Such  adoption  is  purely 
nominal.  It  is  not  guaranteed  by  a  contract  and  gives  no  right  to 
an  inheritance.  The  custom  is  based  on  the  superstitious  notion, 
that  an  unlucky  lot  has  befallen  the  family,  and  that  the  only  means 
of  preserving  a  child,  is  to  pass  him  over  fictitiously  to  a  more 
fortunate  household. 

On  the  day  that  the  dry  adoption  is  concluded,  the  natural 
father,  in  order  to  wish  long  life  to  his  child,  offers  to  the  adopting 
father  a  hundred  small  bread-loaves  (provision  for  a  hundred  years), 
the  latter  making  a  present  to  the  child  of  a  basket  to  hold  the  loaves. 
The  child'.s  milk-name  is  also  changed.  A  blue  string  is  then  placed 
round  his  neck,  appended  to  which  is  a  number  of  cash  (copper 
coins)  equal  to  the  years  he  has  lived,  care  being  taken  to  add  a 
fresh  coin  every  year,  till  he  attains  the  age  of  fifteen,  when  it  is 
deemed  that  he  has  passed  the  thirty  dangerous  barriers,  which 
beset  the  path  of  all  youngsters. 

(1)    See  Zikawei  fe  gtfll  albums  V,  VII. 


—  24  — 

XL.      Pien-tze-shtmg  kwa  hung-pu  g$  =f-  _t  #|<  #Hfj . 

Piece  of  red  cloth  hung  on  to  the  extremity  of  the  queue. 

When  a  child  has  had  once  the  small-pox,   a  piece  of   red    cloth 
is  attached  to  the  extremity  of  the   queue.      This    is    somewhat    of   a 
sign    to    remind    Sien-ku  lao-t'ai  f[lj  jfc  ~j£  ~fc    the  old  fairy  goddess 
not  to  send  him  again  the  same  disease. 

XII.      Tao-huh-so  ^  ^  |ij|\  Thr  peach^stone  padlock. 

A  kind  of  padlock  is  made  by  cutting  the  kernels  of  the  flat- 
peach  P'an-lao  ijlff  f)[.  The  mother  fixes  one  of  these  padlocks  on 
each  of  the  child's  feet,  and  employs  for  tying  them  on,  the  string 
that  binds  the  queue.  The  peach,  as  is  well  known,  is  the  fruit 
that  confers  immortality  (1),  being  served  up  to  the  gods  at  the 
Hat-peach  festival,  P'an-tao  hwei  $§  $fc  ||\  in  the  palace  of  the 
goddess  Wang-mu  Niang-niang  3E  "^  M  M  (-)•  The  common 
people  believe  that  peach-stone  padlocks  confer  longevity,  bind 
children  to  life,  and  have  also  a  mysterious  power  for  warding  off 
evil  influences. 


(1)  See  Mayers  Chinese  Reader's  Manual  "Tao"  $fc  (the  peach)  p.  "213. 

(2)  Sec  Mayers,  ibid.  "Si  Wang-mu"  @f  Zt  #  itiie  Western  Royal  Mother)  p.  178. 


Fig.  19 


Porte-bonheur.  Puissiez-vous  avoir  cinq  garcons  vigoureux,. 

riches,  montant  de  dignites  en  dignitds  ! 

Lucky  charm.     May  you  have  five  male  children,   healthy. 

rich  and  attaining  to  the  highest  honours! 


Fig.  19 


bii 


Allusion  aux  cents  enfants  de  Wen-wang.  Ayez  cent  cnfants,  et 

que  Tun  d'eux  soit  regu  premier  acad^micien ! 

Allusion  to  the  numerous  children  of  Wen  Wang.     J\Iay  you  have  many 

children  and  may  one  of  them  be  a  first  tripos! 


—  25  — 

XIII.      Chw'ang  j^.  The  child's  cut. 

The  child's  cot,  if  made  of  special  wood,  may  also  contribute 
to  the  future  happiness  of  the  babe  that  will  be  laid  therein.  The 
wood  most  sought  after,  is  that  of  the  peach-tree,  'T'ao-s/iu"  \j[ 
$$,  which  confers  longevity;  also  that  of  the  jujube-tree  "T.sao-.s/iu" 
Ht  Wfi  as  the  word  "Tsao"  Jf|  (jujube)  is  similar  in  sound  to 
"T.sao"  Jp.,  which  means  early.  This  is  a  presage  that  the  child 
will  early  attain  to  official  dignity.  A  third  kind  of  wood  employed 
for  children's  cots  is  that  of  the  pine,  Sung-sltu  ^  j$j$,  as  this  tree 
is  ever  green,  and  it  is  customary  to  sketch  the  God  of  Longevity 
beside  a  pine-tree,  hence  it  is  a  pledge  of  long  life.  A  cot,  made 
of  the  wood  of  any  of  the  above  trees,  combines  every  chance  of  a 
glorious  future. 


rm  ~  f 


—  26  — 

ARTICLE    IV. 
CROSSING  THE  BARRIERS. 

M.  IS  Kwo-kwan. 

Every  child  is  destined  to  pass,  in  the  early  stages  of  its 
existence,  through  a  series  of  barriers,  which  occur  either  monthly 
or  annually  along  the  path  of  life.  It  is  only  when  the  last  one 
has  been  passed,  at  the  age  of  sixteen,  that  all  danger  is  over. 

We  have  already  seen  (p.  19),  how  the  crown  of  hair,  fashioned 
on  the  head  of  children,  is  a  passport  or  permit,  thanks  to  which  a 
child  succeeds  in  escaping  every  annoyance  on  the  part  of  barrier- 
spirits,  who  molest  youthful  wayfarers  on  the  road  of  life. 

We  append  herewith  the  names  of  the  thirty  barriers  to  be 
passed,  without  entering  into  details  as  to  the  precautions  which 
are  to  be  taken,  on  such  or  such  a  day,  month  or  year,  when  one 
may  have  to  cross  each  of  those  difficult  passages. 

Should  any  desire  to  get  more  ample  information  on  the  matter, 
they  can  consult  the  work  entitled  "Wan-pao-ls'ilen-shu  "||J  j|f  ^ 
i§-  '.  Herein  are  found  the  whole  collection  of  pictures  illustrating 
the  thirty  barriers,  and  indicating  the  means,  all  fancifully  invented. 
for  passing  through  them  free  of  toll. 

—  Barrier  of  the  four  seasons,  guarded  by  a  maleficent 
demon. 

—  Barrier  of  the  four  pillars. 

—  Barrier   of  the   demon    Niu-wang    ^    3l    (the   Cow- 
king). 

4th        ,,         —  Barrier  styled  the  devil's   gate,    guarded    by    a    mal- 
eficent demon. 
5th        ,,         —  The  Barrier  where  life  is  exposed. 
6th        ,,         —  Barrier  of  insurmountable  difficulty. 

,,  -  Barrier  of  the  golden  hen  falling  into  a  well. 

8th        ,,         —  Barrier  of  the  private  parts. 


|st 

Barr 

ier 

2nd 

5  7 

3rd 

i  * 

—  27 


9th  Barrier 

1 0th 
\  \  th 

1  9;h 

1  —  > ) 

13th       ,, 

1  /.th 

15th        ,, 
16"*        ,, 

1 7 tb 

IN1' 
]  qth 

20th 

9  1  St 

opnd 

23«*         ,, 

24th 
05th 

26th 
27th 

28th       ,, 
29th 
30*h        ,, 

i  all 
2  m  fen 

3   ^11 


5 
6 


#^ 


Barrier  of  the  hundred  days  (1). 

Barrier  of  the  broken  bridge. 

Barrier  of  the  nimble  foot  (kicks  being  here  admin- 
istered, one  must  be  licet  of  foot  so   as   to   escape 

Barrier  of  the  five  genii.  ^them). 

Barrier  of  the  golden  padlock. 

Barrier  of  the  iron  snake. 

Barrier  of  the  bathing  tub. 

Barrier  of  the  white  tiger. 

Barrier  of  the   Buddhist  monks 

Barrier  of  the  heavenly  dog. 

Barrier  exciting  heaven's  pity. 

Barrier  of  the  luck  and  key  (here  the  dcor  must  be 
unlocked). 

Barrier  where  the  bowels  are  sundered. 

Barrier  where  the  head  is  broken. 

Barrier  of  the  thousand  days. 

Barrier  of  nocturnal  weeping. 

Barrier  of  the  burning  broth. 

Barrier  where  children  are  buried. 

Barrier  where  life  is  shortened. 

Barrier  of  the  general's -dagger. 

Barrier  of  deep-running  waters. 

Barrier  of  fire  and  water. 

17    fa    ft    H 

is  *  %  m 

19  n  ^  w 

20  mmmm 

21 


7  &  ii  $  # 
s  t  iff  m 


to  mmm 
ii  in 
12  3l  j&  m 

13  &&  ffl 

15   j£&gg 

16  e  ^  m 


n 


22  fl"   Ji 

23  =f    B 

24  ^   Pf 


25  #   *    II 

26  a  ^  n 

28  jft!g£l]|lg 

29  ^    7K    Ii 

30  7k  'X  m 


(1)  The  demon  that  ravishes  children  "T'eu-sheng-kwei"  (m  ^  J&,  has  no  further 
power  over  a  child  after  he  has  passed  this  barrier;  his  power  expires  when  the  hundred 
days  are  over. 

See  above  "Superstitions  concerning  children"  §  VIII  p.  '22. 


—  28 


-z^^ 


CHAPTER      II. 

BETROTHAL  AND  MARRIAGE. 


tr 


Hiiiiii'     Shi 


ARTICLE    I. 
BETROTHAL  (1). 

In  all  marriages  of  Chinese,  match-makers  or  Mei-jen  ^  A. 
plav  a  prominent  part.  When  they  have  toured  from  the  family  of 
the  bridegroom's  father  to  that  of  the  bride,  and  enjoyed  many  a 
heartv  meal,  meanwhile  making  overtures  about  the  future  marriage, 
and  when  both  sides  have  agreed  on  the  amount  of  purchase-money, 
which  the  bridegroom  will  pay  to  secure  the  bride,  then  talking 
ends  and   a  step  is  made  to  sign  the  written  contract. 


(1)  The  few  superstitions  customs  on  betrothal  and  marriage  which  we  describe  in 
this  chapter,  have  several  points  in  common  with  those  mentioned  by  D1  Weiger  in  his 
work  entitled  "Rudiments".  We  have  added  thereto  the  local  observances  of  Nganhwei 
and  Kiangsu,  omitting  those  which  have  not  gained  currency  in  these  two  provinces. 


—  30  — 

1°.  First  document.  Ts'ao-pali-tze  j|l  A  ^p  (rough  draft  of 
the  eight  characters),  elsewhere  styled  Hoh-s\$a.n-t'ieh  fe  Jf!  i^f, 
(card  making  the  proposal),  or  also  Sheng-heng  £  J|f  (comparing 
horoscopes).  The  bridegroom  writes  on  this  card  the  two  cyclic 
characters,  indicating  the  year  of  his  birth,  the  two  indicating  the 
month,  the  two  indicating  the  day,  and  the  two  marking  the  hour, 
making  thus  a  total  of  eight  characters  : 

2  +  2  +  2  +  2  =  8. 
Hence  comes  the  name  "draft  of  the  eight  characters".  Upon  receipt 
of  this  card,  the  bridegroom's  family  reciprocates  a  similar  one  on 
the  age  of  the  young  lady.  This  card  is  exchanged,  in  order  to  enable 
the  fortune-tellers,  to  ascertain  whether  the  destiny  of  the  bridegroom 
corresponds  with  that  of  the  bride.  These  professional  jugglers 
compare  the  characters  with  the  five  elements:  metal,  wood,  water, 
fire  and  earth.  They  also  compare  the  two  cyclic  animals,  that  have 
presided  over  the  birth  of  the  youthful  couple,  in  order  to  ascertain 
whether  they  will  abide  together  in  harmony.  According  to  the 
set  rules  of  the  art,  they  will  draw  therefrom  happy  or  unhappy 
omens  of  the  intended  marriage.  These  rules  are  based  on  the 
liking  or  disliking  of  the  cyclic  animals  for  each  other:  thus  the 
tiger  is  the  sworn  enemy  of  the  serpent ;  also  on  the  juxtaposition 
to  or  incompatibility  of  such  an  element  with  another,  as  for  in- 
stance fire  and  water.  When  this  operation  is  over,  the  choice  of  a 
lucky  day  is  fixed  upon,  help  being  here  afforded  by  the  Imperial 
calendar,  commonly  called  "Hwang-lih-t'eu"  Jl  jg  Jjjf,  which 
marks  carefully  the  black  (unlucky)  and  yellow  (lucky)  days.  As 
may  be  understood,  this  first  exchange  of  documents  on  age,  is  a 
test  to  ascertain  whether  the  intended  marriage  may  be  brought  to 
a  happy  issue,  or  whether  on  the  other  hand  there  are  fundamental 
obstacles  based  on  the  superstitious  rules  of  fortune-telling.  In  case 
the  marriage  is  deemed  possible,  another  document  is  exchanged. 

2°.      Second    document.     Ting-ts'in-t'ieh    %  H  [j]^    (card  fixing 
the  marriage  day). 

This  piece  fixes  the  day  on  which  the  marriage  will   take  place  ; 
it  is  sent  by  the  bridegroom  to  the  family  of  the   bride.      It   informs 


—  31  — 

them  that  he  has  had  the  matter  seriously  examined  bv  those  skilled 
in  the  art,  and  that  according  to  the  cyclic  characters  on  the  age  of 
the  respective  parties,  nothing  has  been  found  which  would  seem 
opposed  to  the  conclusion  of  the  engagement.  Moreover,  those 
consulted,  have  fixed  the  exchange  of  the  contract  to  take  place  on 
such  a  day  of  the  month.      This  is  what  I  beg  to  announce  to  you. 

3°.  Third  document.  Chw'an-heng-t'ieh  fiji  J^  tyfo  (exchanging 
horoscopes). 

This  is  the  real  contract,  attesting  that  an  engagement  has 
taken  place.  It  is  also  called  "Hsia-shu"  HF  ^jf"  (counterpart  of  the 
contract),  and  the  transaction  is  commonly  rendered  by  the  expres- 
sion "Kwo-li"  ^  jjj§}  (sending  of  presents).  This  contract  is  drawn 
up  in  double.  It  is  the  bridegroom,  who  sends  first  his  contract  to 
the  bride,  or  rather  to  her  parents.  An  earnest,  fixed  by  the 
match-makers,  accompanies  it.  This  consists  in  a  certain  sum  of 
money,  handed  over  to  the  family  of  the  bride,  also  in  a  parapher- 
nalia of  hair-pins,  ear-rings,  rings,  bracelets,  and  jewels  according  to 
the  standing  of  the  parties.  The  bride's  family,  on  its  side, 
prepares  a  betrothal  contract,  drawn  up  almost  on  the  same  terms 
as  that  of  the  bridegroom,  and  forwards  it  to  his  family,  in  reply  to 
the  one  received  from  them.  The  betrothal  is  thus  legally  conclud- 
ed, and  terminates  under  the  most  favourable  auspices.  On  the 
occasion  of  the  presents  sent,  there  are  often  some  customs  which 
are  tainted  more  or  less  with  superstition. 


—  32 


Hi  Ki 

The 

cock.  The  ma 

%  T'v- 

The 

hare.             ,, 

titnu 

The 

tiger.             ,, 

If  Chu 

The 

hog.               >) 

||  Lung 

The 

dragon.         ,, 

41  Niu 

The 

ox. 

M  s/ik 

The 

rat.                ,, 

jfH  //eu 

The 

monkey. 

ifefe  S/ie/i 

The 

serpent.        ,, 

^    K'iXen 

The 

dog.                ,, 

^   F;n/;/ 

The 

sheep.           ,, 

Jl  Ma 

The 

horse.            ,, 

ARTICLE    II. 
Till.     MARRIAGE. 

Fixing  its  date. 

It  is  generally  the  girl's  family  that  fixes  the  month  in  which 
the  marriage  is  to  take  place,  while  that  of  the  bridegroom  decides 
as  to  the  day.      Hence  the  two  following  pieces  are  exchanged  : 

A).  Piece  fixing  the  month  for  the  marriage. — The  choice  of 
the  month  depends  on  the  cyclic  animal  that  has  presided  over  the 
birth  of  the  girl.      The  following  are  the  rules  laid  down. 

Should  the  damsel  be  born  in  the  year  of 

the   seventh   month. 

[place  in       idem. 

the  second 
the  third 
the  fourth 
the  fifth 
the  sixth 
the  eighth 
the  ninth 
the  tenth 
the  eleventh 
the  twelfth 

B).  Piece  fixing  the  day  of  tlie  month.  — The  girl  having  fixed 
the  month,  the  bridegroom  now  resumes  his  rights,  and  fixes  the 
precise  day,  in  which  the  marriage  will  take  place.  This  piece  is 
called  •'Kia-ts'il-t'ieh"  $|  5g>  tyfo,  or  commonly  "Hsia-ts'iX-t'ieh"  ~F 
51  tyfa,  the  marriage  contract,  or  the  marriage  card. 

Some  time  after  having  forwarded  this  missive,  the  bridegroom 
sends  his  presents,  to  urge  the  giving  away  of  the  bride.  These 
presents  are  enclosed  in  a  red  box,  as  a  warning  to  be  ready,  and 
prepare  all  things  for  the  day  fixed  by  the  fortune-tellers. 

The  bride's  family  sends  the  marriage  outfit  of  their  daughter: 
household  furniture  and  utensils,  garments  and  auspicious  presents, 


—  33  — 

varying-  according  to  the  place.  These  comprise  leaves  of  immortals, 
Wan-nien-ts'ing  H  £f  ^f,  for  wishing  long  life;  sprigs  of  fragrant 
artemisia,  to  expel  all  evil  influences;  peony  flowers  Meu-tan-hwa  !\'j: 
j^  ;f£,  portending  riches;  pomegranates  Shih-liu  ^  $fi,  auguring 
numerous  progeny.  These  fruits  contain  a  large  number  of  kernels 
or  stones,  called  "7';e"  -^  in  Chinese;  now,  this  character  Tze  ^f- 
(kernel),  is  identical  in  sound  with  ize  ^ ,  meaning  children.  Jujubes 
are  also  offered,  Tsau-tze  Jj|  ^f-  (jujube)  being  pronounced  in  the 
same  manner  as  Tsao  Ize  JfL  ^ ,  have)  children  quickly!  Chestnuts, 
Lih-tze  |pi  J-,  form  another  word  similar  in  sound  with  the  two 
characters  Lih  tze  jfc  ^ ,  meaning  to  beget  children  ;  bran,  Fu-t:e 
|r£  ^f,  is  a  term   which  has  as  homonym  Fu  Ize   g*   ^  ,  a  rich  son. 

A  present  always  received  with  pleasure  on  this  occasion  is 
that  of  the  seven  kinds  of  grain   "Ts'ih-tze-li"  -£   -^  |^. 

The  zest  of  these  expressions  results  from  the  pun  on  the 
words.  The  character  Tze  -^ ,  kernel,  grain,  being  identical  in 
sound  with  the  character  Tze  -^,  which  means  offspring. 

The  following  are  some  of  the  fruits  which  enter  into  the 
make-up  of  these  presents. 

The  water-lily,  the  sun-flower,  the  seeds  of  the  pumpkin,  the 
gourd  and  the  water-melon,  the  pomegranate,  the  chestnut,  the 
pear  and  the  peach. 

The  first  contain  a  large  amount  of  seeds,  and  this  augurs  a 
numerous  progeny. 

The  chestnut  and  the  pear,  Lih-tze  ^  ^f-  and  Li-tze  ^  ^ , 
closely  resemble  Lih-tze  jyf  ^ ,  to  beget  children. 

The  peach  is  the  fruit  that  confers  immortality.  All  these 
terms  are  as  many  portents  of  future  happiness. 


—  34  — 

ARTICLE    III. 
DEPARTURE  OF  THE  BRIDE. 

Before  entering  his  sedan-chair  to  meet  the  bride,  the  young 
man  makes  his  obeisance  before  the  tablets  of  Heaven  and  Earth, 
and  those  of  his  ancestors  ;  he  afterwards  performs  a  similar  series 
of  bowing  before  his  parents,  and  all  the  neighbouring  families. 
Care  has  been  taken  to  place  a  child  in  his  sedan,  thereby  wishing 
him  to  have  one  soon  himself. 

The  customary  ceremonies  on  the  arrival  of  the  bridegroom  in 
the  family  of  his  father-in-law  being  over,  and  dinner  taken,  a  pair 
of  chopsticks  is  tendered  to  him,  and  also  two  wine-cups,  wrapped 
up  in  red  paper.  He  is  thus  deemed  to  bear  away  the  happiness 
and  abundance  of  the  family.  Care  has  been  taken  to  turn  the 
front  of  the  sedan-chairs,  which  bear  the  bride  and  bridegroom,  in 
the  direction  wherein  is  found  the  God  of  Joy  that  day.  The  Imper- 
ial calendar  and  other  superstitions  guide-books  indicate  this 
direction. 

Sometimes,  the  bride  is  packed  up  like  a  bundle,  in  a  large 
wooden  chest,  and  her  feet  are  padlocked.  Porters  bear  this  box  to 
the  sedan-chair,  on  the  top  of  which  is  represented  a  unicorn, 
holding  a  male  child. 

At  the  reai"  of  the  bride's  sedan,  are  suspended  a  sieve,  Stial- 
tze  |^j  ^f,  and  a  metallic  mirror,  King  ^,  to  render  favourable 
every  evil  influence. 

Behind  the  sedan,  an  Imperial  almanac,  / .ili-l'eu  |§|  |[jf,  is  also 
placed,  as  a  portent  of  good  ;  lastly,  the  bride  herself  carries  a 
small  mirror  attached  to  her  button-hole,  and  does  not  part  with  it 
till  she  is  seated  on  the  nuptial  bed.  The  reader  can  see,  on  the 
adjoining  page,  a  photo- engraving  representing  one  of  these  mirrors. 
It  was  purchased  at  Hai  Chow  $$  Jfl,  North  Kiangsu  ?X  |£, 
and  is  about  eight  inches  in  diameter.  The  front  side  is  polished 
and  shining,  like  an  ordinary  looking-glass;  on  the  back,  are  two 
embossed  circles  and  four  characters,   Wu-tze  teng  h'o  3L  i^  ^  #, 


Fig.     20 


Miroir  en  cuivre. 

Brass  miror. 


—  35  — 

Which    mean,    may    your    five    children    attain    the    highest    literary 
degrees ! 

In  the  middle,  is  a  ring,  soldered  on  to  the  metal  plate,  and  bv 
means  of  which  it  may  be  attached  with  a  cord  or  a  ribbon.  Young 
brides,  in  North  Kiangsu  yX  jjjfc  fix  it  on  the  abdomen,  the  day  when 
they  proceed  in  a  sedan-chair  to  the  house  of  the  bridegroom,  and 
likewise,  when  they  return  in  a  sedan  to  the  family  of  their  parents, 
a  short  time  after  the  marriage  ceremony. 

The  female  attendants,  selected  to  form  an  escort  of  honour  to 
the  bride,  on  the  way  from  her  paternal  home  to  that  of  the  bride- 
groom, must  be  born  under  the  auspices  of  a  cyclic  animal,  living 
in  peace  with  the  animal  that  presided  over  the  birthday  of  the 
bridegroom.  Were  these  animals  at  enmity  with  each  other,  the 
peace  and  prosperity  of  the  future  household  would  be  endangered. 

The  following  table  exhibits  the  cyclic  animals,  which  are 
mutually  at  variance  with  each  other. 

The  horse  is  the  enemy  of  the  ox, 
The  sheep  ,,  ,,  rat, 


The  cock  ,,  ,,  do 


& ' 


The  tiger  ,,  ,,  serpent. 

The  hare  ,,  ,,  dragon, 

The  hog  ,,  ,,  monkey. 

According  to  the  above  rules,  the   companions    of  the    bride    are 
chosen. 


—  36  — 

ARTICLE    IV. 

THE    BRIDE    ENTERS    THE    HOUSE 

01     THE    BRIDEGROOM. 

When  the  marriage  procession  reaches  the  bridegroom's  house, 
the  encaged  bride  is  taken  out  from  the  red  sedan,  and  conducted  to 
the  large  reception-hall.  (It  happens  more  frequently  that  the  bride 
sits  simply  in  the  sedan).  While  this  operation  is  being  performed, 
a  man  whose  cyclic  animal  of  birth  can  live  in  peace  with  those  of 
the  new  couple,  tires  off  a  string  of  crackers  before  the  doorway. 

When  the  bride  leaves  her  cage,  she  is  protected  by  means  of  a 
sieve,  which  shields  her,  it  is  thought,  from  evil  spirits  (I).  Some 
pretend  that  only  good  influences  penetrate  through  the  holes  of  the 
sieve;  others  explain  the  matter  differently.  The  numerous  holes  of 
the  sieve,  according  to  them,  resemble  so  many  eyes  gazing  stead- 
fastlv  on  the  evil  spirits,  that  should  they  wish  to  injure  the 
youthful  spouse,  they  are  struck  with  terror  at  this  sight,  and 
take  to  flight.  Frequently,  lucky  influences  are  flashed  on  the 
young  lady,  by  employing  a  mirror,  which  throws  rays  of  light  on 
to  her  person.  Elsewhere,  she  carries  simply  on  her  person  a  brass 
mirror,  designed  to  ward  off  every  evil  influence,  as  has  been  stated 
previously  (p.  34).  In  some  places,  as  at  II  wo  Chow  ^p  j>\],  and 
Ha.n-sha.ri  listen  ^  [Jj  JH  (in  the  province  of  Nganhwei  $£  Jjjjfc),  on 
the  arrival  of  the  bride,  the  ceremony  of  evaporating  vinegar, 
"Hsiang-t'an"  ^ff  ^,  is  practised.  The  vinegar,  being  brought 
into  contact  with  red-hot  iron,  rushes  up  in  a  column  from  the 
vase,  and  this  indicates  the  rapid  increase  of  fortune  which  awaits 
the  new  couple. 

The  bride,  on  coming  out  from  the  sedan,  must  lay  her  foot  on 
a  saddle.  Saddle,  in  Chinese,  is  expressed  by  the  character  Ngan 
]$£,  which  is  pronounced  Ngan  j|£,  exactly  similar  in  sound  to  Ngan 
-^,  meaning  peace  or  tranquillity. 

For  the  above  operation,  the  bride  has  sometimes  to  borrow  one 
of  the  shoes  of  the  bridegroom. 


(1)     Doolittle,  Social  Life  of  the  Chinese,  Vol.  I.  p.  83,  finds  this  custom  also  existing 
in  Southern  China.     Here,  the  sieve  "is  put  on  the  top  of  the  sedan,  over  its  door". 


Fig.  21 


Introduction  de  la  fiancee  dans  la  maison  du  mari.  Le  Soulier  et  la  selle. 
Conducting  the  bride  to  the  bridegroom's  house.    The  slipper  and  the  saddle. 


—  37  — 


Frequently  also,  beneath  the  saddle,  is  placed  the  pack-saddle  ol 
a  beast  of  burden,  called  in  Chinese  Shao-tai  Jffi  ^,  a  kind  of  wallet, 
this  expression  corresponding  in  sound  with  another  Shao-lai  }f|"  fP\ 
meaning  to  be  blessed  with  offspring  and  have  plenty  children. 

Previous  to  the  arrival  of  the  new  couple  for  the  celebration  of 
the  marriage  ceremony,  it  is  customary  in  places  of  North  Kiang-su 
tt  j$ti  to  prepare  a  bushel  (peck),  upon  which  are  laid  a  balance 
and  a  string  of  small  copper  coins  (cash).  The  bushel  or  peck, 
which  is  employed  in  measuring 
grain,  is  the  symbol  of  abundance; 
the  balance,  employed  in  commer- 
cial transactions,  is  a  pledge  of 
success  in  business;  finally,  the 
copper  cash,  which  constitute  the 
monetary  basis  of  China,  vividly 
represent  fortune,  so  eagerly  sought 
after  by  all.  This  custom  implies 
both  a  wish  of  happiness  and 
riches  for  the  newly  married  pair, 
and  is  also  a  kind  of  talisman 
tending  to  produce  the  desired  good 
effects.  To  neglect  it  in  the  cere- 
mony, would,  doubtless,  injure  the 
future  of  the  young  couple. 

The  bride  is  conducted  to  the 
table  or  altar,  upon  which  stands 
the  tablet  of  Heaven  and  Earth  (1); 
candles  burn  and  incense  is  lighted 
in  the  censer. 

Tablet  of  Heaven  and  Earth. 


JflS^r 


(1)  The  inscription  on  this  tablet  reads  as  follows:  Spiritual  seat  of  the  true  Lord 
of  Heaven  and  Earth,  (ruling  over)  the  three  regions,  the  ten  points  of  direction,  and 
all  living  creatures  (souls). 

The  three  regions  of  existence  are,  according  to  the  Taoists,  heaven,  earth,  and  the 
waters;  according  to  the  Buddhists,  the  regions  of  earthly  longings,  of  form  and  formless- 
ness (this  latter  place  is  the  ante  chamber  to  Nirvana). 

The  ten  directions  are  the  four  cardinal  points,  together  with  the  four  intermediate 
ones,  to  which  are  added  ''above  and  below"  (Note  of  English  translator), 


—  38  — 

The  bridegroom  takes  his  place  beside  the  bride,  then  both 
bow  profoundly  kneel)  before  the  tablet;  the  same  ceremony  is 
repeated  before  the  ancestral  tablet,  and  also  before  the  God  of  the 
kitchen.  Tsao-kun  jj|  Jj.  after  which  they  mutually  salute  each  other, 
and  the  marriage  ceremony  is  accomplished     1   . 

The  new  couple  are  next  conducted  to  the  nuptial  chamber, 
where  both  sit  on  the  bed.  the  bride  meanwhile  holding;  her  eyes 
downcast. 

Now  commences  an  abominable  ceremony  known  by  the  name 
of  Nao-sin-fariQ  pffj]  0f  Jf ,  that  is  to  say  ribaldry,  in  all  the  coarse- 
ness conveyed  by  this  word.  During  three  days  and  nights,  all 
may  come  in  to  see  the  bride,  and  pour  out  in  her  presence  the 
most  impertinent  remarks  2  .  It  is  admitted  that  a  grey-headed 
old  man  may  use  on  this  occasion  the  language  of  the  most  dissolute 
youth.  Such  are  the  horrors  of  pagranism.  from  which  it  would 
seem  that  even  the  very  notion  of  modesty  has  been  banished. 

(1)  See  Doolittle.  Social  Life  of  the  Chinese,  Vol  I.  p.  85,  the  same  ceremony  as 
practised  in  South  China.  Here  both  drink  some  wine  from  the  same  goblet,  a  cock 
made  of  sugar  is  eaten,  and  the  wedding  dinner  is  partaken  of. 

Doolittle  remarks  that  this  is  a  very  tryi    s       deal  for  the  bride,   as   she  may  not 

-•■  to  be  seen,  nor  absent  herself  from  tl      _  f  the  public.     Ibid.  p.  90. 


CO 

CO 


—  39  — 

In  several  places,  it  is  customary  for  the  newly  married  couple, 
to  visit  the  ancestral  hall  or  Tz'e-t'ang  fU  j£  of  the  family,  and 
there  worship  before  the  tablets  of  the  ancestors.  I  have  seen  this 
ceremony  performed  at  T'ai-p'in,  fa  -fa  ^  j£f,  in  Nganhwei  ^  M 
province.  In  all  cases,  the  bride  must  offer  meats  before  the  tablet 
of  her  father-in-law  and  mother-in-law,  if  they  happen  to  be 
deceased.      This  is  a  strict  duty  for  a  married  woman.   (1). 

Should  the  bride  die  before  accomplishing  this  ceremony,  Con- 
fucius lays  down  the  principle  that  the  coffin  should  not  be  taken  to 
the  hall  of  the  eldest  ancestor,  nor  the  tablet  placed  beside  that  of 
her  venerable  mother-in-law.  Her  husband  must  not  walk  in  the 
funeral  procession)  leaning  on  a  stick,  nor  wear  straw-sandals,  nor 
weep  for  her  in  a  secluded  chamber. 

The  corpse  of  the  deceased  must  be  taken  back  to  her  family, 
and  interred  amidst  its  members,  as  she  has  not  fulfilled  her  duties 
of  a  daughter-in-law  ,2). 


C  I     Li-ki  H  |E  or  Look  of  Rites,  Cb.    V.   Tseng  tze-wen  H"  =f-  $\      -  )]  |ffj  (ft)  J£  ffi] 

*  m  m  m  b  bb  ^  Vi  m  mmt.m  m. 

r2i     See  Li-ki  jj§  |E  or  JJook  of  ltites,  Ch.  V.  Tseng-tze-weii  "f^  -jr  f^i  wherein  are  rec- 
orded the  proper  words  of  Confucius  <  stablishing  these  obs<  rvances. 


—  40 


CHAPTER      III. 

DEATH   AND   BURIAL, 


0 


Peh     Shi 

ARTICLE    I. 
BEFORE     DEATH. 

As  soon  as  the  first  symptoms  of  approaching  death  become 
apparent,  should  the  dying  person  be  a  child,  the  ceremony  of 
"summoning  back  the  soul"  (See  chapter  on  this  subject)  is  always 
practised.  Frequently  also  the  soul  of  persons  of  more  advanced  years 
is  called  back.  I  have  seen  it  practised  in  regard  to  a  young  married 
man,  aged  twenty-four  years,  and  already  the  head  of  a  family. 

When  the  above  rite  has  been  unsuccessfully  accomplished, 
many  have  recourse  to  a  supreme  and  last  device,  namely  to  bring 
the  temple-god  or  Pu-sah  3£  m,  into  the  abode  of  the  dying 
person.  This  ceremony  is  called  T'ai  Pu-sah  ffi  5£  ^j|.  fetching 
the  Pu-sah  |£  ^  or  god. 


—  42  — 

People  proceed  to  one  of  the  local  temples,  and  there  look  for 
the  statue  of  some  famous  Cf  Pu-sah"  ^£  ||?.  It  is  placed  on  a  kind 
of  portable  altar-chair  attached  to  two  poles  ;  four  men  bear  it  on 
their  shoulders,  while  two  others  precede,  beating  gongs  with  all 
their  might,  to  warn  that  the  god  is  passing  by  and  pay  him  due 
honour.  It  is  needless  to  say  that  fire-crackers  are  plentifully  sent 
off.  When  the  procession  reaches  the  door  of  the  dying  man's 
house,  the  god  is  received  with  full  honours,  and  begged  to  gracious- 
ly cure  the  sick  person,  or  at  least  to  indicate  an  efficacious 
remedy  in  the  case.  The  god  is  next  taken  to  an  apothecary's  shop, 
so  that  he  may  there  select  a  remedy  suited  to  the  requirements  of 
the  present  ailment.  One  or  two  Taoist  priests,  Tao-shi  jf|  J^, 
attend  on  each  side  of  the  Pu-sah  |£  $|?,  as  he  rests  on  the  shoulders 
of  the  bearers.  The  apothecary  turns  round,  and  points  out  with 
the  finger  one  of  the  drawers  containing  his  drugs.  Should  the  Pu- 
sah  ^  j||  remain  still,  it  is  a  sign  that  the  remedy  is  of  no  avail  ; 
should  he  advance  or  withdraw  a  little,  or  rather  if  his  bearers  help 
him  to  proceed  backwards  or  forwards,  precisely  at  the  moment  when 
the  apothecary  points  out  a  remedy,  this  is  the  good  one,  and  that 
which  must  be  obtained  at  any  cost.  Needless  to  add  that  the 
apothecary  speculates  much  on  popular  credulity  to  vend  at  a  high 
price  an  ordinary  remedy. 

The  outfit  of  the  dead. 

In  case  of  serious  illness,  and  when  the  last  moment  draws 
near,  the  outfit  for  the  dead  is  prepared  in  all  haste.  This  outfit 
comprises  the  following  articles  : 

A).  In  the  case  of  a  man  —  Boots  and  a  ceremonial  head-dress, 
minus  its  red  tassels  (these  two  articles  are  generally  made  of  paper); 
the  sole  of  the  boots  must  be  soft  and  flexible,  hard-soled  foot-wear 
being  unsuited  for  the  dead  ;  a  long  gown  and  an  overcoat  or  Wai- 
t'ao  ^  3|S.  These  latter  must  not  be  furnished  with  brass  buttons, 
as  they  would  be  over  weight}',  and  the  deceased  could  not  take 
them  over  to  the  nether  world.  Such  are  the  requirements  in  regard 
to  outer  garments. 


—  43  — 

The  under- wear,  trousers  and  waistcoat,  must  be  padded,  even 
in  the  summer  season. 

B).  In  the  case  of  a  woman.  —A  long  gown,  over-mantle  and 
veil,  together  with  the  under-wear  above  mentioned. 

All  these  garments  must  be  new  as  much  as  possible ;  they 
must  not  be  fur-lined  or  have  any  skins  of  animals,  and  consequently 
Qannel  clothes  must  be  likewise  strictly  discarded,  lest  the  deceased 
might  be  reborn  into  the  body  of  an  animal. 

Generally,  among  the  lower  class  of  people,  the  whole  under- 
wear is  made  of  white  cotton-cloth. 

The  other  garments  are  coloured,  according  to  the  taste  of  each 
one.  Red  and  yellow  are,  however,  two  colours  reserved  for  scholars 
and  officials.      Silk  and  satin  may  be  generally  used. 

The  two  fastenings,  called  Kioh-tai-lze  Jjjfl  ^  -=p,  which  bind 
the  lower  extremity  of  the  trousers  at  the  ankle,  and  the  girdle 
properly  speaking,  Tai-tze  ^  ^,  are  carefully  omitted,  a  simple 
string  being  used  instead  to  bind  the  waist. 

The  reason  of  this  is  the  following:  the  girdle,  Tai-tze  ^  ^-, 
is  similarly  pronounced  in  Chinese  as  T'ai-tze  \%  ^ ,  to  bear  away 
or  carry  off  children. 

Hence,  as  it  is  feared  above  all,  that  the  deceased  might  take  a 
fancy  to  carry  away  his  children  with  him  to  the  other  world,  he 
is  denied  the  use  of  a  girdle. 

This  custom  is  based,  as  may  be  seen,  upon  mere  punning  on 
the  words.  For  the  same  reason,  it  is  avoided  putting  the  buttons 
in  the  button-holes,  K'eu-tze  |p  ^ ,  as  this  expression  sounds  like 
K'eu-tze  ^p  ^,  "to  kidnap  children". 

The  dying  man  also  must  in  nowise  be  allowed  to  expire  on 
the  family  bed,  as  this  would  be  subsequently  haunted.  In  the 
Northern  parts  of  China,  where  the  family  bed  is  an  adobe  construc- 
tion or  K'ang  jfc,  it  is  said  that  if  a  person  dies  thereon,  he  will 
have  to  transport  dry  clay-bricks  in  the  nether  world. 


—  44  — 

Great  care  is  therefore  taken  to  prepare  another  hed,  employing 
sometimes  a  simple  door  placed  on  two  trestles,  and  on  which  the 
dying  man  is  laid.  Howsoever  weak  he  may  be,  he  must  be  trans- 
ported on  this  rough  couch,  even  were  it  to  cause  his  death.  Let 
him  therefore  die,  but  it  will  be  in  accordance  with  the  laid-down 
rules  ! 

Those  who  assist  a  dying  person  are  careful  to  take  away  all 
the  bed-curtains,  as  these,  it  is  thought,  resemble  a  fishing-net, 
and  if  the  dying  person  departs  from  this  world  surrounded  by  such 
meshes,  he  will   be  changed  into  a  fish  in  the  other  world. 

A  still  more  cruel  custom  consists  in  removing  the  pillow  from 
under  the  dying  person's  head,  in  order  that  the  feet  may  not  be 
perceived.  Should  he  happen  to  gaze  on  his  feet  when  dying,  great 
misfortunes  would  befall  his  children.  This  absurd  custom,  doubt- 
less, hastens  death  in  manv  cases. 


—  45  — 

ARTICLE    II. 
AFTER     DEATH. 

As  soon  as  the  dying  person  has  given  up  the  ghost,  care  is 
immediately  taken  to  consult  the  Imperial  almanac,  Hwa.ng-lih-treu 
ill  M  JPh  to  observe  whether  the  day  is  lucky  or  unlucky;  in  case 
it  happens  to  be  unlucky,  a  sieve  or  a  mirror  is  suspended  over  the 
door-way. 

The  sieve  allows  but  good  influences  to  pass  through  it,  while 
the  mirror  has  the  power  of  changing  evil  into  real  happiness. 

This  preliminary  operation  over,  it  is  proceeded  to  lay  out  the 
dead  person.  First  he  is  washed,  then  the  black  strings  binding 
the  extremity  of  his  queue  are  removed,  and  blue  ones  put  on.  A 
person  takes  cotton-wool  or  a  towel  and  wipes  his  face  therewith. 
He  is  afterwards  dressed  out  in  his  mortuarv  robes,  which  we  have 
previously  described  (p.   42). 

Paper  hangings  are  suspended  over  the  door-way,  to  announce 
that  a  person  is  dead  in  the  family.  These  hangings  vary  in  form 
according  to  places;  in  some  localities,  they  are  dispensed  with, 
and  it  is  deemed  sufficient  to  affix  a  few  written  characters  on  the 
outer  walls  of  the  house. 

These  preparations  being  carried  out,  as  soon  as  night  sets  in, 
the  members  of  the  family  light  up  lanterns,  and  weeping,  proceed 
to  inform  the  local  tutelary  deity  T'u-ti  Lao-yeh  j^  i|j}  ^  ^-,  that 
a  member  of  the  family  has  departed  from  this  world.  They  beg 
him  to  show  kindness  towards  him,  stating  that  during  his  mortal 
career  he  was  weak  and  infirm,  and  toiled  hard  along  the  pathway 
of  life.  After  a  display  of  fire-crackers  and  the  offering  of  incense, 
each  one  goes  home.  The  second  day,  all  return,  and  bearing 
lanterns,  proceed  to  the  temple  of  the  local  deity  T'u-ti  Lao-yeh  j^ 
Ml  $t  M>  this  time  for  the  purpose  of  bringing  back  the  soul  of  the 
deceased,  which  was  deemed  to  be  hospitably  received  in  the  temple. 
But  where  is  it  to  be  found?  In  order  to  discover  its  whereabouts, 
a  copper  coin  (cash)  is  rubbed  against  the  wall  of  the  temple,  and 
where  it  adheres  (whether  through   mere   chance,    or    because    it  has 


—  46  — 

encountered  a  spider's  web),  there  dwells   the   soul    of   the    departed, 
which  is  forthwith  brought  back. 

When  the  house  is  reached,  victuals  to  be  used  on  the  way,  are 
put  in  a  kind  of  paper  wallet,  and  placed  on  a  paper  sedan-chair  or 
a  waggon,  according  to  the  locality.  This  being  accomplished,  the 
departed  soul  is  requested  to  take  its  seat  on  the  paper  waggon, 
and  start  for  the  long  journey  of  eternity.  The  waggon  is  then 
set  on  fire,  and  the  soul  wings  its  flight  to  the  nether  world.  fre- 
quently on  such  occasions,  some  of  his  old  shoes  are  burnt,  care 
having  been  taken  to  cut  the  soles  in  two  ;  through  this  device  they 
are  despatched  to  him  for  use  in  the  other  world. 

Oftentimes  also,  a  small  table  covered  over  with  ashes  is  placed 
near  the  sedan  or  waggon,  in  order  to  act  as  a  lift  for  the  departed 
soul,  and  help  it  to  enter  more  conveniently  the  sedan-chair.  Each 
one  hastens  to  examine  whether  the  departing  spirit  has  not  left 
some  mark  resembling   ;i   footprint  on  the  ashes. 

A  rather  quaint  custom   consists    in    attaching    round  the    neck 

of  the  deceased  two  wisps  of  cotton-wool,  in  order  that  he  may  bear 

away  the  misfortune  of  the    family,    and    preserve    it    from  having   a 
too  numerous  brood  of  girls. 


Fig.  23 


Han-k'eou-tsHen.     Sapeque  serree  dans  la  bouche  du  defunt. 
Han-k'eu-ts'ien.     Coin  pressed  in  the  mouth  of  a  corpse. 


—  47  — 

ARTICLE    III. 

PLACING    THE    CORPSE    IN    THE    COFFIN. 

The  corpse  must  be  put  into  the  coffin  on  a  lucky  day,  as  it 
might  otherwise  contaminate  the  neighbourhood.  Some  families 
await  a  day  or  even  two  before  putting  the  body  into  the  coffin. 

In  this  latter  case,  a  large  kitchen-knife  is  placed  on  the  corpse, 
as  it  lies  in  the  bier.  This  sharp  cutting  instrument  is  heavy,  and 
can  be  used  as  a  defensive  weapon.  The  deceased  is  rendered 
unable  to  get  away,  and  so  his  soul  cannot  further  return  to 
molest  the  living. 

For  clearness  sake,  we  shall  mention  briefly  the  ordinary 
superstitions  connected  with  the  coffin  itself,  after  which  we  shall 
describe  the  divers  objects  placed  in    the  mortuary  room. 

-1°.      Placing  the  corpse  in  the  coffin-the  coffin  itself. 

In  the  Lower  Yang-tze  ^  ^  region,  every  coffin  is  closed 
with  a  big  nail,  called  Tze-sun-ting  -^  ^  £]",  ;'the  posterity  nail". 
This  is  deemed  essential  in  order  to  obtain  numerous  offspring. 
The  custom  exists  little  in  North  Kiang-su  yX  j|fc-  in  Ngan-hwei 
4£  HI;,  however,  all  put  a  small  copper  coin  'cash)  in  the  mouth  ol 
the  corpse. 

Sometimes  the  mouth  is  maintained  open  by  means  of  a  small 
wooden  wedge  ;  at  other  times,  it  is  opened  by  loosening  the  jaws 
contracted  during  the  last  convulsions  of  death.  This  solemn  oper- 
ation is  carried  out  quite  methodically.  A  pair  of  cords  or  threads 
are  placed  crossing  each  other  on  the  open  coffin,  one  extending  from 
head  to  foot,  the  other  being  drawn  over  the  face.  They  must  meet 
exactly  over  the  mouth  of  the  corpse,    as  it  lies  in  the  coffin. 

At  the  point  of  intersection  of  the  two  threads,  a  third  one  is 
suspended,  bearing  at  its  extremity  a  small  copper  coin  (cash),  which 
drops  down  into  the  mouth  of  the  corpse.  It  is  left  there  some 
time  and  then  withdrawn.  This  is  called  Han-k'eu-ls'ien  p£  p  H>. 
or  coin  pressed   in  the  mouth. 

The  eldest  son,  if  he  be  still  young,  treasures  this  coin,  and 
hangs  it  on  his  neck  as  an  amulet'.     Should  he  be  unwilling   to    use 


—  48  — 

it,  it  is  offered  as  a  present  to  some  other  family,  to  be  worn  by  the 
eldest  of  the  boys. 

It  may  not  be  useless  to  remark  here  that  many  pagan  children, 
who  wear  coins  (cash)  hung  on  to    the    neck    by   a    red    string,    have 
among  them  one  which  has  been  pressed  in  the    mouth    of   a    corpse 
Han-k'eu-ts'ien  P#-   □   §i,    and    another    issued    from    the    mouth  of 
Peh-lao-yeli   £j   qj£  J^  (See  demon-scaring  charms  and  amulets). 

Frequently  a  little  rice  is  placed  in  the  mouth  of  the  corpse, 
previous  to  removing  the  wooden  wedge;  this  is  the  farewell  meal 
given   here  below  . 

Let  us  now  sec  how  the  coffin,  the  last  resting-place  of  man  in 
this  world,  is  prepared.  At  the  bottom  of  it  are  placed  little 
bundles  containing  dry  lime,  ashes  and  earth.  These  must  be  equal 
to  the  number  of  years  which  the  deceased  has  lived.  It  he  dies  at 
sixty,  sixty  parcels  must  be  placed  in  the  coffin.  All  these  materials 
are  wrapped  up   in  paper  "P'i-chi"   fe   $j£. 

Sometimes  a  layer  of  cotton-wool  is  added  to  serve  as  a 
mattress.  At  the  head  of  the  coffin  is  placed  a  cushion,  called 
Ling-kioh-chen  |§  ^  7^,  (l)  or  buffalo-horn  pillow,  from  its  resem- 
blance to  the  horned  shape  of  the  water-caltrop. 

This  pillow  is  composed  of  two  parts  juxtaposited,  and  must 
not  contain  either  straw  or  chaff,  but  only  ashes  and  dry  lime.  The 
upper  covering  is  made  of  red  cloth,  the  two  corners  (horns)  being 
turned  upwards;  the  lower  covering  is  of  blue  cloth,  and  the  inferior 
corners  are  turned  downwards.  Thev  resemble  a  pair  of  crescents 
juxtaposited.  The  head  of  the  corpse  is  placed  in  the  middle  of  the 
upper  crescent.  1 1  is  dressed  out  in  full  mortuary  robes,  and  cover- 
ed over  with  a  red  wadded  quilt  as  wide  as  the  coffin.  For  the  last 
time,  a  little  rice  is  put  in  the  dead  man's  hands,  in  order  that  he 
may  apease  therewith  the  hungry  dogs  of  the  village,  which  he  must 
cross  on   his  way  to  the  nether  world. 


(1)     §|j  Lin^'.  The  water-caltrop  (Trapct   bicomis),   an   aquatic  vegetable,  the  fruit  of 
which  is  eaten. 


—  49  — 
This  is  called  the  viand  for  apeasing  the  dogs,    Ta-heu-shih    JT 


£ 


Others,  endowed  with  more  foresight,  add  thereto  a  pair  of 
chopsticks,  to  be  used  as  cudgels,  in  case  the  hungry  dogs  made  a 
too  determined  attack  to  bite  him.  A  mirror  is  placed  in  an  upright 
position  at  his  feet,  in  order  that  his  own  reflected  image  would 
deliver  him  from  any  subsequent  death.  Dead  twice  lor  all,  he 
could  hardly  die  again  ! 

Wealthy  folks  lay  the  corpse  on  a  bed  of  gold  or  silver  ingots. 
This  affords  them  happiness  unalloyed,  and  assures  the  future  of 
their  posterity  (See  on  this  ancient  custom,  Cli.    V.  Article   \). 

Most  well-to-do  people  have  their  dead  equipped  with  jewels,  a 
custom  which  provokes  the  cupidity  of  robbers,  and  it  is  highly 
probable  that  the  next  step  will  be  the  violation  of  these  rich  tombs. 
Chinese  law  visits  this  crime  with  the  death-penalty. 

When  the  corpse  has  been  fully  laid  out  in  its  grave  clothes 
and  placed  on  the  bier,  a  very  clean  towel  is  dipped  in  hot  water, 
and  used  in  wiping  for  the  last  time  the  face  of  the  deceased,  after 
which,  the  strip  of  cloth  called  Tsing-k'eu-pu  -]f£  P  rffl .  or  cloth 
for  washing  the  mouth,  is  nailed  on.  This  extends  entirely  over 
the  coffin,  beneath  the  cover,  and  is  intended  to  prevent  any  dust 
from  entering,  or  falling  on  the  face  of  the  corpse. 

Nothing  further  now  remains  but  to  close  the  collin.  Care  has 
been  taken  to  draw  three  hairs  from  the  queue  of  the  deceased: 
these  are  entwined  on  three  big  nails  intended  for  closing  the  lid 
of  the  coffin.  They  are  called  "Wan-ting"  Sjf.  £]"  or  also  "Cltwan- 
ting  '  |^.  3=]",  that  is  entwined  nails. 

Here  again  there  is  a  real  pun  on  the  two  expressions  :  Wan- 
ting f$-  §]",  to  entwine  a  nail,  and  Wan-ting  Bj£  "J*-  posterity, 
descendants. 

Similarly,  there  is  a  play  on  the  pronunciation  of  the  words 
Chwan-ting  ijj^  ^T,  to  wind  (something)  round  a  nail,  and  C/w'an- 
ting  f|f.  "J",  to  propagate  posterity.  In  fine,  it  is  an  omen  portend- 
ing numerous  descendants. 

7 


—  50  — 

When  the  carpenter  approaches  to  drive  down  the  big  nails 
used  for  closing  the  coffin,  the  son  of  the  deceased,  kneeling  beside 
the  mortal  remains  of  his  sire,  shouts  to  him:  "fear  not.  they  are 
going  to  nail  down  the  coffin!" 

In  several  places,  it  is  the  son  himself  who  drives  in  the 
first  nail. 

Likewise,  when  as  stated  above,  the  strip  of  cloth  called  Tsing- 
k'eu-pu  ffi  P  /fjj  ,  is  nailed  on,  the  son  has  to  warn  his  lather  to 
withdraw  his  hands,   in  order  to  avoid  being  wounded  by  the  nails. 

When  all  these  preparations  are  over,  the  coflin  is  placed  on 
two  trestles,  in  the  middle  of  the  mortuary  chamber,  awaiting  the 
burial. 

2°.     Oi>jP(ix  placed  h<>si<le  Hip  coffin. 

At  the  head  of  the  coffin,  but  to  the  front,  and  consequently 
between  the  outer  door  and  the  coflin  itself,  is  placed  a  small  table. 
It  is  important  to  understand  well  the  objects  laid  on  this  table,  as 
it  is  in  reality  the  centre  of  all  superstitions. 

A).  In  the  centre  of  the  table  is  erected  the  seat  of  the  soul, 
called  Ling-tso-lze  §g  J^g  -^ ,  or  Hwun-p'ai-tze  z^f  }$.  ^f  (the  ghost's 
slab).  This  is  a  paper  tablet,  a  kind  of  envelope  or  large  rectangu- 
lar red  wrapper,  supposed  to  contain  the  soul  of  the  departed, 
whose  name  is  written  thereon. 

B).  On  the  left  of  this  tablet  is  laid  a  bowl  of  rice,  in  the 
middle  of  which  is  placed  a  boiled  or  hard  egg,  having  a  hole  pierced 
in  its  upper  part.  Two  chopsticks  are  stuck,  either  in  the  egg  itself, 
or  in  the  rice,  according  to  places.  This  offering  is  called  the  rice 
(placed,  at  the  rear  of  the  head,    Tao-Veu-fan   $\   jijf  §5- 

C).  On  the  right  of  the  tablet,  in  a  large  bowl,  is  placed  a 
cock,  slaughtered  but  uncooked;  the  feathers,  except  those  of  the 
tail,  have  been  entirely  plucked  off,  and  the  head  is  turned  towards 
the  coffin. 

D).  On  the  middle  of  the  table,  before  the  tablet,  is  a  censer, 
in  which  incense  is  burninsr. 


Fig.  24 


'■■  ;J\ 

.    .         .... 

/  f^*"*, .  "t***!!r."t^j","It. : 

_J  \ 

Tao-t'eou-fan.     Le  riz  de  derriere  la  tete. 
Tao-t'eu-fan.  Rice  placed  behind  the  head  of  a  corpse. 


—  r>1  — 

E\  On  each  side  of  the  tabid  are  two  large  candlesticks,  in 
which  two  candles  burn  constantly. 

F).  <  >n  the  front  of  the  table,  near  the  corner,  is  a  small 
Chinese  lamp,  fed  with  oil. 

G\  Several  add  to  the  above  a  pair  of  chopsticks,  a  wine-cup,  a 
jar  of  wine,  a  wash-hand-basin  for  toilet  purposes,  and  a  pair  of  shoes. 
the  soles  of  which  are  cut   in  two  and  wrapped  up  in  cotton-cloth. 

Under  the  coffin,   between    the    two    benches,    is    placed    a    lamp 
not  unfrequcntly  equipped   with  seven   wicks,   Ts'ih-sing-teng   Jfc  Jl 
£j|),  which  burns  day  and    night. 

To  the  rear  of  the  lamp  is  placed  a  mirror,  wherein  is  reflected 
the  image  of  the  coffin.  This  coffin  is  thus  reckoned  as  two,  hence 
for  some  time  to  come  no  other  death  will  occur  in  the  family.  The 
lamp  is  often   placed  on  the  grindstone  of  the  household. 

The  annexed  engraving  illustrates  all  this  ceremonial. 

3°.      Escorting  the  soul.   Fung-ling  :£<\  j||. 

I  Mi  the  third  or  fifth  day  alter  death,  wealthy  families  invite 
Buddhist  priests  to  help  the  soul  over  the  bridge  (doubtless,  the 
bridge  of  anguish,  spanning  the  red  torrent,  and  from  the  summit 
of  which,  the  two  demons  Short-life  and  Quick-death,  cast  into  the 
waters  beneath  the  souls  travelling  over  it).   (1). 

Buddhist  pi  iests  arrive  in  procession,  and  at  evening,  assemble 
in  front  of  the  house  of  the  deceased.  Outside  the  principal  door, 
a  rough  construction  resembling  a  bridge  is  erected,  by  means  of 
tables  placed  with  the  four  feet  upwards  ;  to  each  foot  of  these  tables 
is  attached  a  lighted  lantern. 

At  the  entrance  to  the  bridge  is  placed  an  elevated  platform, 
on  which  the  principal  Buddhist  priest  ascends,  wearing  his  live- 
cornered  cap.  Standing  on  the  platform,  he  recites  some  incantation 
classics,  then  scatters  cakes  on  the  ground,  which  are  scrambled 
for  bv  the  spectators;  the  priests  then  depart  and  the  ceremony  is 
concluded. 


ill     S  c  Ynh-lib  ch'ao-chw'an  3LM  & #      Treatise  on  the  Infernal  regi 


—  52  — 

4°.      Awaiting  the  burial. 

Whether  the  coffin  be  kept  for  a  long  or  short  time  in  the 
house  of  the  departed,  matters  little;  it  is  the  tablet,  seat  of  the 
soul,   that  becomes  the  object  of  all  customary  superstitions. 

Every  person  coming-  to  the  house  of  the  deceased,  must  bring 
some  mock-money,  which  is  presented  to  the  person  appointed  for 
receiving"  guests. 

The  guest  will  then  burn  the  mock-money,  and  offer  his  con- 
dolences to  the  son  of  the  deceased,  who  bows  his  acknowledgments 
kneeling  on  the  ground,  to  show  thereby  how  profound  is  his  grief. 

The  tablet  remains  exposed  during  forty-nine  days,  or  the  full 
space  of  seven  weeks. 

During  this  time,  a  series  of  funeral  repasts  is  given  and 
presents  are  received.  Among  the  latter,  may  be  found  "mourning 
scrolls",  Wan-chang  ^  1(1^-,  or  large  inscriptions  written  on  rectan- 
gular pieces  of  satin,  silk,  or  cloth,  and  which  are  carried  on  the 
burial  dav  in   honour  of  the  deceased. 

While  the  coffin  rests  on  the  trestles,  little  children  are  wont 
to  leap  over  it,  in  order  to  obtain  courage. 

We  shall  see  in   like  manner,   how  the    egg    placed    in  the    bowl 
of  rice,   beside  the  head  of  the  corpse,  is  eaten  for  the  same  purpose. 
A   pun  is  made  on  the  word  "Tan"  gr,  meaning  an  egg,  and  "Tan' 
)]f?:,  courage.      Eating  this  egg   will   inspire  courage. 


—  53  — 

ARTICLE    IV. 

BURIAL. 

1°.      Preparing  the  burial. 

Almost  everywhere,  a  skilled  geomancer  is  summoned  to  inspect 
the  environs,  and  select  a  suitable  spot  as  a  burial-place.  His  duty 
is  also  to  indicate  the  direction  in  which  the  coffin  must  be  laid. 
On  this  depend  fortune,  literary  degrees,  and  a  numerous  posterity. 
Future  happiness  is  influenced  by  the  judicious  choice  of  a  burial- 
site  (1). 

Generally,  the  geomancer,  after  having  selected  a  favourable 
site,  takes  a  live  cock,  and  traces  with  the  bill  of  the  bird  a  kind  of 
cross  on  the  ground  :   he  then  pours  thereon  some  native  wine. 

Wealthy  folks  have  a  solemn  ceremony  for  dotting  the  character 
Chu  3£,  on  the  tablet  of  the  deceased  (2  . 

For  this  purpose  they  invite  a  literary  graduate,  who  dressed 
out  in  official  robes,  ascends  majestically  a  platform,  takes  with 
solemnity  in  his  hand  a  pencil  dipped  in  vermilion,  and  makes  the 
famous  dot  on  the  top  of  the  character  Chu  3£ .  This  is  called  dotting 
the  character  Chu  3;  or  Tien-chu  lf£  3£.  The  ceremony  is  rather 
expensive,  but  also  what  honour  it  confers  on  the  family  !  The  rite 
is  accomplished  either  in  the  ancestral  hall  or  at  the  burial  ground. 

In  this  latter  case,  some  eminent  person  must  be  also  invited 
to  perform  the  solemn  bowings  to  the  Farth,  made  on  the  brink  of 
open  grave  just  before  lowering  the  coffin.  The  person,  who  thus 
officiates,  is  styled  Tz'e-t'u  fpj  J-  (he  who  sacrifices  to  the  Farth  . 
while  the  one  who  has  dotted  the  character  Chu  y£,  is  called  Tien- 
chu-kwan  |^  i  ^  (he  who  superintends  the  dottinu  of  the  cha- 
racter). 

2°.      Carrying  nut   the  coffin. 

While  Buddhist  or  Taoist  priests.  "Tao-shi"  &  ±,  surround 
the  corpse   and    terminate    the    liturgic    prayers:    as    mock-mone>     i- 

(1)  See  article  on  Fung-shui  JK,  fa.  Ch.  V I  I.I  §  2. 

(2)  See  Doolittle.     Social  Life  of  the  Chinese.     Vol.  I.  p.  207. 


—  54  — 

being  burnt  in  abundance,  the  coffin  is  at  last  taken  out.  'This  is 
a  solemn  moment,  and  loud  lamentations  break  forth.  One  of  the 
Taoist  priests,  armed  with  a  large  kitchen-knife,  strikes  the  coffin, 
and  breaks  with  a  second  blow  an  empty  bowl.  The  purpose  of 
this  is  to  awaken  the  defunct,  and  warn  him  to  make  ready  for  the 
approaching  journey. 

Immediately  afterwards,  the  heavy  coffin  is  lifted  up  and  borne 
to  the  middle  of  the  road,  as  also  the  table,  upon  which  has  been 
placed  the  tablet  of  the  deceased. 

The  eldest  son.  leaning  on  the  coffin,  kneels  down  before  the 
corpse:  he  wears  full  mourning  dress,  and  bears  on  his  head  the 
three-ridged  cap.  San-liang-kwan  5£  ^  7^.  so  called  from  its  pe- 
culiar shape. 

The  Buddhist  priests  invite  him  to  take  his  father's  tablet  and 
fetch  it  back  home,  after  which  he  returns  and  follows  the  funeral 
procession,  leaning  on  the  hearse.  lie  bows  his  respects  to  the 
bearers,  and  begs  them  to  carry  gently  his  venerable  sire.  In  case 
they  may  fulfil  this  duty  negligently,  he  is  armed  with  a  kind  of 
wand,  entwined  with  a  long  strip  of  white  paper,  and  styled  Tao- 
sang-pang  j$\  fljjs  \i'fj.  wherewith  he  can  chastise  them  if  they  jolt 
too  much  the  corpse  in  the  coffin     1   . 

On  the  top  of  the  coffin  is  placed  a  rooster,  one  of  its  legs  being 
attached  by  a  string  to  the  carrying-poles  2).  The  word  cock,  Ki 
$ffi-  i-s  pronounced  almost  in  the  same  manner  as  "Kih"  "j^j,  mean- 
ing good  luck.      The  bird  is  therefore  of  good  omen  (3). 

Let  us  remark  by  the  way,  that  if  the  deceased  had  but  an 
only  son  of  tender  years,  all  precautious  are  taken  lest  he  would  bear 
him  away  to  the  world  of  spirits.  When  the  coffin  is  taken  out  of 
the  house,  the  little  lad  is  placed  in  a  large  basket,    and    hoisted    by 


(1)     In  several  places,  this  strip  of  white  paper,  enfcwim  d  round  a  bamboo,  is  used    a 
a  mark  to  guide  the  departed  spirit  back  to  the  grave. 

(2      In  Southern  China  a  white  cock  is  used.     Doolittle.    Social   Life  of  the  Chinese. 
Vol.  I.  p.  214 

3      Si  e  el,.  X.  Article  VIII. 


.1.1 


means  of  a  cord  and  pulley    fixed    in    a    cross-beam,    to    beneath    the 
roof  of  the  house.      He  is  thus  kept  out   of  danger,  and  the  deceased 

must  depart  without  him. 

3".      Order  of  the  funeral  procession     1  . 

a).  The  procession  opens  by  two  men  carrying  a  pair  of  stream- 
ers or  hags,  made  of  white  paper,  and  called  "Yin-lv.  fan-tze  <j| 
lift  //iff  "? "j  or  landmarks  to  guide  the  spirit  on  its  way  to  Hades. 

b).  They  are  followed  by  a  person  scattering  mock-monev.  lie 
carries  a  basket  filled  with  a  plentiful  supply  of  paper-coin,  and 
strews  it  along  the  way.  to  enable  the  departed  spirit  to  purchase 
its  passage,  and  secure  "the  right  of  way"  to  the  world  of  shades   '1  . 

c).  Two  large  paper  figures  called  T'ung-nu  jj|  -fc.  and 
T'ung-nan  j|  -^,  a  damsel  and  a  youth  {S).  The  first  bears  a  tea- 
cup and  tea-pot:  the  second  carries  a  tobacco-pipe  and  pouch.  They 
are  designed  to  act  as  slaves  or  servants  to  the  dead  man  in  the 
infernal  regions. 

d).  Two  miniature  mountains,  one  styled  the  golden  mountain. 
Kin-shan  ^  |Jj ,  made  of  gold-gilt  paper;  the  other  called  the  silver 
mountain,  Yin-shan  §f<  |Jj ,  made  of  silver-gilt  paper.  Both  are 
destined  to  furnish  the  deceased  with  an  inexhaustible  supply  of 
gold  and  silver  (4). 

e  .  Two  bearers  carry  a  paper  sedan-chair,  Lu-kiao  0  i|£j.  for 
the  benefit  of  the  deceased. 

f).  There  are  also  mock-steeds,  with  their  riders,  all  in  paper, 
it  is  needless  to  say. 

g).  Two  paper  swash-bucklers,  called  the  '"gods  opening  the 
way'"  K'ai-lu-shen  |$  jjft  >|itji,  or  Ta-lu-shen  :}T  ]Jff  ftp.  Their  duty  is 
to  clear  the  road,  and  disperse  all  intruders  who  might  obstruct  the 
way  (5). 


(1)  See  also  D.oolittle.  Social  Life  of  the.Cbiuese.  Vol.  I.  p.  200. 

(2)  s,-o  C\,.  III.  article  VII.  infra. 

(3)  Doolittle  mils  them  the  "golden  hi  1"  and  the  "gemmeous  lass".  Ihid.  p.  213. 

ili  Two  famous  temples,  are  erected  on  golden  ami  silver  Islands,  opposite  Chen- 
kiang  JK  }!.,  province  of  Kiang-su  JX  Wf;- 

(5)  Thpy  arc  from  ten  to  fifteen  feet  long,  and,  four  or  five  in  diameter.  Thej  are 
burnt  in  Eroni  of  the  grave.     Doolittle.  loc   cit.  p.  203. 


—  56  — 

<  >ne  of  them  bears  a  club,   and  the  other  an  axe. 

h).  After  these  are  borne  the  tablets  of  the  spirit  of  the  deceas- 
ed, P'ai  f$-.  Following  the  practice  of  high  officials,  they  are 
accompanied  by  a  host  of  youthful  attendants.  Kang-p'ai  ^X  J|^, 
carrying'  various  insignia.  The  deceased  is  deemed  to  have  acquired 
an  increase  of  dignity  in  the  nether  world,  hence  he  is  accompanied 
by  his  insignia  of  rank. 

i).  At  the  extremity  of  bamboos  are  carried  special  insignia, 
such  as  mav  be  seen  in  processions  in  honour  of  the  gods:  Ts'un- 
fn,  hvan-kia,  (upturned)  hands,  adzes  and  hammers  etc...  all  in 
tinfoil. 

Wealthy  people  have  these  instruments  carried  in  front  of  the 
coffin.      They  are  carved   in   wood,   and  covered  over  with  tinfoil. 

p.  The  procession  of  Taoist,  Tao-slii  ^  -_[;,  or  Buddhist  priests, 
wearing  the  surplice  or  coloured  cope  Kia-sha  '£?  |^  (1),  and  playing 
the  flute,   beating  cymbals,  or  murmuring  some  liturgical   prayers. 

k).  four  literary  graduates,  acting  as  masters  of  ceremonies, 
and  conducting  the  funeral  rites. 

4°.      At  the  grave-side. 

As  soon  as  the  procession  has  left  the  city  or  village,  all  these 
insignia  are  burnt,  and  thus  deemed  forwarded  to  the  deceased,  to 
be  used  by  him  in  the  land  of  shades  sometimes,  however,  they 
are  fired  at  the  grave-side).  Generally,  the  only  objects  retained. 
are  the  two  white  paper-streamers,  Yin-lu  fan-tze  pj)  5ft  j^§  "?'  which 
are  stuck  in  the  ground,  on  each  side  of  the  coffin  of  the  departed, 
in  order  that  his  soul,  after  its  flight  through  the  air,  may  easily 
find  again  the  grave  (2). 

While  the  coffin  is  being  lowered  into  the  grave,  mock-money 
is  burnt  and  music  played  ;  lire-crackers  are  sent  off  in  abundance, 
lamentations  and  wai lings  are  redoubled,  and  all  kneel  clown  to  bow 
a  last  farewell  to  the  deceased. 


(1)  From   the   Sanscrit    Kasha ya,  a  coloured  garment.     Nowadays,  a  cope  or  outer 
ni,lr  worn  In  Buddhist  priests  when  officiating.     It  is  made  of  very  thin  cotton  or  gauze. 

(2)  See  article  on  Streamers,  Ch.  V.  Article  VII.  infra. 


—  57  — 

Frequently  also,  a  paper  sedan-chair  is  burned,  to  be  used  bv 
the  departed  spirit  when  travelling  to  the  lower  regions  (1),  to  which 
he  is  conducted  by  a  kind  of  usher-demon,  called  Yin-kwei  t'ung-tze 
31   %  M  ■?  (the  lad  leading  the  soul). 

Each  disembodied  spirit  has  a  name  written  on  its  forehead  : 
"honourable  penitent",  "obedient  servant"...  etc.  It  is  Tsao-kiin 
'iti  3n)  the  kitchen-god,  who  thus  marks  his  devotees,  recommending 
them  to  the  mercy  of  the  ruler  of  Hades. 

One  meets  frequently  along  the  country,  in  the  midst  of  the 
fields  or  on  the  hill-sides,  coffins  simply  covered  over  with  straw  or 
wild  plants.      It  is  interesting  to  know  the  reason  thereof. 

Three  reasons  are  generally  assigned  for  this  custom. 

1°.  The  time  for  the  burial  of  the  deceased  was  found  to  be 
unlucky,  the  fortune-tellers  having  declared,  that  a  burial  on  that 
special  day  would  bring  misfortune  on  the  descendants,  hence  the 
coffin  has  been  simply  laid  on  the  ground,  and  temporarily  covered 
over,  awaiting  a  lucky  day  in  which  the  burial  may  take  place. 

2".  A  lucky  burial-place  for  the  coffin  has  not  yet  been  found. 
Geomancers,  either  cannot  agree,  or  the  famiW  wishes  to  obtain  a 
lucky  spot,  but  the  owrner,  guessing  the  intention  of  the  purchaser, 
raises  the  price.  In  such  cases,  the  coffin  is  laid  on  a  temporarv 
resting-place,  awaiting  a  full  burial  ceremony  when  the  site  has 
been  purchased. 

3°.  Women,  who  die  in  childbirth,  are,  as  we  shall  subseq- 
uently see,  most  harshly  treated  by  Buddhism.  The  coffin,  in  which 
their  mortal  i"emains  are  placed,  must  remain  exposed  in  the  open 
during  three  years.  It  is  sometimes  covered  over  with  straw,  but 
it  is  not  allowed  to  bury  it,  or  raise  a  mound  over  it.  It  is  thus 
that  this  inhuman  doctrine  brands  with  a  public  stigma  the  memory 
of  those  unfortunate  victims. 


(1)     It  is  charitably  supposed  he  would  enjoy  riding,  instead  of  being  obliged  to  walk 
to  the  infernal  regions.     Doolittle.  Social  Life  of  the  Chinese.  Vol.  I.  p.  174. 


8 


—  58  — 

ARTICLE    V. 
AFTER    THE    BURIAL. 

Fixed  lime*  for  mourning  services. 

The  third  day  after  the  burial,  the  ceremony  called  "returning 
to  the  mountain"  Fu-shan  ^  fjj  (grave-side)  is  performed.  Four 
bowls  of  meat  are  offered,  pork,  fowl,  fish  and  pea-curd.  On  the 
table  are  placed  a  pair  of  chopsticks,  a  jar  of  nine  and  a  wine-glass. 

Two  tresses  of  rice-straw,  having  a  number  of  knots  correspond- 
ing to  the  years  the  deceased  lived  here  below,  are  placed  on  each 
side  of  the  grave  :  the  extremity  of  these  is  then  Hied  to  keep  company 
with  the  departed  spirit.  They  are  called  "smoke  faggots"  Yen- 
heu-pa  @  §1  4E»  and  remnants  of  them  are  found  frequently  near 
graves.  On  the  same  occasion,  fire-crackers  are  sent  off  and  mock- 
money  is  burnt  on  the  grave. 

This  ceremony  is  sometimes  called  "rounding  off  the  mound  or 
tumulus"  Yuan-fen  [gj  J§|. 

It  is  especially  on  that  same  day  that  the  departed  spirit  returns 
to  its  former  home,  seeking  daylight  (literally  his  eye-sight  Yen- 
kwang  fig   -fa),  of  which  he  had   been   recently  deprived  there. 

So  far,  every  care  has  been  taken  not  to  disturb  anything  in 
the  house.  It  is  not  swept,  and  clothes  and  bed-coverlets  are  left 
unwashed,  lest  the  deceased,  on  returning,  would  not  enjoy  again 
the  light  of  day  or  recover  his  eve-sight.  Now,  in  what  manner  of 
way  does  the  departed  spirit  return? 

Some  say  that  he  scrambles  down  through  the  chimney,  and 
so  a  little  ladder  made  of  bamboo  or  reeds  is  placed  against  the 
fireplace,  to  facilitate  his  entering  the  house. 

Others  prefer  believing  that  he  climbs  over  the  garden-wall, 
so  again  a  little  ladder  is  placed  there  to  help  him  over. 

("are  has  been  taken  to  spread  some  fine  ashes  over  the  lloor  of 
the  room,  in  order  to  discover  from  his  footprints,  whether  he  has 
been  reborn  as  a  man  or  has  entered  the  body  of  a  brute.  That 
night  is  a  sleepless  one  for  the    members    of    the    house,    and    if   the 


—  59  — 

least  noise  is  heard   at    the  door  or  the  window-sill,  immediately    all 
lights  are  put  out. 

An  egg  has  been  carefully  prepared  for  him  and  placed  in  a 
bowl,  as  also  a  single  chopstick,   in  order  to  detain  him  further. 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  it  is  a  most  difficult  task  to  eat  a  hai'd 
egg,  when  one  is  provided  with  only  one  chopstick. 

The  expected  visit  being  over,  the  egg-  is  given  to  children  in 
order  to  increase  their  courage,  Tan-tze  la  jjjf  ^f  jz  ;  a  pun  being- 
made  on  the  word  Tan  ^  egg,  and  Tan  )J§  the  gall,  which  is  con- 
sidered the  seat  of  courage  in  China. 

The  offering  of  a  house,  provided  with  furniture,  servants  and 
other  requisites,  the  whole  in  paper,  is  made  on  the  forty-ninth  day 
after  death,  at  least  generally  (l).  It  is  burnt,  and  thus  conveyed 
to  the  world  of  shades  for  the  benefit  of  the  deceased. 

Frequently,  a  second  paper-house  is  burnt  for  those  who  have 
attained  the  age  of  fifty  or  sixty  years.  This  offering  is  made  at 
the  end  of  the  third  vear. 

Lastly,  it  may  sometimes  happen  that  an  old  man  has  no 
surviving  children,  and  that  some  of  his  brothers  or  next  of  kin  are 
already  deceased. 

As  he  will  thus  have  nobody  to  offer  him  a  paper-house  after 
death,  he  anticipates  on  the  event,  and  burns  one  for  his  own  use, 
having  taken  care  to  forward  it  to  one  of  his  relatives  in  the  nether 
world,  begging  him  to  keep  it  in  store  for  him,  until  the  day  when 
he  shall  come  to  enjoy  it.  The  Chinaman  is  far-seeing,  whatever 
people  may  say  to  the  contrary  !  The  offering  of  this  paper-house 
is  called  "providing  for  old  age"  Cheu-ling  jqj  |§ft. 

"Straw-tresses"  or  Fan-k'uen  ^  |||j.  Who  has  not  seen  along 
country  roads  and  by-ways,  the  remnants  of  straw-tresses  placed  on 
graves'?     These  tresses  or  circlets  of  straw  are  called    Fan-k'uen    f)^ 


(1)  In  Southern  China,  this  is  also  a  very  busy  and  eventful  daw  'the  mourning 
family  provides  a  feast  for  invited  relatives  and  friends.  After  this  date,  the  ottering  of 
lice  to  the  deceased  is  discontinued :  he  must  henceforth  cook  his  own  food.  Doolittle, 
Social  Life  of  the  Chinese.  Vol.  I.  p.  187. 


—  60  — 

ffrfi   "?•      Chinese  cooks  use  them  to   warm    the 


pgj,  or  Fan-ku-tze  \ 

various  dishes  served  up  as  an  accompaniment  to  cooked  rice. 

These  old  straw-tresses  are  placed  on  the  graves  of  children,  to 
prevent  the  "heavenly  dog"  T'ien-keu  %  $),  from  devouring  them 
(1).  They  are  thus  encircled  or  hedged  in,  so  to  speak,  in  their 
graves,  and  cannot  be  withdrawn  from  them.  Moreover,  the  heaven- 
ly dog  takes  the  tress  for  a  collar,  and  retreats  in  all  haste,  in 
which  case  he  resembles  much  the  dog  of  the  fable,  that  had  little 
love  for  his  collar. 

The  following  are  some  of  the  fixed  times,  in  the  course  of  the 
\Tear,  when  certain  mourning  ceremonies  are  practised  for  the  benefit 
of  the  dead. 

On  the  first  day  of  the  first  month,  they  are  wished  a  happy 
new  year,  crackers  are  exploded,  and  mock-money   is    placed    on    the 


<  )n  the  thirteenth  day  of  the  first  month,  the  first  year  after 
death,  a  lamp  is  placed  on  the  grave  of  the  deceased,  with  a  box  of 
matches  beside  it,  in  order  that  the  departed  spirit  may  light  it 
again  himself,  in  case  it  went  out.  This  lamp  is  called  the  "ghost's 
lamp"  Kwei-teng  fy  f^.  Many  wealthy  folks  place  large  vases  filled 
with  oil  near  the  graves  of  their  dead.  These  vast  receptacles  are 
in  reality  lamps  and  burn  for  whole  months. 

At  the  festival  of  the  tombs  or  Ts'ing-ming  Jpf  0^  (clear- 
brightness),  celebrated  about  April  5,  all  grave-mounds  must  be 
repaired,  rounded  off  and  cleaned  ;  a  round  sod  of  fresh  earth  is  dug 
up,  and  placed  on  the  summit  of  the  conical  tumulus.  This  round 
sod  of  earth,  it  is  thought,  represents  the  ceremonial  head-dress 
worn  by  the  Chinese.  Fire-crackers  are  exploded,  mock-mone}'  is 
burnt,  and  the  ceremony  is  brought  to  a  close  by  a  series  of  bow- 
ings towards  the  ground.  Sometimes,  meats  are  placed  on  a 
table  before  the  grave,  and  offered  in  sacrifice  to  the  manes  of  the 
departed.  In  the  province  of  Kiang-su  yX  i|ft,  mock-money  is  placed 
in  a  hamper  of  rice-straw  tresses,  and  burnt,  imagining  to  i-emit 
thus  a  corresponding  amount  to  the  land  of  shades. 

(1)     See  above  p.  { 


—  61  — 

In  the  country  round  Shanghai  J^  ffj,  a  brisk  business  is  done 
in  these  hampers  of  rice-straw  tresses.  Boat-loads  of  them  arrive 
constantly,  and  being  burnt,  are  conveyed  to  the  world  of  spirits. 

On  the  fifteenth  of  the  seventh  month,  the  visit  to  the  ancestral 
graves  is  renewed,  and  sacrifice  olTeied  to  the  manes  of  the  dead. 
It  is  at  this  time  that  the  tutelary  god  of  the  city,  Ch'eng-hwang  J)^ 
|$J|,  acting  as  celestial  mandarin,  gathers  the  hungry  and  wandering 
ghosts,  Ku-hwun  ^  z$|  (neglected  or  orbate  spirits),  and  offers  them 
presents  consisting  of  mock-money,  mock-clothing,  meats  and  cakes, 
all  made  of  paper  (1),  in  order  to  escape  their  vengeance.  This 
ceremony  is  called   "gathering  the  spirits",  Sheu-kwei  l\*i  J^|. 

( )n  the  first  of  the  tenth  month  winter  garments  are  offered  to 
the  dead.  They  are  burnt  on  the  graves,  and  thus  forwarded  to  the 
spirit-land.  It  is  a  matter  of  fact  that  all  these  clothes,  caps,  boots, 
shoes  and  dresses  etc...  are  made  of  paper.  Mock-money  is  also 
added.  The  ceremony  is  calling  "letting  out  the  spirits",  Fang- 
kwei  jfc  $&. 

On  the  anniversary  of  the  death  of  a  person,  it  is  customary  to 
proceed  to  his  grave  and  offer  mock-money.  This  is  "the  remem- 
brance offering",  and  shows  that  his  memory  is  still  fresh  in  the 
minds  of  the  living. 

Generally,  at  the  four  principal  periods,  Sze-tsieh  [5<|  |jj,  or  tri- 
monthly  festivals,  that  is  :  the  first  day  of  the  year,  the  festival  of 
the  tombs  Ts'ing-ming  -^  0$,  the  fifth  of  the  fifth  month,  and  the 
fifteenth  of  the  eighth  month,  a  commemorative  service  is  held  in 
honour  of  the  dead. 

On  the  fifteenth  day  of  the  first  month,  at  nightfall,  guide- 
lamps,  Lu-teng  {£$•  jig,  are  lighted.  These  little  lamps  are  placed 
on  the  brink  of  running  streams,  to  guide  the  souls  of  those  who 
died  in  early  lifetime.       Yen-wang  fff]  ^E,  tlie  God  of  Hades,  has  not 


(1)  It  is  a  matter  of  wonder  that  the  immense  number  of  these  hungry  and  naked 
spirits  can  be  contented  with  such  scant  and  poor  provisions.  Doolittle.  Social  Life  of  the 
Chinese.     Vol.  I.  p.  206. 


—  62  — 

received  them,  so  they  wander  over  the  world,  and  not  knowing 
where  to  go  to,  live  by  rapine  and  plunder.  Thanks  to  these  little 
lamps,  they  can   tind  their  way  and  be  reborn. 

The  fifteenth  of  the  seventh  month  is  commonly  called  "the 
ghosts'  festival",  Kwei-tsieh  %  |p.  Little  lamps,  prepared  with 
rush-pith  wicks  entwined  with  cotton-wool  and  steeped  in  oil,  are 
lighted.  The  rind  of  a  water-melon  serves  as  a  bowl.  These  lamps 
are  set  floating,  and  wafted  by  the  stream  and  the  cool  evening 
breeze,  are  borne  on  canals  and  rivers,  with  a  view  to  helping  the 
souls  of  drowned  persons  to  find  their  way  and  be   reborn. 

The  seventh  month  is  that  of  the  dead,  and  is  entirely  given 
over  to  helping  the  departed  souls.  Buddhist  and  Taoist  priests 
perform  various  expiatory  ceremonies,  and  make  processions  every 
evening  through  towns  and  villages,  preceded  by  cymbals  and 
musical  instruments,  for  the  purpose  of  alleviating  the   condition 


01 


wandering  souls. 


Fig.  25 


0^ 

ft  # 


/ 


w 


^        W- 

^ 


cg^ 


^ 


^4 

^^^ 


— ^TtT^S^ 


^ 


^1 


Or 


(f 


k4\v 


Le  char  funebre  conduit  par  l'esprit  Sco-chen. 
Hearse  accompanied  by-  the  funeral  God. 


—  63  — 

ARTICLE    VI. 

SUPERSTITIOUS    PAPERS    BURNT    AT    FUNERALS. 

Chi-ma     $£  JB|. 

A  large  amount  of  superstitious  papers  is  employed  at  funerals, 
fancying'  thereby  to  benefit  the  dead.  On  these  papers  are  pictures 
of  various  divinities,  or  of  imps  of  the  infernal  regions,  who  may 
render  service  to  the  departed  souls  in  the  nether  world.  It  is  thus 
sought  to  secure  their  good-will  on  behalf  of  those  who  have  depart- 
ed from  this  life.  Herewith  are  a  few  specimens  of  such  papers, 
offered  merely  to  whet  curiosity,  for  if  we  wished  to  be  complete, 
many  more  would   have  to  be  added. 

1°.      Propitiating  the  funeral  god.  Sao-shen  Pu-sah  |^  fl$  H  $§. 

On  the  burial  day  a  paper  is  burnt,  bearing  on  it  the  represen- 
tation of  a  hearse,  and  the  god  who  leads  the  procession,  Sao-shen 
Pu-sah  ^§  #  #  §|. 

It  is  he  who  must  carefully  lead  the  funeral  procession  to  the 
grave.      It  is  therefore  important  to  ingratiate  oneself  with  him. 

Above  the  hearse,  Sang-ch'eh  Jjj|  jjf^  floats  the  evil  star  of  the 
deceased,  under  its  male  (Hsiung  $f|),  and  female  (Tz'e  lftf|)  form  (1). 


(1)  This  star  is  the  Hwun-k'i  i£|  f^  (the  breath  of  the  soul),  a  phantom  or  spectre, 
which  assumes  a  male  and  female  form.  In  apparitions,  the  male  form  is  said  to  have  the 
body  of  a  cock,  while  the  female  has  that  of  a  hen.  See  p.  135,  infra.  Also  illustration  62.  bis. 


—  64  — 

2°.      The  ten  kings  of  Hades.  Ming-fu  Shih-Wang  IE  Jft  -f-  3:  (1). 

After  a  person's  death,  it  is  customary  to  burn  a  superstitious 
paper  Cki-tna  $£  ,6|,  in  honour  of  the  ten  gods  of  Hades,  hence  the 
name  given  to  it.  This  custom  owes  its  origin  to  the  Buddhist 
doctrine  on  the  ten  divisions  of  hell,  over  which  preside  ten  demons, 
the  names  and  functions  of  whom  will  be  given  in  Book  II,  of  this 
work.  A  petition  is  therefore  addressed  to  them,  begging  that  they 
be  merciful  to  the  deceased,  who  is  to  appear  before  their  judgment 
seat. 

On  each  side  of  the  tablet  or  little  print,  burnt  in  their  honour, 
are  found  the  buffalo-headed  Niu-t'eu  i^-  gjf,  and  the  horse-faced 
Ma-mien    §§   [ffl,  assistants  of  the  underworld. 

(1)     %  W  Ming-fu.  The  dark  or  obscure  region,  the  underworld,  Hades. 


Fig.   26 


Ming-fou-che-wang . 
Ming-fu-shih-wang .   Charm  for  propitiating  the  ten  kings  of  Hades. 


Fig.  27 


Long-tche  pou-sah,  le  pourvoyeur  de  vehicules  dans  Fautre  monde^ 
Lung-cheh  Pu-sah.      The  God  of  the  Dragon-chariot  (hearse), 
Undertaker  in  the  nether  morld. 


fl 


—  65  — 

3°.  The  (jo<l  of  the  dra.gon-cha.riol  (hearse).  Lung-ch'eh  Pu-sah 
m*  M  &■  M 

On  this  third  print  is  represented,  according  to  the  means  ot 
conveyance  employed  in  the  locality,  either  a  sedan-chair,  preceded 
and  followed  by  bearers  of  official  insignia,  or  a  cart  drawn  by  horses. 
In  both  cases  the  idea  is  the  same,  the  purpose  being  to  represent 
some  means  of  conveyance  for  the  departed  soul,  whereby  it  may 
travel  over  the  long  road  leading  to  the  lower  regions.  These 
conveyances  are  supplied  by  a  "god  undertaker",  called  Lung-ch'eh 
Pu-sah  ff|  ipl  3&  $||.  Hence  this  superstitious  picture  is  burnt  in 
his  honour,  to  secure  his  good-will  towards  the  soul  which  he  is  to 
lead  to  the  nether  world. 


66  — 


\u.      The  god  of  the  hungry  ghosts.  Ku-h\('uh  Pu-sah  ^ 

The  above  merciful  title  is  generally  given  to  Ti-tscang-\vang 
'life  4&  ~E  (U-  'l  's  ne  who  has  spread  among  the  people  ihe  cere- 
monies intended  to  help  those  abandoned  ghosts  See  his  life  .  By 
burning  this  picture,  on  which  he  is  represented  gathering"  these 
outcasts,  who  have  failed  to  find  the  road  of  rebirth,  he  is  begged 
to  lead  unerringly  and  promptly  the  soul  of  the  deceased  to  its 
destined   place  and  abode. 

Hence,  as  will  be  seen  further  on,  this  god  is  considered  as 
the  undisputed  lord  of  the  "Land  of  Shades".  It  is  therefore  of 
the  utmost  importance  to  secure  his  protection. 

Oftentimes,  this  superstitious  paper  is  called  ''Muh-lien"  §  j^t. 
such   being  the  name  given  to  this  god  as  a   Buddhist  priest. 

Very  frequently  also,  a  superstitious  picture,  Chi-ma  %fc  @|, 
representing  the  kitchen  god.  is  burnt,  for  it  is  he,  it  must  noc  be 
forgotten,  who  inscribes  on  the  forehead  of  the  soul  to  be  judged, 
the  characters  which  will  partly  decide  its  destiny,  according  as  they 
appear  favourable  or  unfavourable. 

After  having  placed  the  coffin  in  the  grave,  it  is  customary  in 
some  places  to  burn  a  superstitious  picture,  Chi-ma  $j£  j^,  in 
honour  of  the  tutelary  god  of  the  mountain,  Shen-shan  f^  [i|  (2), 
who  watches  over  the  burial  ground.  It  is  his  duty  to  keep  watch 
over  the  grave  of  the  departed,  and  prevent  any  such  misfortune  as 
violation  of  the  tomb.  He  is  generally  represented  as  watching 
beside  the  coffin  at  the  entrance  to  the  graveyard.  He  is  thus  the 
warden  of  the  deceased,  and  also  of  the  mound  or  tumulus  raised 
over  the  grave. 


1 1  The  ruler  of  Hades,  and  as  such,  much  ivy.  red  by  the  people.  He  has  under  him 
twelve  myrmidons,  executioners  of  all  horrors  and  pains,  from  which,  however,  if  assid- 
uously worshipped,  he  can  deliver  departed  souls.  Hackmann.  Buddhism  as  a  Religion, 
p.  211. 

(->  In  Southern  China,  the  hill  gods  are  also  worshipped,  as  it  is  believed  they 
protect  the  graves  of  those  who  are  buried  there.  Doolittle.  Social  Life  of  the  Chinese, 
Vol.  [.p. 206. 


Fig.  28 


Kou-hoen  pou-sah,  le  protecteur  des  ames  abandonnees. 
OKu-hwun  Pu-sah.    The  God  protector  of  wandering  ghosts. 


—  67  — 

ARTICLE    VII. 

PURCHASING    nil.    RIGHT    OF    WAY. 

Mai-lu-l*'ien  ^  j&  ££. 

Formerly  Kao-ch'ai  ]9j  %_.  a  follower  of  Confucius,  and  district 
magistrate  of  Ch'eng  h-<it>n  ;^  |£.  damaged  the  crops,  when  bur}'ing 
his  wife.  Shen-sinng  l\)  jjffi,  son  of  Tze-ch.nng  ^  »jjf,  warned  him 
thereof  and  begged  him  to  compensate  for  the  loss.  Kno-ch'ai  "jfrj  ^ 
refused,  stating  that  if  he  purchased  the  right  (if  way  for  the  burial. 
il    would   be  setting  up  a  precedent  detrimental  to  many  others  (1). 

According  to  the  custom  at  present  prevailing,  when  a  coffin  is 
borne  to  the  grave,  a  poison  is  specially  detained  to  march  at  the 
head  of  the  procession,  and  scatter  mock-money  along  the  road. 
This  is  called  "purchasing  the  right  of  way",  and  is  more  or  less 
connected  with  the  historical   incident  attributed  to  Kao-ch'ai  'jfFf  ^. 

In  Japan,  whenever  a  burial  takes  place,  a  tent  is  erected, 
beneath  which  incense  is  burnt  before  the  corpse.  This  is  called 
the  ''orphan  tent".  A  person  is  detained  to  precede  the  procession, 
and  scatter  copper  coins  along  the  road.  This  is  called  "purchasing 
the  right  of  wav".  The  poor  and  beggars  come  and  gather  up 
these  coins.  It  would,  therefore,  seem  that  the  custom  passed  over 
from  Japan  to  China  (2). 

Kao-ch'ai  ^  ^  was  wrong  in  refusing  to  make  good  the 
damage  caused  to  the  crops  on  the  burial  day  of  his  wife.  The 
reason  which  he  adduces  is  not  convincing,  and  the  example  set  by 
him  must  not  be  followed,  for  whosoever  causes  damage  to  another 
must  compensate  him  for  the  loss.  In  line  it  is  not  a  question 
about  purchasing  the  right  of  way.  Such  are  the  just  reflexions  of 
serious  Chinese  writers. 


(•>)     See  Li-ki  ,j|[  |£  or  Book  of  Rites.  Ch.  T'an-kung-hsia  H  ^  "],",   (Yuan  JO  edition 
A.  I).  131-2.  foi.  fiO).  f$0ift^Hiflt74L!lf'HfgEl  H'C 

(2)     Shi-wi   yiuin-hwei    g  $  BYS?     &  &  &  *«.  ft  *E  flfi  ff-    nv  A  ffl  £■  ffe  IW  # 


i  &  b  a  jg  m.  m  ^  ^mm  m~z  &  m.  %  0  #  1.  >i  m 


nw^- 


i.«iiixi.  £  -  a  #  m  tfc  $  m  m  fir.  #  *  w.  $s  &  tt  ^  t  %  #  ±.  &  ft 

IXS  B  #  it  A  *  IB  £. 


—  68  — 

In  regard  to  this  Japanese  custom  of  scattering  pieces  of  copper 
coin  along  the  way,  it  is  hard  to  say  whether  the  real  purpose  is  to 
give  an  alms  to  the  poor,  or  to  disperse  the  crowd  of  vagabonds 
who  obstruct  the  road,  and  may  injure  the  crops  along  the  way, 
exposing  thereby  to  compensate  for  the  damage  caused  by  them. 

Be  that  as  it  may,  it  is  the  custom  nowadavs,  to  scatter  mock- 
money  without  burning  it,  along  the  way  of  the  procession.  This  is 
what  all  are  agreed  to  call:   "purchasing  the  right  of  way". 

Every  public  or  private  property  has  a  road  leading  to  it,  and 
all  may  use  this  way  free  of  cost.  This  is  quite  true,  but  pagan 
Buddhists  believe  that  wandering  and  hungry  ghosts  crowd  round 
on  a  burial  day  to  get  some  alms,  and  if  refused,  it  is  feared  they 
will  obstruct  the  procession. 

\n  former  times,  no  mock-money  was  scattered  along  the  way 
on  burial  days,  and  the  procession  met  with  no  accident  for  all  that. 
Never,  in  fact,  was  it  heard  that  the  procession  halted  in  the  middle 
of  the  journey,  or  had  been  compelled  to  return. 

The  followers  of  Confucius,  to  act,  as  they  say,  in  accordance 
with  the  intention  of  Kao-ch'ni  ~0j  ^fe,  purchase  the  right  of  way 
for  the  funeral  procession.  In  so  doing,  however,  they  deceive 
simple  folks,  and  deceive  also  themselves.  This  custom  is  universal 
throughout  Kiang-nan  jJX.   fll . 


CHAPTER      IV. 

PETITION-TALISMANS  FOR  THE  BENEFIT 
OF  THE  DEAD. 

ARTICLE    I. 

ORDINARY    CASES    OF    DEAD    PERSONS. 

Buddhist  and  principally  Taoist  priests,  Tao-shi  jg  -±,  whose 
imagination  is  fertile  in  inventing  means  of  getting  money,  have 
given  full  scope  to  their  researchful  genius,  especially  in  varying 
the  nostrums  useful  to  the  dead,  and  helpful  for  the  souls  in  the 
nether  world.  The  vulgar  mass  needs  ceremonies,  which  appeal  to 
the  eye,  impress  the  imagination,  and  are  also  well  adapted  to  the 
idiosyncrasy  of  the  Chinese  people,  as  well  as  to  the  manner  of  death 
of  the  deceased.  It  is  to  meet  these  two  requirements,  that  they  have 
imagined  to  address  petitions  to  their  gods,  begging  them  to  show 
mercy  to  the  dead.  To  such  petitions,  they  add  talismans  or  charms, 
which  have,  as  they  consider,  the  power  of  delivering  the  soul  from 
Hades,  and  assuring  it  a  happy  rebirth.  Variety  dispels  all  monotony, 
so  their  petitions  and  talismans  vary  according  to  the  god  invoked, 
or  the  manner  of  death  of  the  person  for  whom  one  intercedes. 

These  petition-talismans  arc  printed  by  shops  known  as  "su- 
perstitious paper  shops"  Chi-ma~tien  $j£  %  j£,  which  sell  all  such 
articles    commonly    used    by    the   people.      When    somebody    is    near 


—  70  — 

dying,  a  person  hastens  to  purchase  one  of  these  petition-papers, 
and  warn  the  king  of  Hades  that  a  soul  is  soon  to  appear  before 
his  judgment  seat.  After  death,  petitions  vary,  according  to  the 
causes  which  have  brought  it  on.  Thus,  there  are  some  for  all 
cases,  others  for  those  who  die  by  hanging  or  drowning,  or  who 
have  committed    suicide,   etc... 

When  Buddhist  or  Taoist  priests,  Tno-shi  jfr  J;,  perform  their 
respective  ceremonies  for  the  benefit  of  the  dead,  these  petition- 
talismans  are  burnt,  in  order  that  they  may  reach  more  expeditiously 
the  god  to  whom   they  are  addressed. 

Burning  is  the  great  means  of  communication  between  the 
present  world  and  that  bevond  the  grave.  We  shall  give  here  a  few 
of  these  papers,  which  are  generally  and  most  commonly  employed 
in  places  throughout  the  province  of  Nrjan-hwei   ^  $fr. 

1".      Lao-hiXn    ^  ;§"  (printed  on  yellow  paper). 
This   pa  pel    reads  as  follows  : 

Talisman  of   the    Honourable   Lao-hiXn,    T'ai-shang  Lao-kini    -fa 
\-     g-    /|  ;|    ,   to   purify  and  saVe  the  souls  of  the  dead. 

This  talisman  has  been  planted  by  I.ao-hi'i.n  jj£  g",  for  the  benefit 
of  all  the  dead.  It  will  help  to  cleanse  their  bodies,  refine  their  vir- 
tues, blot  out  their  faults,  render  them  stainless,  and  utterly  efface 
even  the  last  remnants  of  the  sins  which  they  have  committed  in  a 
previous  existence  (allusion  to  the  doctrine  of  the  metempsychosis). 
Cleansed  from  all  earthly  dross,  they  shall  be  deemed  worthy  to  be 
admitted  into  the  presence  of  Yen-wang  \$)  -f,  (2).  In  witness  where- 
of, we  accomplish  to-day  this  expiatory  ceremony  allusion  is  here 
made  to  the  Taoist  priests,  Tao-nhi  jfr  -|;,  who  must  be  invited  to 
pray  and  burn  the  above  mentioned  petition  .  and  burn  this  talisman, 
in  full  compliance  with  the  orders  received  Irom  Lao  Itc  j$£   -^ . 


U  i  Lao  kirn  ^  ^  <>v  Lao-tze  ^  ^f-,  the  old  or  venerable  philosopher.  Born  B.C.  604; 
time  and  place  of  death  unknown.  He  founded  the  Taoist  system  of  philosophy  and  mysti- 
cism, improved  upon  by  his  disciples.  In  A  1  >.  fi(J(i,  the  emperor  Kao-tsung  ^j  ■£  of  the 
T'ang  jjf  dynasty  bestowed  on  him  the  title  pk  I .  ^£  TG  H  il?.  the  Great  Supreme,  the 
Emperor  of  the  Dark  First  Cause.  Again  in  A.J).  1013,  the  title  j\  _h  3L  Ha  was  added 
by  Imperial  command.  Mayers.  Chinese  Reader's  Manual.  Lao-tze  ^  ^f. 

(2)     The  ruler  of  Ha'des. 


•^•K^^^SSH'^ 


^4- 


>' 


-J   -Q 

-     £ 


2    ^ 
£    g 


&  ^  ^       T  ■     « 


01 


O:  * 

e  s 

3  f 


£      "^  ^N  "*?  rvrs  "it\  '\^  "a  - 

^M$®H^  If 


l\\  —    ta^ 


—  71  — 

Such  a  year,...   month,...   and  day,... 

This   petition-talisman   is  employed   by  Taoiot  priests. 

2°.  Petition-talisman  in  honour  of  Amitabha  (O-mi-t'o-fuh  |S|iT 
M  P6   W  ;""/  the  inll'r  °f  Hades  (Ti-ls'ang-wang  -jfc  fa  £). 

We,  your  faithful  followers,  N...  (names  inserted  here),  in  this 
month  (name  of  month),  with  all  the  members  of  our  household,  the 
pious  son,  his  relatives  and  kinsfolk,  prostrate  before  Amitabha,  0- 
mi-t'o-fuh  |5pT  fl$j  |?g  ^  P,  the  ruler  of  Hades,  Ti-ts'ang-wang  ffo  $$ 
3E,  and  the  ten  gods  of  the  infernal  regions,  do  hereby  implore  your 
great  mercifulness.  We  even  venture  to  draw  up  a  written  engage- 
ment with  you.  and  as  contracting  parties,  we  offer  up  our  prayers 
for  so  and  so,  X...  (name  inserted  here),  aged...  (here  his  age),  and 
born  in  such  a  year...  and  month...  and  at  such  a  day...  and 
hour...,   whose  soul  has  returned  to  the  realm  of  the  Immortals. 

How  rapid  is  the  flight  of  years!  In  truth,  life  lasts  but  a 
moment  !  We  remind  you  amidst  tears  of  the  arrival  of  this  beloved 
being,  whom  death  has  ravished  from  our  gaze.  Deliver  him,  we 
humbly  beseech  you,  from  the  land  of  suffering,  and  graciously 
grant  him  to  be  reborn  in  a  state  filled   with  happiness  and  joy. 

At  present,  in  such  a  month...  and  on  srtch  a  day...  we 
accomplish  this  ceremony  for  his  benefit,  to  open  up  for  him  the 
road  leading  to  a  new  rebirth,  amidst  prosperity  and  glory.  Thanks 
to  your  unbounded  mercifulness,  great  Amitabha,  O-mi-t'o-fuh  ppT 
ffl  P6  rfr"  and  thou  ruler  ol  Hades,  Ti-ts'ang-wang  jfo  ^  3E,  we 
hope  that  his  soul  will  be  admitted  into  the  abode  of  peace  and 
happiness;  we  reckon  also  that  this  ceremony,  performed  for  his 
benefit,  will  deserve  for  him  the  happiness  of  being  reborn  into  the 
body  of  a  man.  Once  more.  O-mi-t'o-fuh  |JpT  ~jffi  |?£  $,  Jii-lai-fuh 
jlP  ?fc  >$  (2)  and  Tz'e-kwang-fuh  *&  jt  jfo  (3),  we  humbly  beg  you 
to  save  his  soul. 


(lj  Amitabha  (boundless  light).  The  celestial  prototype  corresponding  to  the  historical 
Guatama.  Also  the  sovereign  lord  of  the  Western  heavens,  and  hence  highly  popular 
among  the  Chinese.     Hackmann.  Buddhism  as  a  Religion,  p.  159. 

(2)  A  translation  of  the  "Sancrit  Tata-gata"  or  the  "Thus  come  Buddha".  One 
whose  comfng  and  going  accords  witb  thai  of  his  predecessor.  The  highesl  appellation 
given  to  every  Buddha.     Giles.  Chinese-English  "Dictionary.  Jii-lai  jl\\  5^- 

(3)  The  mercifully  enlightening  Buddha. 


—  72  — 

"When  the  lotus-flower  opens,  the  fruit  is  already  in  formation 
(man  being  reborn  partakes  already  of  the  nature  of  Buddha)  ;  but 
when  the  flower  fall's.,  the  fruit  is  quite  formed"'  (thus  does  death 
achieve  the  work  of  Nirvana,  and  thanks  to  such  a  state,  man 
becomes  a  perfect  Buddha1.  We  respectfully  offer  to  you  this  petition 
for  the  benefit  of  such  a  soul,  and  in  order  that  it  may  reach  you, 
we  burn   it.      Done  in  such  a  year...,   month...,  and  dav... 

This  petition  is  drawn  up  on  yellow  paper,  and  is  exclusively 
reserved  to  Buddhist  priests. 


Fig.  31 


bis 


/1WP 


gH>5-|gg|\ 


^mm. 


mmm^ 


4& 


■ir  & 


ffitt-  »« 


4  ^mfo^tA* 


C 


Passe-port  pour  l'autre  vie.   Brule  en  Thonneur  de  Ti-ts'ang   Wang. 

Passport  to  the  nether  world.    Written  charm  burnt  in  honour  of 

Ti-ts'ang    Wang,  ruler  of  Hades. 


—  73  — 


Second  petition  couched  in  similar  style. 


10 


oo 


Petition-talisman  begging  a  happy  rebirth. 

Taoist  priests,  Tao-shi  jjf  J^.  burn  this  petition  in  order  that 
the  deceased  may  be  reborn  into  the  body  of  a  man,  or  at  least  into 
the  body  of  a  genial  animal.  It  is  printed  on  yellow  paper,  and 
addressed  to  Lao-kiln  j£  jg . 


M  4  f,  *\  H'*£ 


ipfri 


«•$* 


&> 


0) 

en 

03 

C 

CC 

> 

c 
_c 

'-t-> 

CC 

c 
u 

CC 

u 

c 

■  — 

S-. 

c 


c 
o 

U 

o 

a 

cu 
_C" 

P- 


a, 


5~ 


So 

•<o 


Md4#^s#^F^^"%-" 


♦#P^; 


v-> 


Passe-debout  pour  la  douane  sur  la  route  des  enfers. 
Permit  exempting  from  tolls  on  the  way  to  the  Infernal  regions. 


75 


4°.      Permit  (for  Irnnxit)  delivered  to  the  departed  *oid 

Buddhist  priests  print  on  yellow  paper,  bearing  the  Imperial 
colours,  a  permit  (for  transit),  which  they  deliver  to  a  departed  soul, 
and  through  means  of  which  it  can  pass  without  any  difficulty  the 
barrier  found  on  the  way  leading  to  the  infernal  regions.  It  is  an 
order  given  to  the  barrier-keepers  not  to  hinder  in  anywise  the 
passage  of  such  a  soul.  Taoist  priests,  Tuo-slii  jiff  ^,  may  also 
grant  a  similar  official  permit.      These  people  shrink  from  nothing. 


\A/WVWWV  \f\-  Vi/V»/VW« 


76 


5°.      Passport  granted  to  tho  soul.  Lu-yin  0  *-j|. 

This  is  a  certificate  delivered  by  competent  authority,  and  secur- 
ing full  freedom  of  passage  to  the  soul  along"  the  road  leading"  to  the 
world  beyond.  The  deceased,  thanks  to  this  badge,  passes  the 
barriers  free  of  toll,  and  is  assured  of  protection  throughout  the 
way.  On  the  document  are  the  bearer's  name,  as  also  the  year, 
month  and  day,  on  which  it  has  been  delivered.  This  passport  is 
on  vellow  paper  and  is  burnt  at  the  burial  service. 


Lou-yng  tan-tse.     Passe-port  de  Fame. 
Lu-yin  tan-tze.   Passport  delivered  to  the  departed  soul. 


CO 


tc 


Ifl 

0) 


1  I'M       ■*• 


b 

u 
<a 


»1    . 

0 

F— * 

c 
p.' 

g  i 

■i 

c 


<'< 


rs 


77  — 


n  Vi 


6°.      Opening  the  ceremony  of  the  Lemuria  (1).  K'ai-t'an 

This  petition  is  burnt  for  the  benefit  of  wandering  and  vaga- 
bond souls,  who  have  been  unable  to  find  the  road  to  rebirth  in  the 
womb  of  a  mother.  All  good  spirits,  as  well  as  the  soul  of  the 
deceased,  whose  name  is  on  the  print,  are  begged  to  protect  them 
from  malevolent  demons.  This  charm  is  placed  on  the  platform 
erected  for  Buddhist  and  Taoist  priests,  Tao-shi  jj£  ■]-,  and  burnt  at 
the  opening  of  the  expiatory  ceremony   for  the  benefit  of  the  dead. 


(1)  Originally  Remuria,  but  corrupted  to  Lemuria.  A  festival  instituted  by  Romulus 
to  appease  the  manes  of  his  brother  Remus.  The  ancient  Greeks  and  Romans  supposed 
that  the  souls  of  the  dead  wandered  all  over  the  world  and  disturbed  the  peace  of  its 
inhabitants.  Among  them  were  good  spirits,  called  Lares  familiares  (ancestors),  and  evil 
ones,  known  by  the  name  of  Larvae  or  Lemures.  To  appease  those  latter,  the  Lemuria 
were  celebrated,  and  lasted  three  days  and  three  nights.  On  this  occasion,  it  was  usual 
for  the  people  to  burn  black  beans,  as  the  smell  was  supposed  to  be  insupportable  to  the 
evil  spirits.  They  also  muttered  magical  words,  and  by  beating  kettles  and  drums, 
believed  the  ghosts  would  depart  and  no  longer  molest  the  living  (See  Lempriere's 
Glassicul  Dictionary.     Lemuria). 


7S 


7°.      Opening  the  portals   of   the    Buddhist   paradise.    K'ai-t'ien 


This  charm,  endowed,  it  is  believed,  with  marvellous  cflicacity, 
is  considered  as  the  key  of  heaven,  and  infallibly  procures  happiness 
to  the  soul  for  whose  benefit  it  is  burnt.  It  rescues  from  the 
infernal  regions  the  soul  to  whom  it  is  remitted,  and  opens  wide 
for  it  the  portals  of  the  Buddhist  paradise.  This  warrant  from 
Above  is  printed  on  yellow  paper,  carefully  dated,  and  bears  the 
name  of  the  departed  soul. 


V«H^>v<^^- 


be 


A^J^igL^S 


.C/0 

c 

%    -2 

3    Si 

CO      "*- 

J     o 


< 


^  ^ft^S^^^ 


■s.  ■/. 

■-  : 

-.  V 

I  \ 

U  - 


CO 


> 


c  : 
c 

£ 

0) 


to 

0 


t.j 


S^^^v^ip^ 


-  79  — 


8°.      Informing  the  ruler  of  Hades  (1). 

This  is  a  proclamation,  written  by  the  Abbot  of  a  Buddhist 
monastery,  in  Kiang-su  fx.  f||,  and  pretending  to  inform  the  god  of 
Hades,  Ti-ls'ang-wang  J{{i  ^  }£,  that  such  a  person,  recently 
deceased,  has  been  a  faithful  follower  of  Buddha,  and  as  such, 
deserves  to  be  mercifully  treated  in  the  nether  world. 

The  document,  duly  prepared,  is  on  yellow  paper.  To  obtain 
it,  one  may  apply  to  the  Superior  of  a  monastery,  who  signs  it,  and 
indicates  the  name  of  his  monastery,  the  year,  month  and  day, 
when  it  has  been  issued  for  the  benefit  of  such  a  departed  soul. 


(1)  In  Southern  China,  a  ceremony  for  informing  the  ten  rulers  of  Hades,  of  the 
death  of  a  person,  takes  place  on  the  sixth  day.  Taoist  priests  officiate.  Doolittle.  Social 
Life  of  the  Chinese.  Vol.  I.  p.  182. 


—  80  — 


9°.      Temporary  seat  of  the  soul. 

At  a  funeral,  this  paper  is  suspended  from  a  reed  or  bamboo, 
and  the  soul  of  the  departed  is  requested  to  come  and  establish  his 
seat  therein,  in  order  to  receive  the  offering's  of  clothing-  and  mock- 
monev  remitted  for  his  benefit  to  the  lower  world. 


Fig.  38 


Siege  transitoire  de  Tame. 
Temporary  seat  of  the  (departed)  soul. 


Fig.  39 


La  bourse  de  Tame. 
Wrapper  containing  the  soul. 


—  81 


10°.      The  enoelope  of  the  soul. 

This  is  a  tablet  or  envelope,  folded  in  rectangular  shape.  It 
resembles  much  one  of  those  large  envelopes  employed  for  sending 
official  letters  in  China,  and  is,  in  tine,  a  kind  of  paper  wrapper 
designed  to  receive  the  soul.  It  is  fixed  upright  on  the  little  table, 
behind  the  coffin,  and  beside  the  rice  placed  at  the  rear  of  the 
deceased's  head,   Tao-t'eu-fan  j$\  jjjj"  D£  (1). 

This  is  the  first  seat  of  the  soul,  or  temporary  one,  awaiting 
the  time  when  the  tablet  will   be  permanently  set  up. 

ft  is  only  the  rightful  heir  of  the  deceased  who  may  hold  this 
important  paper.  1  have  seen  cases  in  which  plaintiffs  have  taken 
it  to  officials,  as  a  proof  of  their  legitimate  claims.  The  annexed 
illustration  is  a  fac-simile  of  one  of  these  envelopes,  which  has  been 
presented  to  the  Han-shun  hsien  ^  |Jj  §£  magistrate  by  the 
prosecuting  party,  to  prove  their  right  to  the  inheritance  of  the 
deceased.  It  was  considered  as  a  piece  of  evidence  in  the  lawsuit, 
which  took  place  over  the  dividing  of  the  property. 

(1)     See  above,  p.  50.  Objects  placed  beside  the  coffin. 


11 


—  82 


11".      [turning  mock-clothing  for  the  benefit  of  the  dead. 

In  shops  dealing  in  superstitious  objects,  sheets  of  yellow  paper 
are  found,  upon  which  are  printed  the  likeness  of  coats  and  boots, 
as  generally  worn   by  the  living. 

To  these  sheets  are  usually  added  some  sentences  or  petitions, 
designed  to  afford  relief  to  the  soul,  for  whose  benefit  this  mortuary 
outfit  will  be  burnt.  At  the  approach  of  winter,  every  filial  son 
must  prepare  such  an  outfit  for  his  deceased  father  or  mother. 
When  he  has  provided  all  the  mock-clothing,  intended  to  be  conveyed 
to  the  dead,  he  proceeds  to  their  grave,  and  burns  thereon  the  entire 
outfit  for  their  benefit,  in  order  that  they  may    not   suffer   too    much 

J  J 

from  the  cold  in  the  nether  world  (P. 


(1)     This  ceremony  takes  place  on  the  first  of  the  tenth  month  (See  ;<  1  >■  > \  e,  p.  61 


?  v*#i{? 


H 


*>:• 


♦2SS8» 


o 


0) 


o     c 
a. 


J-i      

a.    s 

V)      -S 


«      -2 


E 


o 


i 


Fig.  41 


Coftre-fort  en  papier. 
Fire-proof  safe  burnt  and  forwarded  to  the  dead. 


Fig.  41 


Coffre-fort  en  papier. 
Fire-proof  safe  burnt  and  forwarded  to  the  dead. 


88  — 


12".     Sending  a  paper-safe  to  Ihe  dead. 

Property  does  not  seem  to  be  any  better  protected  by  the 
majesty  of  the  law  in  the  nether  world  than  in  the  present  one,  so 
it  can  hardly  be  called  "the  better  world".  In  this  realm  of  briberv 
and  knavery,  a  good  safe  is  indispensible,  in  order  to  secure  protec- 
tion from  burglars.  Thus,  the  custom  arose  of  sending  a  paper-safe, 
which  being  burnt,  was  conveyed  to  the  departed  soul.  He  would 
use  it,  to  store  safely  therein  his  treasures  of  gold  and  silver.  It  is 
a  gleam  of  civilisation,  penetrating  among  those  "gentlemen  of  the 
lower  regions''.  Formerly,  people  were  contented  with  sending 
them  the  objects  used  during  a  previous  existence  :  houses,  horses, 
servants,  a  complete  outfit  of  clothes,  paper  trunks  and  articles  of 
furniture  ;  but  since  modern  industry  has  turned  out  fire-proof  safes, 
equipped  with  safety  locks,  these  valuable  inventions  are  now  for- 
warded them,  and  this  fills  up  the  cup  of  their  happiness,  by  securing 
them  the  perpetual  enjoyment  of  their  treasures.  Truly,  Buddhism 
is  a  religion  of  progress! 


—  M  — 

ARTICLE    II. 

PETITION-TALISMANS  RESCUING  EROM  THE 

"BLOODY  POND"  (1  ). 

The  bloody  pond,  Hsueh-hu  jfQ.  $Jj,  also  called  the  "pool  of  the 
bloody  pail",  is  an  immense  expanse  filled  with  blood  and  mire, 
into  which  are  plunged  those  unfortunate  mothers  who  die  in 
childbirth,  and  what  is  still  more  distressing,  according  to  the 
teaching  of  modern  Buddhism,  every  woman  who  has  given  birth 
to  a  child,  is  rendered  thereby  unclean,  and  must  remain  plunged  in 
the  "bloody  pond",  until  rescued  therefrom.  Now,  to  sectire  this 
desired  result,  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  invite  Buddhist  priests 
to  pray  for  them.      Such  is  the  theory  (2). 

This  ceremony  is  very  expensive,  and  brings  in  a  large  annual 
income  to  all  these  impostors.  1  had  been  lucky  enough  to  secure 
two  papers  commonly  used  in  such  ceremonies. 

The  first  is  a  petition-talisman,  which  differs  but  little  from 
the  generalit}*  of  these  classics,  invented  to  relieve  similar  ills  of 
suffering  humanity.  It  is  burnt  during  the  expiatory  ceremony, 
performed  either  by  Buddhist  or  Taoist  priests,  Tao-xhi  ^  i-  It 
is  printed  on  yellow  paper,  and  bears  the  name  of  the  victim,  as 
also  the  year,  day  and  hour,  in  which  the  ceremony  took  place. 

The  other  is  a  much  more  important  document,  as  it  grants  to 
the  Buddhist  priests  a  special  warrant  or  diploma,  conferred  on 
them  by  Buddha  himself,  whereby  they  are  officially  patented  and 
granted  the  perpetual  and  exclusive  right  of  performing  this  melan- 
choly function.  Considering  the  importance  and  difficulty  of  secur- 
ing this  paper,   we  give  it  here  translated  in  full. 

The  precious  formula  of  the  "bloody  pail"  composed  by  Buddha, 
and  conserved  in  the  great  Buddhist  repository    "Ta.-tnRng-king"    A" 


(1)  This  ceremony  is  also  practised  in  Southern  China,  its  object  being  to  save  the 
spirit  of  a  deceased  mother  from  this  pretended  punishment.  Doolittle.  Social  Life  of 
the  Chinese.  Vol.  I.  p.  196. 

(2)  See  Chap.  V.  Article  XI  infra. 


Fig.  42 


9o 

$ 

-m 

«L 

« 

m 

* 

« 

m 

&  % 

SL 

n 

a 

& 

*} 

A 

* 

>% 

.*£ 

* 


>v  m  itL   a    m  4.   ^ 

A   A.  A  -R  *.  /$   ^ 
JJ/,   jSa.  ^    ^    ^     <f    ^ 

I     IS    t  f  *#    $ 

at    *£'   A.    ^  ijk  S    n 

i%    %      8      £  1!  3$     -1L 

*-  ,*iit  £t  <J*  ^  >t 

#  «  ♦  it  •«■  *  * 

4-  "^  ^  ii  ^  4:  /t 

ft  -r  .a  ^  A  -a.  ;^ 

>?f  #  *L  #  *  4r  It 
#  4-  -«-  4  4  *  4- 
*£  ^  «8  JL  -=.    «*    4 

^  a  -|  a  f  i  4- 
-£  -**  *t  ^r  4.  &  ^ 

-$-    #_  M  %    %    ^JC 
#L  -ff    t    Pf  it  * 

*  ^  -s-  #  #:  ^ 

A   £g  it  ■=■   ^r  t£ 

*  £  4L  *?  M   $. 

1*   4J-  &  4/5  #   & 
it   tfi  3L  **  &■  ^ 

4£    ^  |  ia  1  ^> 

*  m  a.  ;&•  4-  *#- 

I     &    4-   4h  #:   *- 

&  *  «;  #  -e  * 

^   «t    -t     #     A      f 

&  £  -ML  1$  4&  *1 

i"  it.  -fi  «t  J^  T 

#  *|  ^  &  jfc  ^ 
^  &  A  —  ^  ^ 

m  #  #  ^&  iR  «. 


* 

^ 

®L 

Vh 

.ft 

ff 

M 

*$ 

■*■ 

^v 

'tk 

0 

* 

"1 

it* 

it 

1? 

^L  ^ 

—r 

& 

* 

•* 

% 

fr 

s 

C 

0 

* 

>^ 

»l) 

Q 

■* 

^ 

U 

& 

A. 

* 

» 

21 

* 

^ 

*t 

m 

£ 

"L 

>^ 

*H 

#  5C 

>^ 

it 

a$ 

^A 

tf 

fl 

$:#:  > 

€ 

JL 

i 

^ 

JL 

^#  il 

— 

^  #.  «. 

M 

5 

#■ 

■ft 

* 

% 

*■ 

* 

•& 

f  ^ 

^*« 

*& 

jL 

a4  *L  #X 

A 

^ 

^ 

M 

^L 

^ 

w£ 

w 

*   it 

i& 

M, 

0 

JL 

«D 

^ 

t 

t 

t 

Hb 

« 

•1 

& 

A. 

#X  IP 

*J 

JL 

A 

4K 

^2. 

T 

^  * 

t 

^ 

A.  & 

ir 

'$1  >^ 

i 

— 

^5 

Mi 

— 

-ff 

M  ^~ 

B 

-2- 

M.  *A 

j~  . 

+ 

#  X  &  4f 

# 

A 

ft 

* 

>^ 

*-**-& 

« 

^^; 

%d 

->j. 
^ 

*  f ♦ 


JSDL 


A  SL 


Fac-simile  de  la  precieuse  priere,  dite  du  lac  sanglant. 
Facsimile  of  the  precious  charm  delivering  from  the  "bloody  pond". 


—  85  — 

"Muh-lien  g  jig",  having  travelled  to  Chui-yang  lisien  jg  |(§ 
%.  in  Yu  Chow  ffl  j'\],  saw  a  hell  called  the  "pool  of  the  bloody 
pail"  (so  called  from  its  resembling  a  lake),  and  of  such  extent  that 
it  required  eight  hundred  and  forty  thousand  days  to  cross  over  it. 
Therein  are  found  one  hundred  and  twenty  kinds  of  torture:  iron 
beams,  iron  pillars,  iron  collars  and  chains.  [n  the  southern  part 
of  this  pond  are  plunged  a  countless  number  of  women,  their  hair 
dishevelled  and  their  hands  bound  with  shackles.  The  ruler  of 
Hades  compels  them  thrice  a  day  to  drink  blood,  and  should  thev 
refuse,  he  threshes  them  soundly  with  iron  rods.  Muh-lien  g  jj$. 
touched  with  compassion,  on  hearing  them  groan  beneath  the  lashes, 
said  to  the  ruler  of  Hades  :  '-Why  don't  their  husbands  come 
here"? — ''This  punishment,  replied  Yen-wang  fUj  3^,  is  not  for 
their  husbands.  They  are  here,  because  in  giving  birth  to  children, 
they  have  discharged  polluted  blood,  which  offends  the  Spirits  of  the 
Earth.  Moreover,  they  have  washed  their  blood-stained  clothes  in 
rivers  and  streams,  whence  men  and  women  draw  this  contaminated 
water,  and  make  therewith  tea,  which  they  afterwards  offer  to  the 
gods.  Offended  by  such  irreverence,  these  latter  despatch  a  celestial 
warrior,  who  writes  the  names  of  the  guilty  in  the  book  of  good 
and  evil,  then  after  death,  they  have  to  undergo  this  punishment  . 
—  Muh-lien  @  j^,  overwhelmed  with  sadness,  asked  the  ruler  of 
Hades,  how,  in  order  to  requite  the  benefit  of  existence,  he  could 
deliver  his  mother  from  the  "bloody  pond".  The  ruler  replied:  "by 
honouring  one's  parents,  worshipping  the  Buddhist  Trinity  (1). 
above  all  by  inviting  the  Buddhist  priests  to  perform  the  ceremony 
of  rescue,  during  which  they  must  recite  the  (annexed)  prayer.  Then 
in  the  midst  of  the  "bloody  pond"  variegated  lotus  flowers  will 
appear,  a  skiff  despatched  from  the  flotilla  of  anguish  will  meet  her, 
and  bear  her  to  the  banks  of  the  Nai-ho  ^  jp[  (2).  where  she  can 
be    reborn    in   a    blissful    land".      Kwun-yin  |||  ^   (3),   by    order    of 

(1)  That  is  "Buddha,  the  Law  (Dha'rma)  and  the  Church  (Sanga)".  Also  called  the 
three  "Precious  Ones".     Eitel.   Handbook  of  Chinese  Buddhism. 

(2)  The  Buddhist  river  Styx,  so  called,  because  the  soul  cannot  help  crossing  it. 
Sixty  days  after  death,  paper  boats  are  burnt  to  help  the  soul  to  cross  over  it.  Failing 
this  device,  the  soul  may  be  drowned.  Williams.  Dictionary  of  the  Chinese  Language.  ^  JSJ, 

(3)  The  Goddess  of  Mercy. 


—  83  — 

Buddha,  enjoined  on  Muh-lien  g  j^L  lo  exhort  the  faithful  to  write 
out  this  formula  and  distribute  it  to  women,  in  order  that  by  recit- 
ing it,  they  mav  escape  falling  into  the  "bloody-pond"  at  their 
death,  be  reborn  in  a  land  of  joy  and  happiness,  possess  all  the 
favours  of  fortune  and  glory,  through  the  protection  of  the  eight 
guardians  of  the  heavenly  dragon.  Muh-lien  g  ^  thanked  effus- 
ively, offered  sacrifice  to  Kwan-yin  j||   ^,  and  withdrew"   (1). 

Follows  the  Sanscrit  text  of  the  above  prayer,  transliterated  by 
means  of  Chinese  character  writing. 

This  prayer  is  burnt  by  the  Buddhist  priests,  during  the  cere- 
mony which  they  perform,  for  the  purpose  of  rescuing  from  the 
"'bloody  pond"  all  women  who  have  given  birth  to  children,  and  not 
merely  those  who  have  died  in  childbirth.  Thus,  Muh-lien's  g  j|t 
mother  did  not  die  in  giving  him  birth,  and  nevertheless,  according 
to    this  paper,  she  was  detained  in  the  "bloody  pond". 

This  ceremonv  is  based  on  an  absolutely  false  and  unnatural 
principle,  which  sets  down  as  a  sin  deserving  hell  the  propagation 
of  the  human  race  through   legitimate  means. 

This  hell  is  called  the  pool  of  the  "bloody  pail".  An  allusion 
is  here  made  to  a  Chinese  vessel  employed  at  parturition.  This 
vessel  or  pail  is  called  "p'en"  ^,  and  it  is  this  same  character 
(term),  which  enters  into  the  composition  of  the  expression  Hsueh- 
p'en-ch'i  jfn  ^  ']■&•  or  "pond  of  the  bloody  pail".  It  is  well  known 
that  the  Buddhist  priest  Muh-lien  g  j£|,  mentioned  here,  is  none 
other  than  the  famous  Ti-ts'ang-wang  j;-j{j  ^  3E?  deified  by  Budd- 
hists, and  worshipped  at  Kiu-hwa-shan  \  lj|  jjj ,  in  the  province 
of  Ngan-hwei  ^  ^.  He  was  one  of  the  most  cunning  men,  and 
the  original  propagator,  if  not  the  inventor  of  this  horrifying  doc- 
trine, which  inspires  such  fear  into  pagan  women,  and  fills  the 
coffers  of  Buddhist  priests  (2). 

This  legend  of  the  bonze  Muh-lien  g  jifi,  rescuing  his  mother 
from    hell,    is,    as    may    be    understood,    a    repetition    of    the    story 


(1)  See  Notice  on  Ti-ts'ang  Wang  Jft  0.  J,  the  ruler  of  Hades,  Book  III. 

(2)  See  Life  of  Ti-ts'ang-wang  ife  M  3E-     Book  II. 


Wfc*  $&3^tta£&r 


-o 
u 

3     .3 


Ol 


O 

3 
e 


S    g 


o 
2 


N^*  rr"! 


^^^^^^^^^^$41  i 


3 


£ 


\J*® 


¥? 


—  87  — 

attributed  to  Maudgalyayana  (1),  the  cherished  pupil  of  Buddha,  and 
who  delivered  his  mother  from  hell. 

The  Taoist  priestesses,  Tao  Nai-nui  jjf|  ^  ty*j.  witches  inhabit- 
ing Hal  Chow  i%  j'[\,  have  availed  themselves  of  the  popular  belief 
in  the  "bloody  pond'1  Hsueh-hu-ch'i  jfn.  ^  fljj.  At  the  foot  of 
Pagoda  Hill,  T'ah-shan  j$  fjj ,  in  the  district  of  Shuh-yang-hsien 
tfc  Wi  if"  may  be  seen  a  muddy  swamp,  and  this,  according  to 
these  witches,  is  the  "bloody-pond",  into  which  are  plunged  women 
who  have  died  in  childbirth,  and  even  others  who  have  simply 
brought  forth  children.  The  problem,  therefore,  is  to  release  them 
from  the  filthy  pool  in  which  their  souls  are  immersed. 

A  difficult  task  indeed,  according  to  the  witches,  and  in  order 
to  succeed,  they  must  assemble  in  large  numbers.  Families  inter- 
ested in  the  success  of  the  undertaking  invite,  therefore,  all  the 
witches  of  the  neighbourhood,  offer  them  a  hearty  meal  and  then 
conduct  them  to  the  brink  of  the  Pagoda  Hill  pond,  T'ah-shan  J*f 
[1| .  Having"  reached  the  pond,  they  set  up  howling  and  beating  on 
pieces  of  wood,  after  which  the  relatives  of  the  deceased  stir  up  the 
mud  with  sticks,  search  in  the  pond,  and  pretend  to  release  there- 
from the  soul  of  the  unfortunate  woman.  When  the  comedy  is  over. 
all  return  home,  and  make  a  handsome  offering  to  the  old  witches, 
Tao-nai-nai  ^  ^fj  ffl,  to  thank  them  for  their  good  work  and  their 
excellent  howling.  The  people  of  the  locality  call  the  ceremony  an 
assembling,  Tso-hwui  fjjft  ^. 

(1)  One  of  the  disciples  of  Sakyamuni,  especially  noted  for  his  magic  powers,  through 
which  he  transported  an  artist  to  Tuchita,  to  get  a  view  of  Buddha,  and  make  a  statue  of 
him.  He  also  went  to  hell  and  released  his  mother.  Eitel.  Handhook  of  Chinese  Huddhism. 


—  88 


ARTICLE    III. 
PETITION-TALISMANS    FOR    SPECIAL    CASES. 

1°.  For  the  benefit  of  a  person  who  has  commuted  suicide 
(printed  on  yellow  paper). 

According  to  the  Buddhist  doctrine,  as  exposed  in  the  treatise 
on  the  Infernal  regions,  Yuh-lih-ch'ao-chw'an  3i  M.  $t  1W-'  a^ 
those  who  have  committed  suicide  without  sufficient  reason,  are 
confined  after  their  death  in  a  special  place  called  the  '"city  of 
suicide  victims",  Wang-sze-ch'eng  ^:fj  3*E  J$.  Buddhist  priests 
have  invented  a  charm,  which,  according  to  them,  has  the  power  of 
releasing  from  this  dismal  abode  the  soul  of  the  person  who  has 
committed  suicide,  and  conferring  upon  him  the  favour  of  a  new 
rebirth. 

The  fatal  cord  that  has  caused  his  death  is  solemnly  execrated. 


MHK4>¥$$ff4jNit 


■WW- 


^ 

^ 


^A| 


* 


«< 


4i?^^' 


.& 


4 


W«ilWpO«^-\<  tJ^^^r 


D 
C 

<u 

c 

£ 

'03 


P 
O 

a. 

<U 
CO 


"© 

©> 


s 

© 

CO 


"■© 
© 


©> 


—      V 

£    g 

c     § 


$^4-  $  3£$£  S&Nfcfc 


•m 


i^       ccj:         bt^b^oV2- 


3- 

I* 

•J 

I 

•  S3 

C0|3 

«L 

en  2 

r, 

% 

3 

£ 

•r;3 

S 

a*- 

.2? 


§5 

i. 

3 
C 

•J 


^J^fca^H* 


< 


W  sg^fc^X^  J$N&  *<# 


—  89  — 


2°.  For  the  benefit  of  a  person  assassinated  (printed  on  yellow 
paper). 

It  is  stated  in  the  treatise  on  the  Infernal  regions,  Yuh-lih- 
ch'ao-chw'an  3£  jg  £j}  fi^,  that  the  soul  of  a  person  unjustly  put 
to  death,  or  who  died  as  a  result  of  wounds  received,  enjoys  freedom, 
and  pursues  the  assassin  in  order  to  he  avenged  on  him.  The 
victim  is  not  satisfied  until  he  has  delivered  him  over  to  the  infernal 
judges,  and  feasted  his  eyes  on  the  spectacle  of  his  torture.  It  is 
only  then  that  he  can  he  reborn  in  the  womb  of  a  mother. 

The  annexed  charm  or  talisman  is  designed  to  hasten  the  day 
of  this  happy  rebirth.  The  dagger  or  sword  which  slew  the  victim 
is  solemnly  execrated,  and  the  Avish  expressed  that  they  be  broken 
to  pieces. 


12 


—  90  — 


3".  For  a  person  harassed  by  evil  spirits  (printed  on  yellow 
paper]. 

This  charm  has  the  power  of  hastening'  the  rebirth  of  those 
unfortunate  souls  that  are  harassed  by  evil  spirits.  Buddhism  teaches 
that  maleficent  demons  roam  over  the  world  seeking  vengeance  on 
mortals,  and  that  they  frequently  kill  persons  who  do  not  protect 
themselves  from  their  attacks.  Chinese  doctors  find  here  a  means 
of  evading  responsibility  when  their  prescriptions  fail.  They  then 
vend  at  an  exorbitant  price  certain  magical  nostrums  designed  to 
break  the  spell  which  threatens  life.  Experience  has  taught  them 
"to  make  hay  while  the  sun  shines".  Buddhist  and  Taoist  priests, 
Tao-shi  jff  ^,  lose  no  time  in  imitating  them,  and  if  death  ensues, 
they  burn  this  petition  in  order  to  rescue  the  victim's  soul. 


K*S^4£-^*JSH<£ 


m 


hW^^^^i^^  P^^o^^Sp 


t,  « 


-«0j 

o 

*H 

O 

en 

C 
a> 

-4-> 

o 

s 

c 

^3 

*3 

JX 
<L> 

a- 
<u 

T3 
<0 


Ih 

3 
O 

a 

a 

3 

"5. 
o- 

3 
03 


a- 

CO 


g 

S 

o 

CO 


g 

-O 


c 


W<Hfc'£$$$&$*ttfc 


, 


«5f 


in 

-J 

li 

'j 
">  * 

-2   * 


a 

.5"  '•: 

a  j 

c/3  -: 


«&*W 


^ 


HkSt&fa^ 


WS^fM-tf  O^*^ 


—  91  — 


'i°.      For  the  victim  of  an  unjust  lawsuit. 

The  Chinaman  is  a  born  wrangler.  Persons  are  occasionally 
met  with  whose  death  has  resulted  from  the  strain,  worry  and 
endless  vexations  caused  by  court  underlings,  who  protract  the 
pleadings,  and  beneath  a  show  of  justice  aim  at  the  final  ruin  of 
the  victims.  Sometimes,  in  order  to  put  an  end  to  their  existence, 
these  swallow  a  large  quantity  of  opium,  and  proceeding  to  the 
house  of  their  opponent,  seek  thereby  to  ruin  him  by  dying  at  his 
door,  all  other  means  having  failed .  This  is  the  supreme  vengeance 
of  the  weak  against  the  powerful. 

The  annexed  talisman  or  paper  charm  is  designed  to  deliver 
the  soul  from  punishment  in  the  infernal  regions,  and  help  it  to  be 
reborn  in  a  happier  state  of  existence. 


—  92  — 


5°.  For  the  victim  of  a  felonious  murder  (written  on  yellow 
paper). 

When  it  happens  that  a  person  has  been  waylaid,  has  fallen 
into  the  trap  laid  for  him,  or  dies  as  the  result  of  wounds  and  ill- 
treatment  received,  Taoist  priests,  Tao-shi  ^  J^,  are  summoned, 
and  burn  the  annexed  charm  for  the  purpose  of  delivering  his  soul 
from  the  punishment  inflicted  in  hell,  and  helping  it  to  re-enter  the 
wheel  of  the  metempsychosis  (1). 


(1)  This  symbolises  the  ever  recurring  series  of  evanescent  phenomena,  all  evolving 
from  eternal  cosmic  matter.  The  six  spokes  of  the  wheel  represent  the  six  different 
regions  in  which  one  may  find  a  new  existence:  the  heavens,  the  Titanic  world,  the 
man-world,  the  animal  world,  the  region  of  ghosts  and  hell.  Hackmann.  Buddhism  as  a 
Keligion.  p.  165. 


VWWWN/^  <\/\ .  \s  ,/VW\A. 


M 


isrW^&lti 


■^ 
w 


3 


0) 


i>   -c 


3 
Cfl 

J- 

CD 

o- 

t- 

c 

E 


c 

"I 


o 
a. 


CO 


■m 


^  ^ 
4^^^^ 


c 

3 

S- 

3 
O 
Q. 

<U 

3 

_o- 

"a. 
a. 

3 

in 


g 


*x 


f 

s 


^^&4&>?(  ^O^a*^ 


.^WfcSI^^M;^ 


OS 


h 

0 

a 

tn 

u 
3 
o 
ft 

<u 

ft 
ft 


•m 


s^       ^  «\flij^!r 


^$fc^* 


^T» 


WJ^^^^iJ^^v^ 


—  93 


6".  For  the  benefit  of  drowned  persons  (written  on  yellow 
paper). 

We  shall  give  further  on,  chapter  VIII,  article  14,  details  of 
the  ceremony  which  the  Taoist  priests,  Tao-shi  af|  ^,  perform  to 
rescue  from  the  waters  the  soul  of  a  person  who  has  been  drowned. 
Here,  we  shall  deal  onlv  with  the  written  charm,  whereby  his  soul 
is  delivered  from  hell,  and  helped  to  be  reborn  in  another  body. 
This  paper  is  burnt  during  the  ceremony  performed  after  his  death, 
and  in  case  his  corpse  still  floats  on  the  surface  of  the  ocean  waves, 
or  lies  immersed  in  lakes,  rivers  or  canals,  the  ruler  of  Hades  must 
make  all  endeavours  to  rescue  his  soul  out  of  the  depths.  The 
victim's  name  and  the  date  on  which  the  ceremony  has  been 
performed,  are  carefully  written  on  the  petition-talisman. 


—  94  — 


7°.  For  a  person  who  has  died  in  prison  (written  on  yellow 
paper). 

Oftentimes,  prisoners  who  die  in  the  loathsome  gaols  of  China 
are  secretly  buried,  and  one  is  apprized  of  their  death  only  long 
afterwards.  For  the  benefit  of  those  unfortunate  victims,  Buddhist 
priests  burn  the  annexed  charm  during  the  ceremony  performed 
to  relieve  their  souls  in  the  underworld. 


#^*M;i£ 


BkR/U 


o 

CO 

a    ~ 

O     "~ 

c    2 


v. 

cr    jo 


3    ce 

cy 
-O 


0) 

O"     <u 

a.  ■+* 


5» 


■ 


&**»**?  ^^^ 


■wH 


«? 


*- 


4jj?^*^ 


'5 

E: 

CO 

u 
ifl 

4) 


■s 


cr 

1" 

3 


^^0^^-*<  vJ^OV^ 


95  - 


8°.      For  the  victims  of  calumny  (written  on  yellow  paper). 

This  is  a  charm  designed  for  delivering-  calumniated  persons, 
and  thanks  to  which,  justice  will  be  rendered  them  in  the  nether 
world.  Here  below,  the  reputation  of  these  people  has  been  blasted, 
and  grief  has  shortened  their  days  ;  the  impartial  judges  of  Hades 
will  now  rehabilitate  their  memory,  and  reward  them  for  the  suffer- 
ings they  have  endured.  The  punishment  of  his  calumniators  and 
a  felicitous  career  in  a  future  existence,  such  are  the  wishes  expressed 
for  the  benefit  of  the  victim.  The  annexed  paper  charm  is  designed 
to  procure  him  this  twofold  favour. 


—  96  — 

.  9°.      For  a  person    poisoned    by    doctors'    prescriptions   (written 
on  yellow  paper). 

This  is,  indeed,  a  wonderful  charm,  and  one  which  can  be 
frequently  employed  in  China.  With  reference  thereto,  the  Chinese 
tell  a  story  which  well  depicts  the  situation.  Once  upon  a  time, 
the  god  of  Hades  fell  ill,  and  despatched  one  of  his  attendants  to  the 
world  of  the  living  to  fetch  him  a  good  doctor.  You  will  recognize 
him,  said  he,  in  the  following  manner.  Examine  closely  the  houses 
of  the  medical  profession,  and  count  the  number  of  souls  that  beset 
their  doors,  to  avenge  themselves  on  them  for  having  poisoned  them 
in  a  previous  existence.  The  man  at  whose  door  you  shall  find  the 
smallest  number,  is  the  one  you  must  invite  to  come  and  cure  me. 
The  imp  departed  to  fulfil  his  errand  ;  thousands  of  avenging  souls 
crowded  round  the  doors  of  the  whole  profession.  He  began  to 
despair,  when  at  last  he  espied  a  door  at  which  stood  only  one  soul 
who  came  there  to  seek  vengeance.  Elated  with  joy,  he  fetched 
him  to  the  god  of  Hades,  and  rendered  an  account  of  his  mission. 
The  god  questioned  the  medico,  and  said  :  when  did  you  begin  to 
practise  your  profession '?-- Only  a  short  time  ago.  —  How  many 
patients  did  you  treat?  —  Only  one. — And  he  died,  didn't  he?  — 
Yes  —  (iet  away,  you  are  no  better  than  the  others! 

It  is  a  stroke  of  genius  on  the  part  of  Buddhist  and  Taoist 
priests,  Tao-shi  ^  i,  to  have  invented  such  a  beneficent  charm  in 
favour  of  so  many  unfortunate  beings,  who  daily  fall  victims  to  the 
insensate  treatment  of  countless  self-commissioned  quacks.  This 
paper  at  least  is  designed  to  relieve  their  souls,  while  their  bodies 
have  been  stricken  down  bv  death. 


VNA/VAAAAVXA/XAAAA/" 


l/bvt 


S   J 

o  .2 

£   b 

CO 
W       50 

In 

a.   s. 

o 

c     ° 
O     ^3 

.2    a* 

0  ^o' 

CL 
C     ^ 

<u     ~ 

S-  ^ 

1  I 


<u 


c 
J=. 


£ 

o 

a- 


$-<  5o 

P  -c 

O  — 

CD  -O 

3  *-- 

S  6 

&<  b 


C/) 


U 


CHAPTER      V. 

DIVERS  SUPERSTITIONS  FOR  THE  BENEFIT 

OF  THE  DEAD. 

ARTICLE    I. 
THE  ANCESTRAL  TABLET. 

Muh-chu  #  ±  (1). 

In  ancient  times,  neither  the  tablet  nor  the  personator  was 
employed  at  funerals  and  sacrifices  offered  to  the  dead.  It  was 
only  when  the  burial  was  over  that  a  personator  was  chosen, 
and  the  tablet  erected.  The  ceremony  took  place  in  the  mortuary 
room,  where  sacrifice  was  offered.  We  shall  explain  the  essentials 
of  these  two  ceremonies  and  the  purpose  for  which  thev  are 
performed. 


(1)     Literally  the  "wooden  host".     The  addition  of  the  dot  (as  described  above,  p    53 
makes? the  disembodied  spirit presoit,    as  though   it  $•  elm.   indwelt,  lived   therein),   ;niil 
1  berefore  efficacious,  Ling  j||.  '"'  able  to  take  care  of  the  survivors.   Giles.  Chinese-English 
Dictionary  rfc. 


13 


—  98  — 
I.     The  Personator,  Shi  p. 

1°.      What  is  a  personator? 

A  personator,  Shi  J3 ,  represents  the  dead  person.  One  of  the 
members  of  the  family  is  chosen  to  represent  the  dead  person, 
during  the  sacrifice  which  is  offered  to  the  departed  soul.  He  must 
be  of  the  same  sex  as  the  defunct,  that  is,  men  must  be  represented 
by  a  male  person,  while  deceased  women  are  to  be  personated  by 
one  of  their  own  sex. 

The  personator  of  a  dead  man  is  chosen  from  among  his 
legitimate  grandsons  (1)  ;  if  he  has  none,  one  of  his  grand-nephews 
is  taken,  a  relative  at  least  in  the  fifth  degree  of  consanguinity; 
should  there  he  none  of  this  degree,  one  is  chosen  in  the  husband's 
family,  outside  the  fifth  degree.  A  son,  whose  father  is  still  living, 
cannot  fulfil  the  office  of  personator. 

The  woman,  personating  a  dead  person  of  the  female  sex,  must 
be  the  wife  of  one  of  the  grandsons. 

After  the  burial  of  the  married  couple,  each  one  has  a  per- 
sonator, but  only  the  one  representing  the  husband  appears  in  the 
ceremony. 

A  table  with  meats  on  it  is  prepared  for  the  sacrifice.  The 
personator  is  then  brought  in  and  sits  down  with  his  face  turned 
southwards,  the  tablet  being  at  his  right.  The  worshippers,  who 
are  of  equal  descent  with  the  deceased  person,  bow  to  the  personator. 
All,  even  the  elders,  kneel  twice  towards  the  ground,  offer  him 
meats  and  invite  him  to  drink.  He  feigns  to  eat  and  drink  for 
form  sake.  The  Emperor,  high  officials  of  State  and  mandarins, 
have  alone  personators  ;  youths  and  the  common  people  are  entitled 
to  none.  Youths,  who  die  before  attaining  the  age  of  virility,  are 
divided  into  three  different  classes:  the  first,  comprising  those  from 
sixteen  to  nineteen;   the    second,    those   from    twelve    to    fifteen;    the 


(1)     See  the  Li-ki  flf§  |E,  or  Book  of  Rites.  Ch.  V.  Tseng  tze  wen  #  ^f  ffl.    The  follow- 
ing are  the  exact  words  of  Confucius:  ft  =f-  Eh  ft  Jffi  ^  #  &  %  ^  ,  P  j$  V\  $•  %  #J  K'l 


—  99  — 

third,  those  from  eight  to  eleven  years.  Children,  who  have  not 
yet  attained  seven  years,  and  those  below,  are  quite  unnoticed  in 
the  line  of  descendants. 

The  above  was  the  custom  in  ancient  times  in  choosing  a 
personator. 

2°.      Whence  originated  the  idea  of  having  a  personatoi  ' 

The  origin  of  this  custom  is  a  disputed  point.  We  will  expose 
here  the  principal  opinions  held  by  the  literati. 

a).  The  first  opinion  is  that  of  Tu-yiu  ■$.  fft  (1),  of  the  T'ang 
J*  dynasty.  It  disapproves  of  the  custom.  The  following  are  the 
words  of  this  writer:  "The  ancients  employed  a  personator.  This 
rite  deserves  censure,  and  has  been  abolished  by  our  greal  Worthies. 
One  vied  with  the  other  in  practising  it.  Now  that  an  era  of 
progress  has  set  in,  and  these  silly  customs  have  disappeared,  it  is 
important  not  to  revive  them  ;  common  sense  bids  to  refrain  from 
them.  Some  half-baked  literati  of  our  days  would  fain  re-establish 
tliis  ceremony  of  the  personator.      This  is  quite  absurd."      "^f   A    ffl 

p  #,  M  ±  -£  m  m  z  is.  m  m  a  ®  *  at  n  *  ft  ±,  m 
^  -St  a>j  m  m  0  n,  m  m  ±  m  e  *,  *  ^r  m  m,  *  z.  t 
a  &  m<  m  #  z.  a  m  $  m  m  p,  *r  m  m  &  w- 


b).      The  second  opinion   holds  that  the  personator  is  as  it  were 


the  image  of  the  soul,  Shen-siang  M 


»■ 


The  chapter  on  the  ceremonial  concerning  the  Border  sacrifices 
taken  from  the  Book  of  Kites,  Li-ki  hiao-V eh-sheng  /pf  fg  £ft  ffi  ij£. 
says  :  "the  personator  is  the  image  of  the  departed  soul",  Slf.ij 
shen-siang  yeh  p,  flf)  j%  4. 


(1)  A  scholar  of  profound  erudition,  who  held  high  offices  of  Stab'  under  Teh  T-unj 
fg  £p,  ami  Hsien  Tsung  J?  g?,  A  J).  806  821,  of  the  T:ang  j*  dynasty.  Mayers.  Chinese 
Reader's'Manual. 

(2)  See  General  Repertory,  T'ung-tien  jj§  Jfe      The  original,   written  bj    Tu  yiu  fft  $j 
sec  above)  comprises  two  hundred  books.     It  is  divided  into  eight   sections,  one  of  which 

is  on  rites.  In  1717,  an  Imperial  mandate  ordered  to  add  a  supplement.  This  was  published 
in  one  hundred  and  forty  four  bonks.  In  173(>,  a  third  part  was  added,  giving  details  E0.1 
the  Manchu  dynasty.  This  latter  has  one  hundred  books.  Wylie.  Notes  on  Chinese 
Literature,  p.  (>>!. 


—  100  — 
P;ni  Ku  J'jf.  fH  (1),  who  lived  in  the  time  of  the  Han  g|  dynasty, 
writes:  ''The  personator  is  found  in  the  ceremony  wherein  sacrifice 
is  offered  to  ancestors,  because  the  soul  emitting  no  perceptible 
sounds  and  having  no  visible  form,  the  loving  sentiment  of  filial 
piety  finds  no  means  of  displaying  itself,  hence  a  personator  has 
been  chosen  to  whom  meats  are  offered,  after  which  he  breaks  the 
bowls,  quite  rejoiced,  as  if  his  own  father  had  eaten  plenty.  The 
personator,  drinking  abundantly,  imparts  the  illusion  that  it  is  the 
soul  which  is  satiated".     $  ±  Jjlf  #   W  P   #,   0  %  #  M  Z.  & 

i,Ii:I^#^.SIII'S  fh  %  ».  *  &  P  M  1 
£,  £3  !  *  tt>  ^  ^  #  *  2  ftl'  P  s*  £  **  2 


/<V 


It  must  be  inferred  from  these  words  that  the  personator  was 
not  then  considered  as  the  agent  or  seat  of  the  soul,  for  these  two 
writers  affirm:  "the  personator  is  the  image  of  the  soul"  -"the 
personator  drinking  imparts  the  illusion  that  it  is  the  soul  which  is 
satiated"'.      p,  #   \%  4 P  W  *  #   £   #• 

The  meaning  is  obvious.  The  personator  is,  therefore,  not 
considered  in  this  ceremony  as  the  agent  or  seat  of  the  soul,  but 
merely  as  its  representative,  or  as  a  kind  of  living  medium,  who 
was  sometimes  dressed  up  in  the  clothes  of  the  departed  person,  in 
order  to  make  the    illusion    more   apparent     3  . 

c).  Third  opinion.  The  personator  is  but  the  bearer  of  the 
ancestral  tablet.  In  the  work  entitled  Yi'i  chow  ta-i-i  ^  'jjf  ;fc  |£ 
|f|,  it  is  said:  "the  personator  is  employed  during  sacrifices  to  the 
dead,   in  order   to    carry  the    ancestral    tablet".      #g  £  "P\    P  >   #T  W 

ft  *  £  4- 


(1)  Appointed  Imperial  historiographer  by  Miug-ti  1$  if?.  He  wrote  the  treatise 
entitled  ••Annals  of  the  White  Tiger"  Pehhu  t'ung  |=|  £§  11.  which  he  left,  unfinished. 
Being  involved  in  the  rebellion  of  Teu-hsien  g  Jr,  he  was  casi  into  prison  and  died  there 
A.  I).  92.  Mayers.  Chinese  Reader's  Manual    p.  ICG. 

(2)  AnnaN  of  the  White  Tiger,  Peh-hu  t'ung  £  fit  H. 

(3)  See  Wieger.  Textes  philosophises,  pp.  57  and  77:  also  pp.  137  and  156.  All  these 
lexis  sh..\v  thai  the  personator  was  but  the  image  of  the  son!  or  the  living  likeness  of  the 
dead  person. 


—    101    — 

Jt  is  the  grandsons  who  fulfil  this  function,  and  take  the  tablel 
out.  Should  they  be  too  young  and  unable  to  fulfil  this  duty,  then 
a  person  is  appointed  to  carry  it.  The  function  of  the  personator 
is  to  carry  the  ancestral  tablet,  hence  there  is  no  need  of  having 
such  a  one  immediately  after  death,  as  the  tablel   is  not   vet    erected. 

ft  %  $k  P,  *  £  *±ftt 

The  work  entitled,  Tsih  shwuli  Is'iien  rln'ii  |j|  |^  g£  ifL,  sums 
up  in  a  few  words  the  sense  of  this  text:  "the  filial  son  chooses 
a  personator  to  carry  the  tablet,  but  not  to  be  the  resting  place  of 
the  soul  of  the  dead  person.      His   intention    is    therefore    manifest". 

5fe  il  p  m  n  &  *  ±.  hj  #  vx  m  **,  *  m  h  m- 

In  fine,  in  the  three  preceding  opinions,  the  writers  either 
condemn  the  custom  of  employing  the  personator,  or  restrict  his 
function  to  that  of  carrying  the  tablet,  or  at  most  only  see  in  him 
an  image  of  the  dead  person's  soul. 

d).  The  fourth  opinion  confutes  the  whole  trend  of  thought 
found  in  the  works  of  the  ancient  literati,  and  maintains  unhesitat- 
ingly that  the  personator  is  not  only  a  pure  image  of  the  soul,  but 
must  be  considered  as  the  seat  and  agent  of  the  soul  of  the  dead 
person. 

The  two  most  famous  champions  of  this  new  school  are  Ch'eng 
I-chw'an  fM  ffi  )W  i1^-  known  also  as  Ch'eng-i  @  gf{  or  Ch'eng 
Ming-Lao  fg  ^  ^f,  and  chu-hsi  ^  -^  (2). 

The  former  writes:  "the  ancients,  when  sacrificing  to  the 
dead,  employed  the  personator,  because  the  soul  and  the  vital 
force  of  the  dead   person    alter    being    separated    from  the    body,  seek 


(1)  This  writer  lived  A.  D.  1033-1107.     Wholly  absorbed   iu   philosophical  researches, 

he  acceded  tint  late  to  official  position.     His  criticisms  on  the  classics  o] cl  a  new  i  ru.   in 

Chinese  philosophy  and  were  adopted   by   his  great  successor,   Chu-hsi  ^c  >;£.     Mayer's. 
Chinese  Reader's  Manual,  p   34. 

(2)  A.  I).  1190-1200.  Born  in  Fo  kien,  fg  Wi  where  his  father  (a  native  of  Ngan-hwei 
5£  W)  w;ls  theu  in  official  employ.  He  devoted  his  early  years  to  the  study  of  Buddhism 
and  Taoism,  hut  abandoned  then,  for  Confucianism  and  the  ancient  classics,  of  which  he 
became  the  great  expounder  and  commentator,  his  opinions  being  followed  even  to  the 
present  day.  Within  the  last  one  hundred  and  fifty  years,  critics  have  \  igorously  impugned 
the  doctrines  of  his  school.     Mayers.  Chinese  Readi  i '    .Manual,  p.  2-j, 


—  102  — 

an  agent  of  the  same  nature,  $  5J<  -^  ptf(  Ifn  1$c •  Now,  men  being  all 
of  the  same  kind,  the  father  and  the  children  being  all  of  one  farmh- 
and of  the  same  stock,  the  soul  of  the  departed  person  is  requested 
to  come  and  establish  its  seat  in  one  of  them  as  in  an  agent." 

Chu-hsi  $f.  J3r  (Yu&n-hwui  7c  Uf|;,  the  eminent  scholar  and 
head  of  the  modern  school,  writes  with  no  less  clearness.  "In 
ancient  times  all  employed  a  personator  when  sacrificing  to  the 
dead.  Since  the  descendants  continue  the  life  of  their  ancestors, 
the  personator  shares,  therefore,  in  the  life  of  the  departed  person, 
and  the  ancestor's  soul  descends  undoubtedly  upon  his  descendants, 
and   reposes  therein   to  enjoy   the  sacrifice  offered."     p   $1  3*E  llf,    |fj] 

1  -  %•  m  %  ±  #■  &  n  m  at  ?  «,  it  m  nk  *  (0- 

As  to  the  exact  time  when  this  custom  commenced  and  ended, 
we  have  but  the  testimony  of  the  two  works:  the  "General Repertory" 
T'ung-tien  jg  ]fe,  and  "Daily  Jottings"  Jeh  old  luh  Q  4||  $|  (2), 
which  inform  us  vaguely  that  it  began  to  fall  into  disuse  towards  the 
close  of  the  ('how  f§\  dynasty,  and  that  under  the  Ts'in  ^  and  Han 
"J|  dynasties  it  was  no  longer  practised.  It  is  noteworthy,  however, 
to  remark  that  at  the  time  of  Confucius  it  nourished  vigorously,  as 
may  be  seen  by  the  quotations  which  we  base  given  from  the  Book 
of  Rites,  Li-hi  jjj|  %.  Besides,  Pan-hu  Jjf  [i| ,  who  lived  under  the 
Han  1^.  dynasty,  seems  to  say  that  the  custom  prevailed  in  his  days, 
and  he  describes  the  purpose  thereof  as  a  rite  of  which  he  was  an 
eye-witness.-  -The  text  quoted  above  seems  to  suppose  this. 

II.     The  Tablet. 

1°.      What  is  the  tablet  of  the  dead? 

After  the  burial  and  the  sacrifice  to  the  dead,  a  wooden  tablet, 
muh-chu  ;fc   3i   (literally   "   wooden   host"),   was  erected. 


(1)  See  liecords  of  the  Sayings  of  Chu-tze,  Chu  tze  yii  lull  ifc  ^F"  jm  sit,  collected  and 
published  b\  bis  disciples  in  one  hundred  and  forty  books,  A.  D.  1270.  "Vvlir.  Notes  ou 
( 'hinese  Liters  t  Lire.  \>.  85. 

(2)  A  collection  of  notes  on  a  variety  of  subjects,  being  the  result  of  thirty  years 
jottings  during  the  daily  readings  of  the  author,  Kit  Yeri-wu  H^ff^.  It  comprises  32 
books,  and  was  published  about  the  year  1673.  Wylie.  ibid.  p.  163. 


—  103 


In  making-  it,    the    wood    of   the    mulberry-tree    was    employed, 
hence  also  the  name  given    to  it  of   mulberry-wood    tablet,    sang-chu 


At  the  end  of  the  first  year,  a  sacrifice  known  as  Lien-t&i  $j 
%£  was  offered,  so  called  from  the  white  silk  cap.  lien-hvran  ^  Jg, 
which  the  son  of  the  deceased  wore  on  the  occasion.  The  sacrifice 
being  over,  the  mulberry-wood  tablet  was  buried,  and  replaced  by 
one  made  of  chestnut  wood,  and  hence  called  the  chestnut-wood 
tablet,   lih-chli   |j|  ^.       it   was  elected   in  a  place  of  honour. 

An  Imperial  tablet  was  one  foot  two  inches  long,  while  that  of 
dukes  could  be  but  of  one  foot  in   length. 

On  the  mulberry-wood  tablet,  no  carving  or  painting  was  allow- 
ed ;  on  the  back  of  the  chestnut-wood  tablet  the  posthumous  or 
temple  name  of  the  deceased  was  written. 

According  to  some  writers,  officials  and  literati  had  no  wooden 
tablet  :  that  of  officials  was  made  of  silk  cloth  mounted  on  a  wooden 
framework,  shuh-poh  j^  ^  :  the  literati  had  but  a  tablet  made  of 
tressed  straw,  hieh-mao  $§  ^. 

The  assertion  which  maintains  that  in  ancient  limes  officials 
and  literati  had  no  wooden  tablet,  is  admitted  by  the  following 
scholars  : 

HsiX-shen  f^  jy|  (1)  and  Cheng-yuan  i||$  tu,  both  of  the  Han 
M  dynasty   (A.  J).  25-221). 


7V it i.i-I ing  \ji  fj|,  who  lived  under  the  Southern  Liang  dynasty. 
Nan-liang  ~\$  $fc  (2). 

Kia  Kung-yen  J!(   ^  /H,  of  the  T'ang  )|f   dynasty    (A.  J).    620- 
907). 

Sze  Ma-wen  ji\   J^  jjj^,  who  lived    under   the   Sung    '^    dynasty 
(A.  D.  960-1280). 


(1)  Celebrated  as  a  scholar  under  Hsien-ti  jfafc  ^,  A.  L>.  190-221.  Author  of  the  diction- 
ary   Shw.oh-wen  §5£  ^t,  the  first  lexicon    if  the  Chinese  language. 

(2)  This    short-lived  dynasty   reigned  A.  D.   502-550.     North   and  South    were    then 
divided  between  rival  houses. 


—  104  — 

The  contrary  proposition,  endeavouring  to  prove  that  in  ancient 
times  officials  and  literati  had  a  wooden  tablet,  is  held  bv  the 
folloAving  scholars  : 

Sii-miao  f£  fg  (1),  of  the  Tsin  |f  dynasty  (A.  [>.  265-290). 

Yunn-yih  7C  ']'fl,  prince  of  Tscing-ho  v^j  "juT.  who  lived  at  the 
time  of  the  Northern    Wei  dynasty,   Peh-wei  -|t  H  (-)• 

This  latter  opinion  seems  more  in  accordance  with  the  teaching 
of  the  Book  of  Rites,  Li  hi  fig  fE ,  chapter  XX.  §  Tsi-fnh  £5  j£  (3). 

from  the  period  of  the  Wei  |)|3  and  Tsin  H-  dynasties,  down  to 
those  of  T'ang  j|f  and  Sung  ^ ,  the  officials  and  literati  had  no 
right  to  have  a  wooden  tablet,  muk-cliu  ^  2fe,  erected  to  their 
memory;  they  were  only  entitled  to  the  tz'e-p'ai  Ifiji]  jjj^,  or  tablet 
in  the  family  ancestral  hall,  also  known  as  shen-p'ai  jjj^  )$i,  the 
spirit's  tablet.  This  could  be  of  one  foot  and  an  inch  in  length,  four 
inches  and  a  half  wide,  and  live  lines  thick.  Eight  characters  were 
engraved  thereon  to  indicate  that  it  was  the  seat  of  the  soul  of 
such  an  ancestor,  with  his  posthumous  or  temple  name,  or  of  such 
an  illustrious  dame. 

For  a  man  :   $l   jj&  %   i£  £j    ±   ftfl  Jg 
For  a  woman  :   &  A  M   5%  Z.  $?  M 

At  the  time  of  the  Sung  ^  dynasty  (A.  I).  960-1280),  the 
founders  of  the  modern  school  :  Cheng  /-c/nv'ar/  fj:  fffi  J||,  and  fhv 
Yu&n-hwui  ^  7l  flff,  fixed  the  shape  of  the  wooden  tablet,  muh- 
chu  t|v  i- 

Henceforth,  officials  and  literati  had  their  wooden  tablet.  It 
could  be  one  loot  two  inches  in  height,  three  inches  in  width,  and 
a  little  over  an  inch  thick.  The  two  upper  corners  project  about 
half  an  inch.  An  inch  further  down,  a  line  is  drawn  to  separate 
the  upper  part  from   the  lower,   leaving  empty  one   third   of   an    inch 


(1)  Third  century  A.]'.  Official  and  contemporary  with  Ts'ai-yung 1||  H,,  famous 
scholar,  humorist  and  Bpicnrian,  whose  genius  illumined  the  turbulent  epoch  of  the 
close  of  the  Han  $§'  dynasty.     Mayers.  Chinese  Reader's  Manual,  p.  197. 

(2  The  Northern  Wei  |J|,  or  Toha  Tartars,  held  sway  in  Shansi  |ll  [5]  and  Honan  ;3]" 
]^j  from  A.  D.  3S6-536. 

(3)     See  Tn-li  t'ung-k'ao  fg  g§  S  # 


10 


.) 


on  the  top,  and  about  an  inch  on  the  back  part.  In  the  centre  is 
inscribed  or  written  :  tablet  of  the  soul  of  such  a  one,  belonging  to 
such  a  generation,  of  such  a  dignity,  title  and  rank. 

The  present-day  custom  is  to  write  both  on  the  front  and 
back  part  of  the  tablet,  parallel  to  the  central  inscription,  the 
exact  date  of  the  birth  and  death,  the  name  of  the  district  city, 
and  the  ward  or  parish  of  the  deceased  ;  also  the  name  of  the  hill 
(burial  place),  and  the  direction  in  which  the  coffin  of  the  defunct 
has  been  placed.  On  the  front  tablet  is  written  the  following  inscrip- 
tion :  "tablet  of  the  soul  of  such  a  person,  official  of  such  a  name, 
and  of  such  a  district1-;  or  in  case  of  a  woman  :  "tablet  of  the  soul 
of  such  a  woman,  bearing  such  a  title".  —  The  two  tablets  are  then 
placed  together  and  inserted  into  the  piedestal.  Such  are  the  rules 
which  hold  at  the  present  day  (1). 

Nowadays  also,  commoners  and  peasants,  all  without  exception, 
may  erect  a  tablet  in  honour  of  their  ancestors.  Let  us  examine 
the  reasons  which  originally  determined  the  setting  up  of  the  tablet. 

2°.      For  what  purpose  was  the  tablet  erected  f 

a).  It  is  the  image  of  the  soul  and  a  tangible  symbol  erected 
to  the  memory  of  the  deceased,  affording  thereby  a  fixed  object  for 
filial  piety. 

At  the  time  of  the  Han  |J|  dynasty,  the  scholar  Hsu-shen  f£ 
lit  wrote:  "the  tablet  is  the  image  of  the  soul;  having  rendered 
the  last  sad  duties  to  his  sire,  the  filial  son  has  no  object  whereon 
he  may  fix  his  affection,  hence  he  offers  sacrifice  and  erects  a  tablet. 

zfc  #  ft  ft  4,  #  •?  8E  IP,  &  M  ft  ft,  ffc  J3l  JM  M  ±  ±  (2). 

Pan-ku  3#£  [g,  another  scholar,  who  lived  under  the  same 
dynasty,  wrote  similarly:  "the  soul,  properly  speaking,  has  no 
dwelling  place  ;  the  filial  son  fixes  his  affection  on  the  tablet,  and 
employs  it  to  draw  the  attention  of  succeeding  generations",  ft  ;$ 
M  t,  #  ¥  %  £  M  ±,  fC  ■*  %   pT  *P  (3). 


1 1)     See  the  Wu-li  t'ung-k'ao  %  fi|  £§  #,  and  Tu-li  t'ung-k'ao  '$.  W.  M  # 

(2)  See  the  Wu-king  i-i  S.  M  !&  tl- 

(3)  See  Annals  of  the  White  Tiger,  Peh-hu  t'ung  fi  J^  Ji- 

14 


c 


—  106  — 

Ch'eng  Peh-yu  J$  fg  B^f,  who  lived  in  the  time  of  the  T'ang 
j|f-  dynasty,  sa}rs  :  "as  the  heart  of  the  filial  son  found  no  object 
worthy  of  his  affection  after  the  burial  of  his  father,  he  bethought 
himself  of  erecting    a    (commemorative)    tablet.      ]||   f|?   j^  ^   ;£   ;fr, 

s  &  m  %,  &  it  ft  ^  (i)'. 

The  famous  scholar,  Ch'en  Kao  |fif«  $£,  of  the  Y"ua?i  7c  dynasty, 
quoting"  the  words  of  the  scholar  Fang  ~jf ,  writes  as  follows:  "In 
truth,  the  soul  has  no  fixed  abode,  so  it  cannot  be  attached  to  any 
material  resting-place.  What  people  have  agreed  to  call  the  seat  of 
the  soul,  is  in  reality  a  seat  erected    for   the  living".      iji$  4te  ~}j  ^L> 

%  if  m  m  &<  m  ft  hl  #.  #  a  it  2.  5  (2). 

According  to  these  ancient  writers,  the  original  purpose  in 
erecting  the  tablet  was,  therefore,  to  have  a  tangible  symbol  of  the 
departed  soul,  affording  a  fixed  object  to  the  filial  piety  of  the 
descendants,  but  it  was  never  intended  to  make  thereof  the  abode  or 
seat  of  the  soul  of  the  dead  person. 

b).      The  soul  of  the  deceased  abides  really  in  the  tablet. 
We  now  come  to  a  more  modern  phase  of  thought,    which    has 
been   gradually  evolved. 

Under  the  T'ang  Jff-  dynasty,  K'ung  gin-tali  Q  II  jH  (3)  wrote 
as  follows  :   "the  tablet  is  the  seat  wherein  dwells   the  departed  soul. 

*  ±  m  n  &  ft  (4). 

Under  the  Sung  ^  dynasty,  Ch'eng  I-chw'an  f|  ffi  J||,  a 
writer  already  quoted,  holds  the  following  language  :  "Should  a 
sacrifice  be  offered  to  ancestors  without  erecting  them  a  tablet,  their 
soul  has  no  seat  wherein    to    dwell.    ^|  Inj  #&  yfc  ±,   |lj   ft  Tfi  #;. 

According  to  Chu-hsi  ^  J|F,  the  ancient  rite  concerning  the 
tablet  was  to  establish  a  seat,  wherein  one  desired  the  ancestral  soul 


(1)  See  the  Wu-li  t'ung-k'ao  £  fg  J§  ;%. 

(2)  See  the  Li-ki  tsih-shwoh  jjif  f£  %k  IS- 

(3)  A.  D.  574-648.     A  descendant  of  Confucius  in  the  32lul  degree,  and  a  distinguished 
scholar  and  public  functionary.     Mayers.  Chinese  Reader's  Manual. 

(1)     See  Discussions  on  the  Book  of  Rites,  Li-ki  shu  $$  fE,  Ufa. 


Fig.  53 


& 


it 


4#4 


^2 


ii» 


Figure  de  la  tablette  des  ancetres. 
A'ncesfraZ  tablet  (front  and  back  parts). 


—  107  — 
to  reside.  -£  2L  #  ±,  f£  1L  -  Jg,  #C  fft  3§  £   $j-  4$  $  ^  4  (I). 

Some  modern  writers  have  given  various  absurd  explanations  of 
the  ancient  classics.  From  these  erroneous  comments  results  the 
popular  belief  that  the  soul  of  the  defunct  resides  really  in  the  tablet. 
It  is,  therefore,  fancied  that  one  will  enjoy  happiness  by  repeatedly 
bowing  and  praying  before  it.  Likewise,  it  is  considered  that  mis- 
fortune will  befall  people,  if  this  duty  is  either  neglected  or  discarded. 

Popular  credulity  is  in  nowise  puzzled  by  any  amount  of  anom- 
alies or  contradictions.  The  tablet  is  not  erected  until  the  burial  has 
taken  place,  how  then  can  it  be  explained,  why  the  soul,  which 
dispensed  with  a  seat  before  the  burial,  now  comes  and  abides 
therein,  when  the  name  of  the  deceased  person  is  affixed  thereon? 

Moreover,  how  explain  why  the  soul,  which  is  thought  to  be 
fixed  on  a  piece  of  cloth  borne  before  the  coffin,  seeing  its  name 
inscribed  on  the  tablet,  suddenly  abandons  its  first  resting-place, 
and  hastens  to  take  up  a  new  seat  on  the  tablet? 

In  fine,  the  tablet  cannot  be  erected  but  once,  hence  in  case  it 
is  broken  or  lost  in  any  way,  where  will  the  poor  soul  henceforth 
reside  ? 

3°.      Description  of  the  ancestral  tablet. 

This  tablet  is  composed  of  two  upright  pieces,  each,  however, 
of  unequal  length. 

The  first,  which  is  the  longer  and  thicker,  is  generally  inserted 
on  a  carved  block  or  piedestal.  It  is  placed  to  the  rear.  The  top 
portion  is  sometimes  carved,  and  almost  always  painted  red  and 
varnished.  It  varies  in  form,  assuming  at  times  a  semi-circular 
shape  (see  annexed  figure),  and  at  others  resembling  a  truncated 
pyramid. 

The  second  piece,  which  is  the  shorter,  is  placed  to  the  front. 
It  bears  the  prescribed  inscription,  which,  on  ordinary  occasions, 
meets  the  eye  of  the  visitor.      Lest   the   characters,    however,    might 


(1)     See  Chu  hsi's  Miscellanies.     Chu-tze  yii-lei  ^  ^  ff 


—  108  — 

be  effaced  in  the  course  of  time,  the  same  formula,  with  details  of 
birth,  death  and  date  of  burial,  is  also  inscribed  on  the  longer  piece 
placed  at  the  back. 

This  second  inscription  is  invisible,  being-  hidden  from  view  by 
the  front  piece. 

The  two  pieces  of  the  tablet  are  placed  together,  impinging  on 
each  other,  their  surfaces  having  been  planed  smooth.  When  both 
are  thus  placed,  one  would  hardly  suspect  that  there  are  two  dis- 
tinct pieces. 


n 
0 


—  109  — 

ARTICLE    II. 
"KOTOWING"    TO    THE    DEAD. 

K'eu-pai  wang-jen  Pp  ^  rjj  \. 

The  kind  of  obeisance  mentioned  here  is  common] v  called 
"kotowing",  K'o-t'eu  £*  Jjjf,  or  knocking  the  head  on  the  ground. 
A  full  description  of  it  is  found  in  the  Book  of  Rites,  Li-hi  jjjf  fg, 
chapter  T'an-kung  |J  ^. 

The  following-  are  the  very  words  of  Confucius  himself:  "gener- 
ally", says  he,  "guests  who  come  to  condole  are  first  saluted  bv 
kneeling  towards  them,  and  knocking  the  head  on  the  ground  to 
manifest  one's  grief.  However,  the  process  of  knocking  the  head 
on  the  ground,  before  bowing  to  the  guests,  is  a  more  expressive 
manner  of  showing  grief,  and  I  prefer  the  latter  way,  in  cases  when 
mourning  lasts   for    three    years".   JfL  T   0 ,  #  M  Jn  #  |I  H  ^, 

*  ii  4,  m  m  m  %  n  &,  #  m  4,  -a  *  m  ±  *,  ^  %  £ 

This  ritual  bowing  before  the  corpse,  or  when  performed  during 
the  period  of  mourning,  is  technically  termed  K'i-sang  ^f  ^g,  and 
consists  in  kneeling,  opening  the  hands  and  placing  them  forward  on 
the  ground,  knocking  the  head  on  the  ground,  and  maintaining  that 
posture  even  for  some  time,  K'i-liu  |§  •[§  (remaining  bowed   down). 

The  custom  of  bowing  to  the  dead,  kneeling  towards  them, 
and  knocking  the  head  on  the  ground,  goes  back  to  the  remotest 
times  (1),  and  each  one  practises  it  as  he  deems  fitting.  (Man  being- 
dead,  his  soul  is  separated  from  the  body,  which  is  henceforth  but 
a  lifeless  corpse.  Nevertheless,  those  mortal  remains,  though  deprived 
of  the  spirit  that  animated  them,  are  an  essential  part  of  the  human 
being,  and  as  such  deserve  respect.  Special  ceremonies  have  always 
been  employed  in  honouring  them,  and  this  is  quite  in  accordance 
with  reason.      The  manner,    in    which    the    Chinese    people    consider 

(1)     See  Ritual  of  Mourning,  Sang-li  &  jg,     ffc  Jf  fit  UP,  Kff  ft  ffi  M  ^  W,  ff  fl£  t 

a,  n  #  b  as. 


—  110  — 

nowadays  such  honours,  is  quite  different  from  the  above  standpoint, 
hence  the  Catholic  Church  has  prohibited  them). 

The  common  people  treat  at  present  a  corpse  as  if  it  were  an 
intelligent  being,  and  call  the  tomb  the  sepulchre  of  the  soul,  Ling- 
kiu  fl  ^  (1).  Over  it  are  affixed  inscriptions  begging-  the  protec- 
tion of  the  soul,  Ling-yiu  fH  ^f ,  the  table  placed  beside  it  is  called 
the  throne  of  the  soul,  Ling-tso  Hf  j^S,  while  the  tablet  is  stvled 
the  seat  or  resting-place  of  the  soul,  Ling-wei  f||  fi-  This  tablet 
bears  in  Chinese  the  name  of  Ling-p'ai  f£  )$.,  or  also  Pang-t'ieh 
W  fMl'  anc*  consists  of  a  strip  of  white  cloth,  one  foot  in  length  and 
a  little  over  three  inches  wide,  upon  which  is  written:  "tablet  of 
such  or  such  a  person.  It  is  placed  on  a  small  table  beside  the 
coffin,  and  is  afterwards  burnt  at  the  burial  service  together  with 
some  mock-money. 

During  lifetime,  kneeling  is  not  practised  indiscriminately 
towards  everybody.  How  then  does  it  happen  that  when  a  person 
is  dead,  be  he  a  young  man  or  an  inferior,  superiors  and  elders, 
forgetting  their  dignity,  kneel  down  and  bow  before  his  corpse, 
fearing  even  to  be  too  sparing  of  their  prostrations?  Should  you 
ask  them  why  they  so  act,  they  will  tell  you  they  hope  the  deceased 
will  procure  them  happiness,  or  they  fear  his  maleficent  influence; 
in  fine,  they  consider  him  as  the  dispenser  of  happiness  or  misfor- 
tune. It  is  for  this  reason  that  they  kneel  and  bow  repeatedly 
before  him.  Let  us  now  suppose  that  two  or  three  intelligent 
persons,  though  kneeling  before  the  corpse  of  the  deceased,  have  no 
intention  of  begging  him  to  grant  happiness  or  avert  misfortune, 
but  wish  merely  to  observe  an  outward  rite  of  civility  towards  him, 
it  is  nevertheless  obvious,  that  the  wise  conduct  of  these  two  or 
three  men  of  common  sense,  will  be  quite  inefficient  to  dispel  the 
silly  hopes  entertained  by  thousands,  nay  by  hundreds  of  thousands 
of  men,  hence  the  Catholic  Church  has  been  compelled  to  prohibit 
such  honours. 


(1)     Ling  fg.  The  disembodied  spirit,  manifesting  itself  in  an  efficacious  manner,  and 
henceforth  protecting  descendants. 


Fig.  55 


1  ' 


S**«±  -'-^^gpsSgfe  ■■'■  :'^?<m*0$W^:*?^^^^^^:fi  ?s«;:;; 


Oblations  devant  la  tablette  des  ancetres. 
Offerings  placed  before  the  Ancestral  tablet. 


—  111  — 

ARTICLE    III. 
SACRIFICES    OFFERED    TO    THE    DEAD. 

Tsi-tsien  wang-jen  ^|  ^  A> 

Rich  and  poor,  all  offer  meats  to  deceased  parents.  This  custom 
goes  back  to  the  remotest  antiquity.  It  is  a  strict  duty  to  prepare 
wine,  meats,  fruit  and  vegetables,  which  are  placed  on  a  table,  and 
the  dead  are  invited  to  come  and  partake  thereof. 

This  ceremony  is  practised  when  the  corpse  is  placed  in  the 
coffin,  also  on  the  burial  day,  and  on  the  two  anniversaries  of  the 
birth  and  death  of. the  deceased  (1). 

The  tenth  anniversary  of  the  death  of  the  deceased  is  celebrated 
as  the  fiftieth  ;  on  the  sixtieth  anniversary,  a  congratulatory  address 
is  read,  and  presents  are  offered  in  the  same  manner  as  among  the 
living. 

The  work  entitled:  Fungshen-kid  litsih  shwoh  ^§§  ^f  5^  fiH  ;KI 
f£,  says:  "Since  presents  and  congratulations  are  offered  during 
lifetime,  why  not  manifest  after  death  one's  filial  piety,  by  offering 
sacrifice  on  the  anniversary  day  of  the  demise  of  the  deceased?"   (2). 

The  "Prayer-formularies  for  birthdays  and  death  anniversaries", 
Sheng-ki  chuh-wen  £  ,gt  fft  "<&;,  give  the  congratulatory  formula 
to  be  used  on  the  occasion:  "In  such  a  year,  month  and  day,  I, 
the  filial  son  (here  name  is  inserted),  beg  to  offer  a  petition  to  such 
a  grandee  (3),  and  say  to  him  :  years  flit  away  with  wonderful  rapi- 
dity; on  the  annual  anniversary  of  thy  birth,  I  was  wont  to  congra- 
tulate thee  while  thou  wert  still  living,  now  that  thou  art  no  more, 
could  I  possibly  forget  thee?  My  filial  affection  is  undying;  beneath 
the  immense  vault  of  the  heavens,   I  invite  thee  to   drink   and  eat   of 


(1)  See  Yao  liu  la  shu  #fc  W.  ft  #■ 

(2)  See  Fung-shen-kia  li-tsih-shwoh  g|  #  %  M  ft  M-     $1  #  £  ^,  i£  #  K  Hi  1 1 

(3)  After  death  the  soul  is  raised  to  higher  dignity  and  rank.     S.-e  above,  p.  56. 


—  112  — 

these  meats,  which  with  my  whole  heart  I  offer   thee,    and    beg  thee 
to  graciously  accept'1  (1). 

The  Ritual  of  Mourning,  Sang-Ii  |jfi  fiff,  employs  almost  the 
same  phraseology.  If  we  seek  the  reason,  whence  originated  these 
offerings  made  to  the  dead  in  ancient  times,  we  find  it  is  not  precise- 
ly to  furnish  food  to  the  departed  souls,  but  rather  to  manifest 
filial  piety.  Failing  other  means,  the  customs  holding  during  life 
are  availed  of  and  applied  to  the  dead.  Such  an  offering  is,  there- 
fore, but  a  mark  of  undying  affection,  and  means  in  nowise  that 
the  dead  will  partake  of  the  meats  offered. 

The  work  known  as  Sung-t'ao-kuh  ts'ing-i-luh  ^  |>|J  *£  fjtf 
S  ^,  contains  the  following  :  the  wooden  (artificial)  fruits  placed 
before  the  tablet  of  the  ancestor  of  the  Chow  dynasty,  Chow  T'ai-t^u 
Jp)   ^C  fit  (2),  were  seen  to  assume  the  appearance  of  natural  ones". 

In  the  work  entitled  Ming-tu-muh  fing-yil  hi-t'an  0£j  ^jj-fl  ^ 
i§  M  IB  f^>  we  re&d  :  "nowadays,  rich  and  poor,  place  on  the 
burial  day,  natural  or  artificial  fruits  before  the  tablet  of  a  dead 
person.  The  artificial  fruits  are  painted  in  imitation  of  natural  ones". 
These  ritual  offerings  of  both  natural  and  artificial  fruits,  indicate 
obviously,  that  the  intention  was  not  to  offer  them  as  food  to  be 
eaten  by  the  dead. 

Only .  the  living,  who  have  a  material  body,  are  capable  of 
eating;  after  death,  the  soul  is  separated  from  the  body,  which  is 
soon  corrupted  and  crumbles  to  dust.  Henceforth,  the  disembodied 
spirit  endures  neither  hunger  nor  thirst ;  how  then  can  it  need  any 
food?  Even  the  ignorant  understand  these  principles.  Unfortunately, 
Buddhist  doctrine  has  invaded  the  people's  mind,  pretending  that 
souls    in    the    nether    world    still    need    drink    and  food,    that    their 


(1)  See  Sheng-ki  chuh-wen  £  &  jjjfc  &.    «  $=   0  fl,  %■  f-  £,  jg  Hg  £  j*  #  &  ^ 

ft  s  a,  m  /?  %  m,  ^  m  m  '&,  #  ©e  w  r-  a  ^  m.  £,  &  m  m  m,  -%  ^  ®  s,  m 

(2)  The  Posterior  Chow,  Heu-chou  ^  Jj§,  is  the  last  of  the  five  ephemeral  dynasties 
which  succeeded  the  downfall  of  T'ang  )§*.  It  ruled  Central  China,  A.  D.  051-960,  amidst 
the  greatest  confusion  and  turmoil. 


—  113  — 

descendants  should  furnish   them    therewith,    and    oiler   them    meals 
at  stated  periods,  failing  which  they  become  "hungry  ghosts"     1). 

These  nonsensical  ideas  are  so  ingrafted  in  the  popular  mind 
that  it  is  difficult  to  extirpate  them.  Meats  and  wine  are  offered, 
because  it  is  fancied  the  dead  eat  and  drink  in  reality  2).  In  order 
to  understand  better  the  attitude  of  the  Chinese  mind,  with  reference 
to  these  sacrifices  offered  to  the  dead,  let  us  put  the  question  by 
way  of  objection,  and  see  how  it  is  avoided  solving  it.  Nothing 
depicts  better  the  mind  of  a  person,  than  the  manner  in  which  be 
beats  about  the  bush,  when  an  objection  is  urged  against  his  system. 

Objection,—  Chinese  books  contain  the  following:  "After  three 
days  fasting,  the  ears  become  deaf  and  the  eyes  are  overcast".  Now 
it  happens,  that  in  the  course  of  a  year,  sacrifices  are  offered  at  most 
only  six  or  seven  times  to  the  dead,  whence  it  results  that  they 
remain  one  or  two  months  without  eating  or  drinking,  the  meats 
previously  offered  being  all  consumed.  Did  they  really  stand  in  need 
of  food,  wouldn't  they  have  died  of  hunger  many  a  day  ago? 

As  to  the  manner  of  making  these  offerings,  people  are  con- 
tented with  placing  the  meats  on  a  table,  and  when  the  sacrifice  is 
over,  every  bit  of  meat  and  every  drop  of  wine  still  remains  there  ; 
the  ancestors  have  tasted  nothing,  so  then  of  what  avail  is  the 
sacrifice  ? 

Every  intelligent  person  ought  to  manifest  his  filial  piety  in 
conformity  with  reason,  and  in  a  manner  advantageous  to  his  parents. 
But  isn't  it  highly  unreasonable  to  invite  a  spiritual  soul  to  come 
and  partake  of  material  food? 


(1)  Buddhism  has  borrowed  from  China  its  ancestor  worship,  though  opposed  to  the 
leading  doctrine  of  Buddha.  In  large  monasteries,  ancestral  tablets  are  erected  to  the 
souls  of  the  cremated  members  of  the  community,  in  exactly  the  same  manner  as  the  usual 
monuments  of  the  kind.  Once  every  year,  a  festive  rite,  accompanied  by  an  offering,  taki  - 
place  before  all  the  ancestral  tablets  in  the  monastery.  Hackmann.  Buddhism  as  a 
Religion,  p.  229. 

('-')     See  Ming-tu-mub   t'ing-yii   ki-t'an  BJ]  $|5  &  1*>  pf§  $£  g£.     ^  ±  $;  %_  %.  H  #  % 

#.  £  i  m  m  %  m  ra  &•  %  ±  £  *  ft  «  m  t.  ab  m  vi  & 

\:> 


—  114  — 

What  would  a  person  say  of  a  son,  who  prepared  a  banquet 
for  his  parents,  when  they  were  several  thousand  miles  away  from 
him,  and  knowing  they  could  not  return? 

Such  acts  are  in  nowise  inspired  by  filial  piety,  but  denote  a 
total  lack  of  practical  common   sense. 

Reply.  —  The  above  logical  conclusion  seems  to  be  implied  in 
a  passage  from  the  Book  of  Kites,  Li-hi  jjjf}  f£,  chapter  T'an-kung 
Iff  ^7,  where  we  find  the  following:  "When  a  man  has  given  up 
the  ghost,  it  is  customary  to  set  out  beside  him  dry  flesh  and 
pickled  meats.  When  he  is  borne  to  the  grave,  the  flesh  of  the 
victims  offered  is  placed  on  little  carriages,  which  follow  the  hearse. 
After  the  burial  service  meats  are  offered  him,  but  nobody  has  ever 
seen  the  dead  person   partake  of  these  offerings"  (1). 

One  would  expect  here  to  see  the  obvious  conclusion  drawn: 
therefore,  it  is  needless  to  offer  him  anything,  since  he  never 
enjoys  it.  We  are,  however,  deceived  ;  the  Book  of  Rites,  Li-hi  jjjf| 
|E,  concludes  quite  otherwise.  Here  is  what  it  says:  "From  the 
remotest  antiquity,  such  offerings  have  never  been  neglected,  in 
order  not  to  abandon  the  dead.  Therefore  this  custom  which  some 
people  reprove,  is  in  nowise  blameworthy"  (2).  It  has  ever  existed, 
therefore  it  is  good;  it  is  the  custom  in  China,  therefore  we  practise 
it.      This  clinches  the  question. 

\'id(jo  meliora  proboque,  deteriora  sequor !  (3). 

It  is  even  customary  in  some  places  to  prepare  an  opium-pipe 
and  a  little  recipient  filled  with  the  drug.  Both  are  placed  on 
the  table  together  with  the  offerings,  in  order  that  the  deceased 
may  enjoy  his  pipe  after  dinner,  as  he  was  wont  to  do  while  living. 
This  is  a  rather  modern  innovation. 


(1)     Li-kiftfjB.     Ch.  T'an-kung.  Section  II.  Pt.  II.  n°  8. 

(2)  *&  k  m  m  z.  u,  n  It  at  m  ft  £,  m  m  m  &  £,  *  m  %  %  m  £.  #  •&< 
s  h  ut  w  *,  *  z  m  vt  in,  n  $  k  %  &  -a,  m  ^  z.  m  m  ft  m  #,  #  *  a  £ 

(3)     I  see  the  better  way.  and  I  approve,  and  yet  I  follow  what  is  worse.     Ovid.  Meta- 
morp.   VII.  IS. 


—  1  1 5  — 

If  we  consider  attentively  the  innermosf  thoughts  of  pagan 
Chinese,  we  ever  discover  lurking  at  the  bottom  ol  their  heart  a 
more  pressing  motive,  more  or  less  avowed.  They  cherish  the  hope 
that  their  parents  will  protect  them,  shower  blessings  on  them,  and 
it  is  often  for  this  purpose  that  offerings  are  made  to  them. 

People  of  this  kind  believe  more  or  less  in  the  existence  of 
"hungry  ghosts",  a  doctrine  invented  by  Buddhists,  but  sacrifice  in 
the  dead  to  secure  happiness  and  avoid  misfortune,  and  qo1  merely 
for  the  purpose  of  manifesting  filial  piety.  As  proof  thereof,  we 
read  in  the  "Glosses  to  the  Chow  Ritual",  Chow-li  chu-shu  J£]  jjj«  ^ 
ffl,  (t\  that  all  the  ministers  sacrificed  in  their  private  shrines,  and 
after  the  sacrifice,  offered  the  flesh  of  the  victims  to  the  prince,  to 
procure  him  happiness,  as  they  fancied.  Every  person  offering  sacri- 
fice draws  down  happiness  on  himself:  should  lie  offer  part  of  the 
victim  to  the  prince,  he  makes  him  a  present  of  happiness. 

Elsewhere  we  find:  "the  victims  offered  in  sacrifice  are  shared 
with  the  prince  and  grandees,  and  those  who  receive  these  meats 
receive  the  blessings  of  the  spirits,  Kwei-shen  J^,  tffy;  it  is  for  this 
reason  that  both   raw  and  sodden   meats  are  offered"  (2). 

We  find  likewise  the  same  doctrine  exposed  in  the  work  entitled 
"Record  of  popular  customs",  T'ung-wsuh-pien  $%  (ft  $|j  (3):  "On 
this  belief  are  founded  the  various  names  given  to  these  meat-oblations 
by  those  who  offer  them:  "present  of  happiness",  Fuh-li  fg  fj|, 
while  the  distributing  of  them  is  called  "distribution  of  happiness", 
San-fuh  fr  fg"  (4). 

At  the  present  day,  those  who  make  these  sacrifices  and  offer- 
ings, have  the  intention  of  either  presenting  food  to  the  dead,  or  of 
securing  happiness,  both  of  which  are  contrary  to  sound  reason. 


(1)  See  Chow-li  chu-shu  J5]  ^  f£  gr£.  Chow-li   t'ien  kwan  shen-fu   Jnl  fg  ^  If  ))*  H. 

it  a  g  ^  §§c m. & &, a m r*j j&* i, m z. & m, & m #,  /l ^ m ± a ^ *g, ^ 

H  £  £  *I  **,  tfc  z  &  fg. 

(2)  See  Chow-li  ch'un-kwan-ta-tsung-peb  jjf)  fig  ^  'g"  ±  ^  ffi. 

(3)  See  T'ung-suh-pien   ffi  #  M.     J*  ^  A  II?  ft  ®,  B  B  W.,  ft  life,  0  ®C  IS. 

(4)  Those  who  receive  these  offerings,  after  a  sacrifice,  eat  and  drink  their  happiness 
Williams.     Dictionary  of  the  Chinese  Language  jjjgj. 


—  116  — 

Hence,  in  the  seventh  year  of  the  reign  of  K'ien-lung  Ifc  \%f?. 
Pope  Benedict  XIV  issued  a  Bull  (1),  forbidding  the  offering  of  such 
sacrifices  to  the  dead.  The  Church  proscribes  these  ceremonies, 
because  the  rite  is  opposed  to  sound  reason. 

We  have  seen  above,  how  scholars  themselves,  brought  up 
in  the  midst  of  paganism,  condemn  these  customs  as  tainted  with 
Buddhist  errors. 

It  is  historically  proved  that  the  custom  originated  in  the 
remotest  times  of  the  Chinese  nation.  History,  as  a  matter  of  fact, 
informs  us  that  the  Emperor  Shun  ^  (2),  invested  Chu  ^,  son  of 
the  defunct  emperor  Yao  a=§,  with  the  feudal  demesne  of  ccT;ni"  -ft, 
on  condition  that  he  would  offer  annually  a  ritual  sacrifice  to  the 
Manes  of  his  (Shun's)  father  (4). 

This  is  the  first  official  record  wherein  we  find  that  sacrifices 
were  offered  to  the  dead. 


(1)  This  document  is  dated  11th  July,  1742.     It  was  not,   however,   published  till  the 
II"1  August  following.     It  finally  settled  all  disputed  points. 

(2)  One  of  the  three  great   Emperors   of  the   legendary   period.     Paid   to   have  ruled 
China  B.  C.  2255-2205. 

(3)  See  Tze-chi  t'ung-kien  kang-mub  jf  *S  &  §i  IS  B.  Sfg^&^fl-J^fcjjiE. 


Fig.  56 


Le  papier-monnaie.     Divers  genres. 
Various  kinds  of  mock-money. 


—  117  — 

ARTICLE    IV. 

MOCK-MONEY. 


Chi-ts'ien 


At  the  time  of  the  Western  or  Former  //an,  Ts'ien-han  nt  $| 
(B.C.  206 — A.  D.  25),  wealthy  folks  placed  pieces  of  copper  money 
in  the  coffins  with  the  dead.  During  the  reign  of  the  Emperor  Wu-ti 
jfc  iff  (B.C.  140-86),  robbers  violated  the  tomb  of  his  ancestor, 
Wen-ti  -£  ^f,  and  appropriated  the  silver  deposited  therein  (1). 

During  the  reign  of  the  Eastern  or  Later  Han  dynasty,  Heu- 
han  f|t  M  (A.  D.  25-221),  while  the  Emperor  Hwo-ti  %]  rf?  A.  I). 
39-106)  ruled  the  country,  Ts'ai-lun  ^  jj|  (2\  bethought  himself 
of  employing  the  bark  of  trees  and  other  materials  for  paper- 
making,  hence  it  is  at  this  time  that  people  began  to  use  it  for 
writing  purposes. 

This  document  is  found  in  the  work  entitled  "Chronicles  of  the 
Later  Han  jj|,  referring  to  Ts'ai-lun  ^  jfa"  (3).  During  the  two 
dynasties  of  Wei  |^  and  Tsin  §,  that  is  to  say  from  the  commen- 
cement of  the  Three  Kingdoms,  San-kwoh  _5£  |gtj  (A.I).  22  1-'i20), 
cunning  knaves  cut  up  paper  and  offered  it  instead  of  money  to  the 
Spirits,  Kwei-shen  Jfi  jji^,  but  this  custom  was  not  yet  general  (4). 

T'ang  Yuan-tsung  j^-  7C  tj£>  given  to  various  superstitions,  and 
a  votary  of  all  kinds  of  gods,  established  as  High  Master  of  Ceremo- 
nies Wang-yiX  ^E  J&i  the  twenty-sixth  year  of  his  reign,  in  the 
period    K'ai-yuan     ffi     7C     (A.   D.     739).      This    minister,    with    the 


(1)  See  Chronicles  of  the    Former   Han  jijif  §ji.  Ts'ieu-han-ehu   Chaug-t'aiig-chwan  0ij 

m  #  m  %  \%- 

(2)  The  reputed  iuventor  of  paper-making  in  China.  He  was  the  first  who  substituted 
silk  and  ink  for  the  bamboo  tablet  and  stylus.  Chief  eunuch  and  chamberlain  of  the 
Imperial  household:  he  was  ennobled  as  Marquis  of  the  Dragon  Pavilion,  Lnng  fc'ing-hen 
nl  ¥  {Jt-  Giles.     Chinese  Biographical  Dictionary,  p.  751. 

(3)  Heu-han-shu  Ts'ai-lun-chwan  %  ^  #  ^  ft  %.     %  M  W  %t  %  |g  f#  &f  $f  Si 

&  m  m,  m  ft  m  m<m  m  vx  *  m  n. 

(4)  See  Fung  shi  wen  kien  ki  ft  fc  frl  JL  f E.     $g  m   IH,  f&  ft  #  :£  #,  M  $&  U  & 


—  118  — 

approval  of  his  Lord,  began  to  burn  mock-money  at  the  Imperial 
sacrifices.  Learned  persons  of  those  days  condemned  this  practice  as 
contrary  to  established  rites,  and  thus  it  was  not  then  introduced 
as  a  custom  among  the  people,  but  became  popular  later  on.  It  has 
existed  thenceforward  down  to  the  present  day,  in  which  we  find  it 
practised  throughout  all  China  (I). 

This  custom  of  burying  bullion  with  the  dead,  if  it  did  not, 
even  at  the  time  of  the  Han  -^  dynasty,  excite  the  cupidity  of  robbers, 
it  removed  at  least  from  circulation  a  valuable  commodity,  by  hiding 
it  in  the  ground.  <  )n  this  score  it  deserved  to  be  abandoned,  and 
thus  people  henceforth   began  to  use  paper  money  (2). 

In  later  times,  a  novel  contrivance  was  imagined,  that  of  mak- 
ing gilt  paper  ingots  resembling  silver  and  gold,  also  perforated 
paper,  which  was  burnt  and  reduced  to  ashes  for  the  benefit  of  the 
dead. 

The  origin  of  this  use  of  paper  instead  of  money  goes  back,  as 
Ave  have  seen,  to  Wang-yii  3l  iH>  who  lived  in  the  time  of  the 
T'ang  JH  dynasty.  He  used  it  in  the  Imperial  sacrifices,  and  the 
people  followed  his  example.  In  his  days,  however,  learned  persons 
combated  the  innovation,  so  that  it  did  not  extend  immediately,  but 
at  last  it  became  general,  and  could  not  be  extirpated  without  diffi- 
culty. There  were  not  wanting,  however,  men  of  common  sense, 
who  unmasked  its  inanity.  Among  them,  we  may  mention  the 
following  : 


(1)  See  Chronicles  on  the  Books  of  the  T'ang  J|f  dynasty.  T'ang-shu  Wang-yub  chwan 
£  ifi;  T.  m  IS-  T'ung-kien  Kang-muh  &  g£  {ft  §•     5&*7C^tt»)S,#,SSJ»^Jilf, 

ffl  %  -  +  *  *z,  m  nmni®  g  $,  m  w  ^±M,^^^mmm,ni^m  m, 
a  b$  *n  m  #,  &  n  z.,  wl  *  fig  m  n ,  &  T)  f&  m  $  t$,  rfn  *  k  ^  it  m,  m.  m  m 

(21  Bnvying  real  money  with  the  dead  was  common  during  the  Han  Jf|"  dynasty,  and 
in  subsequent  times.  The  use  of  paper  money  began  during  the  dynasties  of  Wei  f||  and 
Tsin  ^  (third  and  fourth  century).  It  had  at  first  a  hard  struggle  against  orthodoxy, 
which  absolutely  refused  to  approve  a  thing  unknown  to  the  holy  ancients.  In  the  seventh 
century,  it  took  the  shape  it  possesses  to-day.  The  Confucian  school  of  philosophy,  which 
nourished  during  the  Sung  -£  dynasty  (tenth  century),  sanctioned  its  use  in  the  worship  of 
111'- dead.     De  Groot.     The  Religious  System  of  China.     Vol.  II.  p.  71  I. 


—  119  — 

During  the  reign  of  Chen-tsung  ^  ^  (A.  D.  998-1023  ,  oi  the 
Sung  5jc  dynasty,  there  lived  an  official  called  Wang  Sze-tsung  3f 
l'pj  ^,  his  surname  being  H si-yuan  ft  ^c,  a  native  of  Fen-chow  :fy 
$\,  in  the  province  of  Skansi    |i|    g". 

Fulfilling  the  functions  of  Prefect  of  the  second  order,  he  forbade 
all  unorthodox  sacrifices,  and  had  the  temples  of  the  false  gods 
razed  to  the  ground.  Later  on,  he  was  promoted  to  the  rank  of 
viceroy.  Being  on  his  death-bed,  and  seeing  his  family  burning 
pieces  of  silk  in  order  to  procure  happiness,  he  cried  out  with  a 
strong  voice  and  ordered  them  to  cease,  saying:  "if  the  Spirits  are 
intelligent,   how  can  they  accept  bribes"?  (1 

During  the  reign  of  Hwei-tsung  ffi  £  a.  1).  L101-11 26  .  also 
of  the  Sung  ^  dynasty,  the  two  ministers  Kao-fung  ffi  \\\'f  and 
Liao  Yung-ckung  0  ||  cf),  presented  a  petition,  in  order  to  obtain 
that  the  burning  of  paper-money  be  prohibited,  saying:  "perforat- 
ing paper,  so  as  to  make  it  resemble  money,  and  binning  it  to 
procure  happiness,  is  an  absurd  practice  and  a  silly  delusion.  If  the 
Spirits  are  endowed  with  intelligence,  it  is  really  insulting  them"  (2). 

While  the  coffin  of  the  Emperor  Kao-tsung  l^j  ^  was  being 
borne  to  the  grave,  all  the  officials  burned  mock-money  before  his 
remains,  whereupon  the  heir-apparent,  subsequently  Hsiao-lsung 
^  ^  (A.  D.  1163-1190),  showed  his  disapproval  and  rebuked  them 
as  follows  :  "mock-money  is  a  Buddhist  practice  to  deliver  the  soul 
from  Hades  ;  my  Holy  Sire  needs  no  such  things"  (3). 

Chu-hsi  4c  ^  savs  :  "Nowadays,  whenever  a  burial  takes 
place,  one  must  bring  mock-money,  coloured  paper,  silks  and  other 
needless   articles.      When    they    have    been    burnt,    nothing    remains 


1 1)     See  Last  Memorials  of  the  Sun-  Emperors,  Sheng-tsung  tob-i  1?  t£  ^  *§•      ft  ~v: 

%  ft,  m  $b  &  g  m  w. 

(2)     See  Li  Tsi-wung  tze  hsin  luh  $  81  M  H  Hg  &     &  ^  $fl,  ^C  g  ft  <$,  %  ifJ  4\ 

m  m  m  %  m  ®,  if  i;  tit  m  m  ©  m,  n  vx  m  m  a*  jt  m  #,  *  *n  ffl  m  &  ft,  n 
m m xm z m,^  ft t  %. z  ®  n %, s %mv\%,m2. « ft £ 3ti  pi  1&. 

l3l     See  Yeb-hwoh-pien  $?  $  gg.     $S£g  7!/  fl  ft  #   K  IWg|,*.*l-±  #T 

Stjfl. 


—  120  — 

but  the  ashes,  useless  alike  for  the  living  and  the  dead.  These 
practices  are  far  inferior  to  those  of  ancient  times,  when  people 
offered  real  silver  and  garments,  each  one  according"  to  his  filial 
piety  and  means,  or  merely  a  foot-length  of  cloth,  a  bushel  of  millet", 
as  he  pleased. 

The  Book  of  Elites,  Li-I:i  jjjg  f{£,  contains  the  following  :  "lavish 
prodigality  is  blameworthy  as  much  as  stinginess;  sincere  respect 
excludes  both  extremes.  Tearful  regrets,  if  not  accompanied  by  some 
offerings  at  burials,  are  inadequate  in  the  eyes  of  every  enligthened 
person"  (1). 

As  may  be  seen  from  this  quotation,  Chu-hsi  £fc  Jt  prefers 
presents  in  kind,  as  was  the  custom  in  ancient  times.  Offerings 
must  be  made  and  mock-money  presented,  but  these  though  worth- 
less for  the  living  and  the  dead,  are  still  better  than  nothing  at  all. 
As  a  matter  of  fact,  all  the  literati  burn  mock-money  for  the  benefit 
of  their  deceased  ancestors.  They  inveigh  in  line  style  against  this 
ridiculous  ceremony,  but  in  practical  life  totally  forget  their  pompous 
outpourings.  Many  a  reader  might  be  pleased  to  hear  the  reasons 
advanced  in  defence  of  such  strange  conduct.  I  beg,  therefore,  to 
expose  briefly  here  a  few  of  the  arguments  exchanged  between 
foreign  missionaries  and  the  literati.  Some  of  these  I  have  heard, 
and  others  I  have  proposed  personally.  No  better  means  could  be 
found,  showing  the  flimsy  character  of  their  motives  for  adhering  to 
a  ceremonv,  which  in  reality  they  acknowledge  as  absurd,  but  still 
wish  to  practise  through  fear  of  offending  national  customs. 

The  Missionary. — Man,  during  his  life  here  below,  is  exposed 
to  hunger,  and  seeks  wherewith  to  apease  it  ;  he  suffers  from  cold, 
and  requires  clothes  to  protect  himself;  without  money  he  cannot  pro- 
cure the  good  things  of  life,  hence  the  necessity  of  having  money.  After 
death,  the  body  crumbles  to  dust  ;  the  soul,  being  a  spiritual  sub- 
stance, sutlers  neither  from  hunger  or  cold.  Had  it  a  heap  of  gold, 
all  would   be  absolutely  useless;  Of  what   avail    then  is  paper-money? 


li     See   Sung-yii    wen-pao  ch'ui-kien-luh  wai-tsik  $j?  if  £  %*}  Vfc  gl]  #  ^|<  J|.     4"  A 

'U  $  mmmm *& m  m  \%  &mKm,  s*  £  % m m  s,  %  % «  *  m m  t. m. 


—  121  — 
The  Chinaman.    -Confucius  says    that    we    must    treat  our    de- 
ceased parents  in  the  same  manner  as  when  they  were  living.    Now, 
a  loving  son  must  procure  money,  to  help  his  aged  parents    in    their 
needs,  and  it  is  for  this  reason  that  we  offer  them   paper-money. 

The  Missionary.  -  You  must  treat  your  deceased  parents  in 
the  same  manner  as  when  they  were  living.  Well,  during  then- 
lifetime,  did  you  give  them  paper  instead  of  money?  When  there- 
was  no  rice  in  the  house,  and  they  requested  you  to  procure  them 
some,  what  would  they  say.  if  you  gave  them  but  a  bundle  of  paper- 
ingots,  covered  with  tinfoil,  to  purchase  eatables? 

The  Chinaman. — Mock-money  is  the  currency  used  bv  the 
ghosts,  kwei  J^.  It  is  forwarded  them  by  burning  it;  that's  the 
custom. 

The  Missionary.  — Now,  after  burning  the  paper,  what  re- 
mains? Merely  a  little  ashes.  No  intelligent  person,  either  in  this  or 
the  ghost-world,  w7ould  ever  take  ashes  for  money.  Make  that  exper- 
iment, burn  a  little  paper,  and  with  the  ashes  which  remains,  try 
to  buy  whatever  you  please,  the  vendor  will  laugh  at  you,  or  perhaps 
consider  himself  insulted  by  the  very  fact  of  your  offering  him  ashes, 
instead  of  the  coin  of  the  realm.  Do  you  then  take  your  deceased 
parents  for  idiots  ? 

The  Chinaman.  —  Bv  no  means,  but  we  consider  that  in  for- 
warding them  this  burnt  paper-money,  they  can  use  it  to  bribe  a 
little  the  executioners  of  the  lower  world,  and  thanks  to  these  pre- 
sents secure  thereby  their  favour,  abridge  the  time  of  their  expiation, 
and  obtain  some  mitigation  of  their  sufferings. 

The  Missionary.  —  In  the  present  world,  gaolers  may  accept 
bribes,  and  without  the  approval  of  the  judges  mitigate  the  sentence 
of  prisoners,  but  in  the  nether  world  the  demons  cannot  cheat  the 
supreme  Ruler,  all-powerful,  -all-knowing,  and  who  will  grant  no 
favours  to  those  who  have  fallen  into  his  hands.  Moreover,  who 
has  ever  seen  the  ghosts,  Kwei  fy,  come  and  gather  up  the  ashes 
of  burnt  paper-money?  On  the  contrary,  do  we  not  see  every  day 
the  remains   of  these    ashes  trodden  under  foot,  abandoned   near  the 

16 


—  122  — 

graves,  or  swept  by  the  winds   into  drains  and    sinks?  The    ruler    of 
Hades  never  comes  to  gather  them  up,  why  then  burn  them  for  him? 
Besides,  do  you  consider  him  so  silly,   as  to  be  unable  to  distin- 
guish ashes  from  real  gold  and  silver? 

The  Chinaman .  —  1  am  ignorant  as  to  the  condition  of  things 
in  the  nether  world,  but  1  know  it  is  my  intention  in  offering  paper- 
money,  to  manifest  my  filial  piety  towards  my  deceased  parents  ; 
there  is  nothing  in  that  but  a  good  and  noble  feeling. 

The  Missionary .  —  Without  doubt,  your  purpose  is  good  and 
noble-minded,  but  it  is  exceedingly  to  be  regretted  that  you  employ 
a  means  quite  opposed  to  the  end  that  you  seek.  Let  me  simply  tell 
you  that  vou  grossly  insult  your  parents,  for  in  offering  them  ashes 
as  real  money,  von  deceive  them,  you  treat  them  as  absolute  idiots, 
who  cannot  even  discern  a  heap  of  ashes  from  a  silver  ingot.  They 
must  curse  you  in  the  nether  world,  and  deplore  your  hick  of  intelli- 
gence in  practical  matters.  The  first  rule  of  filial  piety  is  to  practise 
it  in  an  intelligent  manner. 

The  Chinaman.  —  J  don't  object,  but  it  is  the  custom  in  China, 
and  we  find  that  any  one  who  fails  to  observe  it,  is  lacking  in  filial 
piety. 

The  Missionary. —  Since  you  have  quoted  at  the  outset  the 
authority  of  Confucius,  you  will  not  take  it  ill  of  me  to  quote  him 
also  in  this  discussion.  All  those  who,  according  to  you,  do  not 
burn  paper- money  for  the  benefit  of  their  deceased  parents,  lack 
filial  piety;  but  have  you  well  considered  the  extent  of  your  words? 
Confucius,  your  greatest  Sage,  has  never  burnt  paper-money,  for  the 
very  good  reason  that  the  art  of  making  paper  was  invented  only 
several  hundred  years  after  his  death.  This  invention  is  due  to 
Ts'ai-lun  ^  jfa.  Therefore,  in  your  opinion,  Confucius  was  lacking 
in     filial     piety.      All    your    Sages    of    ancient    times,     Yao    M    (1), 


ll  Yao  0§,  stands  at  the  dawn  of  Chinese  history  as  a  model  of  all  virtue.  He 
ascended  the  throne  B.  C.  23f'7,  and  reigned  over  70.  some  say  even  over  90  years.  Mayers. 
Chinese  Reader's  Manual,  p.  27'2. 


—  123  — 

Shun  ^  (1),  Yii  the  Great  -fr  f%  (2),  the  duke  of  Chow.  Chow 
Kung  J$  ^  (3),  Meng-tze  jg  ^  (4),  so  many  illustrious  personam 
down  to  Wnng-yii  3£  3E&,  who  lived  in  the  YIN1'  century  of  the 
christian  era,  and  all  these  Lacking  in  filial  piety,  for  it  was  the 
above  Wang-yiX  3£  J&,  who  first  introduced  this  custom ,  and  histo- 
rians attack  his  memory,  because  by  this  absurd  invention  he 
abandoned  the  ancient  traditions  of  his  ancestors,  preferring  the  si  11  \ 
nonsense  of  Buddhists,  to  the  customs  handed  down  from  the  remotest 
antiquity. 

I  have  never  found  a  scholar,  who  has  been  able  to  reply  to  this 
last  argument.  Confucius  showed  filial  piety  without  burning  mock- 
money,  so  I  can  well  follow  his  example.  This  short  dialogue 
exhibits  amply  why  paper-money  is  burnt  for  the  benefit  of  the  dead. 


(1)  Another  of  the  legendary  heroes  of  China's  Golden  Age.  He  succeeded  Yao  ^  on 
the  throne,  and  mourned  for  him  during  three  years.     Mayers.  Chinese  Reader's  Manual. 

(-2 1  Successor  to  Shun  ${r.  He  completed  the  work  of  controlling  the  waterways  oi 
China.  Confucius  said  of  him  that  he  displayed  the  utmost  filial  piety  towards  the  Spirits. 
Mayers.    Ibid. 

(3)  Younger  brother  of  the  first  sovereign  of  the  Chow  JU  dynasty.  He  is  ranked 
in  virtue,  wisdom  and  honours,  as  yielding  place  only  to  the  great  rulers  of  antiquity,  Sao 
%  and  Shun  ffi.     He  died  full  of  years  B.  C.  110.">.  Mayers.  Ibid. 

(4)  Mencius.  B.  C.  372-289.  Philosopher  a«d  moralist,  second  only  to  Confucius, 
whose  doctrines  he  expounded  and  commented.  His  works,  collected  by  his  disciples,  form 
one  of  the  Four  classics.     Mayers.  Ibid. 


—  124  — 

ARTICLE    V. 
BUDDHIST    BELLS. 

Tolling  of  Buddhist  IjpII*.  Chvoang-fan-chung  |f  ^  fit. 

In  almost  all  Buddhist  monasteries,  may  be  seen  a  bell,  which 
is  tolled  by  the  monks  morning  and  evening.  These  regular  tollings 
comprise  a  series  of  108  strokes.      This  number  108  represents  : 

1°.      The  twelve  months  of  the  year  =  12. 

2°.  The  twenty-four  divisions  of  the  Chinese  year,  correspond- 
ing to  the  different  positions  which  the  sun  occupies  with  reference 
to  the  12  signs  of  the  zodiac.  These  24  terms,  or  tsieh  fp,  divide 
the  solar  year  into  24  periods  of  almost  equal  duration.  They  are  the 
following:  Slight  cold,  Great  cold,  Beginning  of  Spring.  Bain  water, 
Excited  insects,  Vernal  equinox,  Pure  brightness,  Corn  rain,  Beginn- 
ing of  Summer,  Small  fulness  (grain  fills),  Sprouting  seeds  (grain 
in  ear),  Summer  solstice,  Slight  heat,  Great  heat,  Beginning  of 
Autumn,  Stopping  of  heat,  White  dew,  Autumnal  equinox,  Cold 
dew,  Frost's  descent,  Beginning  of  Winter,  Slight  snow,  Heavy 
snow.   Winter  solstice  =  24. 

3°.  The  72  divisions  of  the  Chinese  year  into  terms  of  5  days. 
Each  of  these  terms  of  five  days  is  denominated  "Hen"  |^|.  Now, 
the  number  72  X  5  gives  the  Chinese  year  of  360  days. 

Adding  up  the  months,  the  twenty-four  terms  or  tsieh  fp,  and 
the  periods  of  five  days  or  "hen"  j|}|,  in  a  year,  we  have  the  total 
of  12  +  24  +  72  =  108.  It  is  the  whole  year  which  is  thus  entirely 
devoted  to  the  honour  of  Buddha. 

The  manner  of  ringing  these  108  strokes  varies  according  to 
different  places.      The    following    are    a  few  selections. 

1°.  At  Hang-chow  jfc  >}]],  Capital  of  Chekiang  '$f  ££  province, 
the  tolling  is  regulated  by  the  following  quartet,  which  has  become 
a  popular  tune  ; 


Cloche  et  chapelet  bouddhiques. 
Buddhist  bell  and  beads. 


—  125  — 

At  the  beginning,  strike  thirty-six  strokes  ; 
At  the  end,  still  thirty-six  again  ; 
Hurry  on  with  the  thirty-six  in  the  middle: 
You  have  in  all  but  one  hundred  and  eight,  then  stop. 
36  +  36  4-36  =  108. 

2°.      At  Shao-hsing  $g  M,  another    quartet  has  the  following  : 

Lively  toll  eighteen  strokes  ; 
Slowly  the  eighteen  following  ; 
Repeat  this  series  three  times, 
And  one  hundred  and  eight  you  will  reach. 
(18  -f  18)  X  3=  108. 

3°.  At  T'ai-clww  ■£*  '}\\,  another  city  in  Chekiang  ffi  fr  pro- 
vince, we  find  the  following  ditty  : 

At  the  beginning,  strike  seven  strokes  ; 
Let  eight  others  follow  these  ; 
Slowly  toll  eighteen  in  the  middle  ; 
Add  three  more  thereto  ; 
Repeat  this  series  thrice  ; 
The  total  will  be  one  hundred  and  eight. 
(7  -f  8  -f  18  -f.  3)  X  3  =  1 08. 

Why  these  bells  are  tolled. —  Although  the  manner  of  ringing 
differs  according  to  different  places,  it  is  fancied  everywhere,  that 
the  sound  of  the  bell  procures  relief  and  solace  to  the  souls  tormen- 
ted in  the  Buddhist  hell.  It  is  thought  that  the  undnlatorv  vibra- 
tions, caused  by  the  ringing  of  the  bells,  provoke  to  madness  the 
king  of  the  demons,  T'oh-wang  jVf;  2i,  render  him  unconscious, 
blunt  the  sharp-edged  blades  of  the  torturing  tread-mill,  and  also 
damp  the  ardour  of  the  devouring  flames  of  Hades. 

At  the  death  of  the  first  Empress  Ma  J§,  of  the  Ming  0^ 
dynasty,  every  Buddhist  monastery  tolled  thirty  thousand  strokes 
for  the  relief  of  her  soul,  because  according  to  the  Buddhist  doctrine, 
the  departed  on  hearing  the  ringing  of  a  bell  revive.      It  is   for   this 


—  126  — 

reason  that  the  tolling  must  be  performed  slowly  (1). 

Chinese  writers  refute  these  Buddhist  notions  about  bells. 

We  read  in  the  Lii-shi  ch'un-is'iu  g  ^  ^  ^  (2),  that  the 
Emperor  Hwang-ti  jif  ^f  (3),  ordered  Ling-lun  \§  f§}  to  cast  twelve 
bells,   in  order  to  fix  the  musical  notes  (4). 

The  work  known  as  Yoh-ki  |(j§  §£  (Memorial  of  Music),  says  : 
"the  tolling   of  bells  is  used  as  a  signal"  $\   1/1  ffi. 

According  to  these  two  writers,  such  is  the  precise  purpose  for 
which  bells  are  used.  They  either  give  forth  musical  notes,  or  they 
are  rung  to  give  signals  (of  joy,  sadness  or  alarm...),  but  there  was 
never  any  idea  of  employing  them  to  rescue  the  dead.  The  work 
entitled  "Shi-ming"  fp  ^  I  Buddhist  names'1,  has  the  following:  "the 
bell  is  a  hollow  instrument  ;  the  larger  it  is,  the  deeper  are  its 
sounds,  but  who  could  cast  one  large  enough  to  make  its  tollings 
heard  in  the  infernal  regions?  Even  should  that  happen,  such  a  sound 
is  but  a  mere  empty  noise,  incapable  of  awing  the  ruler  of  Hades, 
and  powerless  also  to  break  the  sharp-edged  tread-mill  which  tortures 
the  damned.      Wealthy  families,  desirous   of  rescuing  from    hell    the 


(!      See  Liang-pan  ts'iu-yu-hoh  M  *&  %k  ffi  i£. 

Ts'ih  siu  lei  kao     -t  %■  M  Wl-         Shi  wen  lei  tsii  %  ^C 

Leng-kia  king       $§  fj&B  $!.  Yung  chw'ang  siao  p'in     ;jg  l]lf  /J>  n". 

*^Ktitin8-w?A  t,  *  ik  ft  «,  t£  &  m  ■£  m,  &  m  ®  m  ^  m, 

kn  fc  'HI  iz,ilH  +  ^fi5  +  ^,  1'M  =  +  ^¥  ,§,  i«-IA» 
,§.,  $3  PI  8K  e.  fg  +  A.  It  +  /l,  H  m  ^  $  -  W  A,  £  ffl  1:  E,  M  »  -fc.  &  $  A, 
*  Pnl  +  A  &  ft  H,  H  ®  6£  ft  *  H  @.  =  £  *  ^  -  W  Ai  #  g  «p  g  €  n>  B 

i5i  a  a  v  m  m  m  m  m  &,  nt  *  w  jm,  gg  $«#?,£  *  #  «,  0/1  ft  *  ©  m  % 

«t#ftiHitt,igfflti  *fe  ft  g  g  #,  f$  it  '2  Id «, «  #  w  -m  m. 

(2)  A  miscellaneous  treatise  in  2G  books,  embodying  many  historical  facts  regarding 
the  early  history  of  China,  for  which  it  is  the  only  authority.  The  work  is  ascribed  to  Lii 
Peh-wei  g  ~%.  ijt,  who  lived  in  the  3rd  century  B.  C.  Wylie.  Notes  on  Chinese  Literature. 
p.  157. 

(3)  The  Yellow  Emperor,  so  called  because  he  reigned  under  the  influence  of  the 
element  earth.  One  of  the  five  legendary  sovereigns  who  ruled  at  the  dawn  of  Chinese 
history,  B.  C.  2697-2597.  He  is  looked  upon  as  the  founder  of  the  Empire,  and  the  inventor 
of  music  and  Fine  Arts.     Mayers.  Chinese  Reader's  Manual. 

(4)  See  Hwo-wu-yin  ^[1  3l  W  Mayers  says  these  musical  bells  were  also  used  for 
denoting  the  12  seasons. 


—  127  — 

souls  of  their  ancestors,  offer  presents  to  the  Buddhist  monasteries, 
in  order  that  the  monks  would  toll  the  bells  unceasingly  day  and 
night,  and  perform  this  service  even  for  several  successive  days. 
They  may  toll  them  till  they  deafen  the  ears  of  the  neighbours,  who 
curse  and  swear  at  them  ;  they  mav  ring  till  the  bells  burst,  they 
will  never  thereby  rescue  a  single  soul  ou1  of  Hades.  It  matters 
little  whether  they  toll  a  brass  bell  or  strike  on  a  wooden  one,  the 
result  is  practically  useless  in  both  cases"  i\  . 


(-11     See.  Buddhist  mimes.  Shi-ming  ff  %.     g|  ^  ■&,  ^  fj?  M  *,  '£  M.  M  £,  fl'J  §¥ 

w  m  m,  m  £  t&  m  ^  &  *  t.  m<  &  &  m  m  m  m  m  ¥,  m  b  is  &,  ^  ti  fi  £ 
m  m,  m  tg «  m  %  .*, » #r  &j  ^  ¥,  ^  s  2  *,  $  @  is  &  m,  #  it «  m  m,  & 
m  Jn  it,  k  &  ^  :  *g,  n:  is  ©:  0,  $  m.  m  m  &  i^,  m  %  t#  m,  rp  ®  a*  $  *£  n  & 
#,  *  ^  te  is  *s  -  31,  £  ®  P  *1  8,  JE  &  ®:  *  a  «•  -^  k  • 


—  128  — 

ARTICLE    VI. 

SENDING  PAPER-HOUSES  TO  THE  DEAD. 

Chi-fang-tze  §fc  M  =?  ■ 

In  the  province  of  Nga.n-h.wei  4£  |^,  it  is  customary  at  the 
death  of  a  person  to  offer  him  a  paper-house,  as  well  as  the  imple- 
ments, clothes  and  precious  objects,  which  he  was  wont  to  use 
while  living.  All  these  paper  articles  are  burnt,  and  thus  conveyed 
to  the  departed  soul  (1). 

Paper-houses,  similar  to  the  above,  are  also  used  throughout 
Kiang-su  •/£  ffft  province.  The  framework  is  made  of  reed-splints, 
covered  over  with  paper  of  various  hues.  The  parlour,  inner  passage- 
ways and  rooms,  resemble  as  closely  as  possible  the  homestead 
formerly  occupied  by  the  deceased.  Tables,  chairs,  a  divan,  tea- 
poys, in  fine  all  the  requisites  of  a  well  furnished  house  are  disposed 
therein. 

The  paper-house  is  then  taken  to  an  open  space,  and  there 
burnt,  in  order  to  have  it  conveyed  to  the  nether  world  for  the 
benefit  of  the  dead. 

Reasoning  with  these  folks  is  useless.  After  death,  they  are 
told  that  the  body  crumbles  to  dust,  and  that  the  soul  needs  no 
house  to  dwell  therein.  Admitting  even  that  it  did,  a  paper-house 
would  afford  protection  neither  from  wind  nor  rain,  and  much  less 
after  it  has  been  burnt,  as  the  wind  scatters  the  ashes  on  all  sides, 
and  nobody  gathers  them  up,  to  rebuild  the  house  in  the  world  of 
shades,  and  thus  render  it  serviceable  to  the  dead. 

You  will  ever  get  the  same  answer.  It  is  the  custom !  It 
matters  little  as  to  how  things  stand  in  the  nether  world.  Burning 
is  the  means  of  communication   between  the  living  and  the  dead. 

No  son,  without  being  wanting  in  filial    piety,  can  fail   to    send 


(1)     Yin  hsueh  kan  sui  pih  flj  8  |f  Eg  *.     %k  f&  A  5E,  &  ft!  ?K  B  -  M,  #  *-  M 

m  m  &  m  &  *  ft  &  *  ft  vj.  m. 


Fig.  58 


Une  maison  de  papier. 
Paper-house  burnt  for  the  benefit  of  the  dead. 


—  129  — 

to  his  aged  parents  in  the  nether    world  a  full-furnished    home,    and 
should    neo-converts    to    Christianity    refuse    to    comply    with    these 
unjust  requirements,    they    are    forthwith    condemned    by    public    op 
in  ion  and  cruelly  persecuted. 

The  custom  of  making  these  paper-houses  existed  already  at  the 
beginning  of  the  Yuan  j£  dynasty.  In  A.I).  12X7.  in  the  VIIth 
year  of  the  style  Chi-yuan  jg  7c,  during  the  reign  of  the  Emperor 
Shi-tsu  |ti-  jji§.  (1),  the  President  of  the  Hoard  of  Punishments  offi- 
cially informed  the  Emperor,  that  among  the  common  people,  money 
was  needlessly  wasted  in  making  paper-houses  and  other  superstitious 
objects,  and  he  petitioned  that  such  abuses  should  be  suppressed.  An 
Imperial  Edict  was  forthwith  issued,  forbidding  to  make  any  such 
paper-houses,  as  well  as  paper-manikins  and   paper-horses  (2). 

It  seems  very  probable  that  the  custom  of  burning  paper-houses 
for  the  benefit  of  the  dead,  has  been  correlative  with  that  of  burning 
mock-money,  paper-horses  etc...  This  latter  began  under  the  T'a.ng 
^  dynasty,  A.  D.  739.  People  fancied,  that  since  it  was  sufficient 
to  burn  ingots  of  paper-money  for  the  benefit  of  the  dead,  they  could 
also  through  the  same  process  send  them  other  things  in  kind  : 
clothes,  houses  etc...  These  paper-houses  are  equipped  with  all 
necessary  household  articles  :  wardrobes,  chairs,  tables,  a  cooking- 
stove,  kitchen  utensils,  servants  etc...  Nothing  in  tine  is  wanting, 
not  even  the  requisites  for  opium  smoking.  This  is  the  last  stage 
of  modern  progress. 


(1)     Better  known  to  foreigners  as  Kubhil  Khan.  After  subduing  China,  In-  1  sUblished 
the  Mongol  dynasty,  which  ruled  the  country  A.  D.  12S(,-13C8 

J 1     Yuan  tien  chang  76  A  #•     li"  )M  M  7C  "t  ^,  M  ^  Mi  *  *  ffi,  &  ffi  $>  &  M 


17 


—  130  — 

ARTICLE    VII. 

PLACING  STREAMERS  OX  GRAVES. 

Chi-fan-tze  &  jjg  ?■ 

In  ancient  times,  a  small  Hag  was  erected  beside  the  grave,  in 
order  to  distinguish  it  from  others  by  means   of  this  special  mark. 

At  the  present  day,  many  persons  place  a  bamboo  on  the  house- 
top. Buddhists  teach  that  the  departed  soul,  wandering  in  space, 
uses  this  as  a  landmark  to  discover  its  tomb.  It  is  for  this  reason 
that  a  tall  bamboo  is  chosen,  to  the  extremity  of  which  is  attached 
a  streamer,   Fan-tze  f^  ^- ,   II uttering  in  the  air  (1). 

The  ancients  set  up  a  flag  beside  the  grave,  in  order  to  indicate 
its  ownership  and  distinguish  it  from  others,  while  at  the  same 
time  the  name  of  the  deceased  was  written  on  a  board  placed  in 
front  of  the  coffin. 

Nowadays,  people  believe  in  the  teaching  of  the  Buddhist  priests, 
who  assert  that  the  departed  soul  wanders  in  space,  and  cannot 
find  out  its  resting-place;  a  high  pole  is,  therefore,  set  up  and  a 
streamer  attached  to  the  extremity  of  it.  The  streamer  bears  the 
name  of  the  deceased,  who,  thanks  to  this  device,  is  enabled  to  find 
out  his  way. 

Buddhists  hold  that  the  soul  after  death,  either  goes  to  the 
Western  Paradise  (2),  or  it  must  pass  through  the  eighteen  de- 
partments of  Hell,  or  return  to  the  world  of  the  living  through  the 
process  of  the  metempsychosis.    Now,  here  we  find  these  same  people 


(1)     See  Ch'ao  kin-  ugan   Chen  luh    man   ch'ao  M  JR  S  ft  H  ¥k  #.     ~£  %  M  M  U 

m,  m  n  #  £  m  m  '&  m  m-  &  vx  m  m  £,  &  ®  £  m  ft  ^  m  &  &  m,  m  k  & 
m  m  #,  m  n  #  £  *s,  ^  ®  *  %  n  itb  m  m,  m.  n  *s  *  m  m<  ^  a  m  m,  %  t. 

urn. 

|2)  A  latter-day  substitution  for  Nirvana,  a  pbilosopbical  conception  too  abstruse  for 
tbe  popular  imagination.  Tins  so-called  happy  land  is  ruled  by  Amitabba  and  the  Bod- 
liissatvas,  Kwan-vin  and  Ta  Shih-cbi  (the  Indian  Mahastbama),  the  "three  Holy  Ones"  of 
Buddhism.     Haekiuann.  Chinese  Buddhism,  p.  213. 


\0 


be 


V. 

■^ 

C 

. 

~- 

!_ 

Cr 

O 

Cu 

cc 

w 

Cl 

^ 

<D 

*D 

C, 

X 

n 

D 

CD 
<U 

CO 

~ 

cc 

r 

(h 

c 

o 

eu 

■J) 

<V 

y. 

J 


—  131  — 
teaching  that  the  soul  wanders  in  space,  withoul    knowing   where  to 
go  to;  that  it  even  requires  to  see    its    name    written    on    a    strip    of 
cloth,  in  order  to  find  out  its   dwelling-place.      Is    not    all    this    sell 
contradictory  ? 

In  the  work  entitled  "the  Great  Learning"  Ta-hsioh  A  ^  (1 
the  poet  says:  "the  twittering  yellow  bird  (a  species  ol  oriole)  rests 
on  a  corner  of  the  mound".  Confucius  said  :  "when  it  rests,  it  knows 
where  to  rest.  Is  it  possible  that  a  man  should  not  be  equal  to 
this  bird"?  This  means  that  every  being  knows  its  proper  resting- 
place. 

This  yellow  bird,  which  is  so  tiny  among  the  feathered  tribe, 
Hits  in  the  air,  and  has  no  need  of  a  landmark  to  fly  to  the  corner 
of  the  mound,  where  it  chooses  to  alight. 

If  really  the  soul  of  man,  as  Buddhism  teaches,  wanders  in 
space  and  cannot  find  out  its  grave,  without  seeing"  this  guiding 
flag,  then  we  must  admit  that  man's  soul  is  less  intelligent  than 
the  little  yellow  bird.  Formerly,  a  distinguished  Chinese  grandee 
said  in  eulogising  the  Emperor  Yao  ^  :  "he  has  ascended  bevond 
the  fleecy  clouds,  and  dwells  in  the  happy  land  of  rulers"  (2). 

The  Book  of  Odes,  Shi-ta-ya  ff  A  5f|.  says:  "Wen  Wang  % 
3£  (3)  is  on  high  ;  the  wise  kings  and  the  three  sovereigns  are  in 
heaven"  #  ^  £  _fc.    =   Ja   £  Ji- 

The  place  where  the  good  are  rewarded,  cannot  be  the  same  as 
that  where  the  wicked  are  punished. 


(1)     One  of  the  four  lesser  Classics.     It  contains  11   chapters,   one   by   Confucius,   and 
the  10  others  by  his  disciple  Tseng-ts'an  ^  3$|.    Wylie. Notes  on    Chinese  Literature,  p.  7 
(J,     See  Chwang-tze  £  -f.    %  A  %,  &  U  W  IX  fft  M,  &  S  *  2,  M  M  %  tt,  fj 

m  m  %  m  jfc,  £  a  n-  &  %  in  n-&  &  m  m  a  je,  m  s  .if:  2.  A 1  %  £  ft  m 

(3)     The  posthumous  and  canonised  title  given  to  Si-Peb  M  i&  (tbe  Western  chieftain  . 
duke  of  Chow  Jg).    He  was  a  pattern  of  princely  virtues,  and  united  the  principal  chiefti 
against  the  misrule  of  the  Shang  jgj  dynasty,  which  his  son,  W'u  Wang  R  3r ,  succeeded  in 
overthrowing  B.  C.  1122.     Mayers.  Chinese  Reader's  Manual,  p.  177. 


—  132  — 

Tyrants  like  Kieh  %  (1),  and  Chow  $-  (2),  wicked  men  like  Tao- 
chi  ^  iS  (3),  cannot  by  any  means  live  together  with  Yao  ^  and 
Wen  Wang  ^£  ^E,  and  dwell  in  the  blissful  abode  of  rulers.  Such 
are  the  principal  arguments  whereby  Chinese  writers  refute  the  above 
Buddhist  doctrine.  Our  great  Worthies  dwell  in  a  happy  land,  the 
realm  of  rulers,  whence  tyrants  are  excluded.  Therefore  souls  do 
not  wander  in  space  as  Buddhists  assert. 


(1)  Kieh-kwei  |j|  §|,  the  last  ruler  of  the  Hsia  "H  dynasty.  Voluptuous,  cruel  and 
extravagant,  he  became  an  object  of  hatred  to  his  people,  and  was  compelled  to  flee  to  Nan 
ch'ao  ^  ^  (in  the  present  province  of  Ngan-hwei),  where  he  died  B.C.  17'ifi.  Mayers. 
Chinese  Reader's  Manual. 

(2)  Chow-sin  £j"  5^.  the  abandoned  tyrant,  who  closed  the  Shanj,'  $|j  dynasty.  Among 
his  vices,  were  extravagance  and  unbridled  lust.  Defeated  by  Wu  Wang,  he  rled  to  a  tower, 
set  it  on  fire,  and  perished  miserably  in  the  flames.     Mayers.  Ibid. 

(3)  A  leader  of  thieves;  a  sort  of  Robin  Hood  in  early  Chinese  history. 


Fig.  60 


La  roue  de  la  metempsycose. 
The  wheel  of  the  Metempsychosis. 


—  133  — 
ARTICLE    VIII. 

i  hi:  metempsychosis. 

Lun-hwui  ijtjft  ;^|. 

The  metempsychosis  is  a  Buddhist  doctrine,  teaching  thai  man's 
soul  alter  death  may  be  reborn,  either  in  another  human  being  or 
into  the  body  of  one  of  the  brute  kind. 

At  the  death  of  a  person,  according  to  Buddhists,  "the  kin-  oi 
the  revolving  wheel",  Ckwen-lun  Wang  |f  ij$j-  3:  (1),  who  presides 
over  the  tenth  department  of  Hades,  examines  and  weighs  1  lu-  o-ood 
and  evil  deeds  of  men  during  their  mortal  existence,  and  accordirjo 
to  their  merits  or  demerits,  sends  them  to  the  four  great  continents 
(2),  in  order  that  they  may  be  reborn  there  as  men  or  women, 
enjoy  a  long"  or  short  life,  and  be  either  rich  or  poor. 

The  soul  of  great  sinners  is  handed  over  to  the  demon-torturer 
Yeh-ch'a  ^  %  (3),  who  slays  it  with  peach-rods.  After  its  death, 
it  is  transformed  into  a  murdered  ghost  or  Tsih  ^,  hence  the  pagan 
saving:  "man  after  his  death  becomes  a  Kwei  j||,  and  the  Kwei  j^ 
is  transformed  into  a  Tsih  ^jf".  The  head  and  face  of  this  murdered 
ghost  are  changed,  and  he  is  reborn  in  the  womb  of  a  mother,  or 
emerges  from  an  egg.  He  appears  in  the  forenoon  and  expires  in 
the  afternoon,  and  may  crawl  or  run  on  the  ground.  His  expia- 
tion over,  he  is  reborn  as  a  man,  but  in  some  wild  country,  where 
he  dwells  in  caverns  or  holes,  and  is  clothed  with  animal  skins. 
When,    through    his    endeavours,    he    has    repaired    the    past,    he    is 

(1)  The  revolving  wheel  symbolises  Uie  doctrine  of  transmigration,  ami  answers  to  the 
Sanscrit  "Scmsaru"  ^  Jfc  ^<  $£.  the  great  sea  of  life  and  death,  human  existence,  which 
must  be  crossed  to  reach  Nirvana.     Eitel.  Sanscrit-Chinese  Dictionary. 

(2)  According  to  the  cosmogony  of  the    Buddhisl    Sutras,   these   lour  continent 
islands,  lie  respectively  South,  East,  North,  and  West  of  M(   Mem,   the  sacred    mountain 
forming  the  centre  of  the  universe.     India  and   China  are   comprised  within   the  limits  of 
the  first  continent.     Mayers.  Chinese  Header's  Manual,  p.  310. 

(3)  In  Sanscrit  "YaJcsha,".  These  demons  air  messengers  of  Yam  a,  the  judge  of  the 
dead,  and  especially  of  the  Dragon  King,  who  guards  the  seas  around  M1  .Mem.  They  are 
represented  with  red  hair,  green  faces,  bare  legs,  and  carry  a  tripod  on  their  shoulders, 
Williams. Dictionary  of  the  Chinese  Language  i$E  %■ 


—  134  — 

granted  the  favour  of  a  new  existence,  and  may  be  reborn  as  a   Chi- 
nese citizen. 

Those,  who  during  their  lifetime,  have  practised  the  four  social 
virtues  of  equity,  rectitude,  meekness  and  justice,  are  sent  to  the 
realm  of  perfect  bliss,  Kih-loh-kwoh  ^  |^f  gf],  the  Buddhist  para- 
dise of  the  West,  where  there  is  perpetual  happiness,  and  no  end  of 
feasting  and  dancing   (1). 

The  realm  of  perfect  bliss.  Kih-loh  J$ji  |^§,  lies  ten  thousand 
million  miles  to  the  West  of  China.  No  pain  or  suffering  is  found 
there,  and  all  that  is  harmful  or  unpleasant  is  banished  therefrom 
(2).  According  to  Buddhists,  those  who  have  led  a  perfect  life  go 
to  this  happy  land  of  Kih-loh  Jfy\  |^,  situated  ten  thousand  million 
miles  to  the  West.  Now,  the  entire  circumference  of  the  earth  is 
but  twenty-five  thousand  miles.  It  is,  therefore,  mere  mockery  to 
place  the  Western  Paradise  so  far  away,  and  these  folks  deserve  the 
utmost  contempt  of  all  learned  persons.  Such  are  some  of  the  reflex- 
ions of  "Young  China". 

Summary  of  lh<>  arguments  set  forth  by  Chinese  writer*  against 
the  existence  of  the   Western  Paradise. 

According  to  this  opinion,  the  bad  are  transformed  into  fish, 
worms,  birds,  or  brutes.  Now,  if  a  person  but  considers  attentivelv 
the  whole  world,  evil-doers  form  no  small  portion  of  humanity,  so 
after  a  certain  number  of  generations,  no  real  men  would  be  found 
on  this  earth,  all  those  who  were  formerly  men,  having  been  changed 
into  fish,  insects,   birds  or  brutes. 

The  population  of  the  globe  is  ever  increasing,  and  the  present- 
day  statistics  show  it  is  many   thousand  times    greater   than    in    the 


(1)  See  the  Classic  of  YTen-wang,   Yen  wang-king  M  ±  £«.     il  A   -  K,  l§  $m  3:  S[i 

m  &  #  ±  »  m,  m  £  ^  a.  8  #  ijli  *  u  m  a  &,  #  m  %  *  m  x  s  *  a  m, 
ji m m it* m %. & &,  % « % m & f* ti "& m m,  # m & ar,  n *. w % m it, 
w  $  %  ^  ^  i&  %,  &  %  ^  it  %,  &  it  #i  m,  #  n  a  £,  ©  m  x  %  m.  m  z.  ts, 
m  «  s  m  ±  k,  m  &  ¥  ^  m  &,  in  m  m  >t>  m  m,  ynnm^m  a  £,  /l  ® 
je  t »  #,  ig  a  «  &  m  m  m  nt  if. 

(2)  Record  of  popular  customs,   T'ung-suh-pien  jj§  ^  IS-     @!  #  3&.  "t"  M  tft  M,  ^F 

w  ft  %  mm  %  &  m%>  m  a  %  mmm,=.  m  s.m  m. 


CO 

bC 


— w 

e 
| 

I? 
1 1 

CO     ~= 

*«. 

in     ^ 

c 

C     -c: 

efl       er 

c 


efl 

> 


c 


«"  £ 


o 

en 

C 


be    8 

c     o 

CO    -c 


***** 


=■  /J/fy^ 


CO 
be 


—  135  — 

early  period  of  the  world's  history;  if  we,  therefore,  admit  as  Budd- 
hists do,  that  this  immense  number  of  beings  may  be  reborn,  then 
uobody  can  engage  in  marriage,  as  it  may  happen  that  the  husbands 
wife  would  be  his  own  mother,  or  the  wife  may  have  for  husband 
her  own  father,  reborn  into  the  world. 

Officials  may  no  longer  beat  the  common  people:  a  master  ma} 
have  no  servants,  lest  these  menials  be  his  own  patents,  superiors, 
teachers  or  friends,   who  have  returned  to  a  new  existence. 

Moreover,  if  after  death,  men  become  fish,  insects,  birds  or 
brutes,  no  one  may  henceforth  employ  water-buffaloes  for  ploughing 
the  fields,  or  may  ride  a  horse  to  travel  over  the  country. 

Lice,  mosquitoes,  all  kinds  of  insects,  may  also  bite,  sting  and 
annoy  you  as  they  please,  and  you  dare  not  kill  them,  lest  they  be 
your  own  parents  or  kinsfolk,  who  have  returned  to  the  present 
world. 

The  metempsychosis  destroys  all  social  relations,  renders  lite 
intolerable,  and  is  opposed  to  common  sense. 

Mencius,  Meng-tze  ^  -^p,  says  :  "the  nature  of  the  dog  is  the 
same  as  that  of  the  ox,  but  man's  nature  differs  from  both.  Human 
beings  are  absolutely  different  from  brutes".  If  man  may  be  reborn 
as  a  brute,  then  his  natxire  differs  in  nowise  from  that  of  the  beasts 
of  the  field. 

All  the  extravagances  of  Buddhist  monks  and  adherents,  making 
vain  and  fruitless  efforts  to  avoid  killing  sentient  beings,  result 
from  this  ridiculous  doctrine.  Should  any  one  attempt  to  draw  all 
possible  consequences  therefrom,  and  put  them  into  practice,  he 
would  doubtless  be  considered  as  a  madman.  Theoretically,  these 
Chinese  writers  display  much  common  sense,  as  everybody  sees,  but 
in  ordinary  life,    no  one  scarcely  pays  attention   to  what   they  say. 

Compendious  view  of  the  system  of  the  Metempsychosis. 

For  the  sake  of  clearness,  it  is  considered  useful  to  give  a  con- 
cise view,    a    brief   summary,  outlining    the    general    features    of    the 


—  136  — 

Chinese  belief  in  the  system  of  the  metempsychosis.  The  spirit 
reborn  is  the  superior  or  rational  soul,  called  according  to  circum- 
stances Hwun  jfc,  Slieu  jjj$,  or  Kwei  fy  (1).  This  soul  may  be  re- 
incarnated in  sundry  manners. 

1".  By  way  of  possession,  entering  into  the  body  of  a  living 
man  and  abiding  therein.  It  then  uses  his  eyes  to  see,  and  his 
mouth  to  speak,  etc...  Such  a  man  has  thus  two  distinct  souls, 
namely  his  own,  and  that  which  temporarily  indwells  in  him,  as  in 
cases  of  diabolical  possession.  These  two  souls,  according  to  orthodox 
Buddhists,  cannot  enter  the  one  into  the  other. 

According  to  the  followers  of  Chu-hsi's  ^  ^  school,  these  two 
souls  may  co-penetrate  and  coalesce  into  one  soul,  in  the  same 
manner  as  two  glasses  of  water  poured  into  a  bottle,  combine  and 
form  but  one  bottle  of  the  same  liquid. 

2°.  Hi/  returning  and  re-entering  the  same  body.  A  departed 
soul  may  sometimes  return  into  the  body  which  it  has  abandoned 
at  death  (2),  provided  the  corpse  has  remained  uncorrupted  (3).  On 
such  a  belief  is  founded   the  error,   nowadays  so  common,  of  recalling 

the  soul. 

t 

3°.  By  way  of  substitution.  If  a  soul,  deprived  of  its  own 
body  for  some  reason  or  other,   finds  along  its   way    the  still  uncorr- 


(11  The  universe  is  a  compound  of  an  infinite  number  of  Kwei  jjfj,  and  Shen  jj$,  con- 
tinuously infused  into  men  and  animals.  In  ancient  times,  the  Chinese  knew  but  the  Kwei 
j|[,  the  Shen  jji$  came  later  on.  The  Kwei  $|  is  the  material  soul,  emanating  from  the- earth, 
and  returning  thereto  after  death.  It  remains  with  the  body  in  the  grave.  The  Shen  jf$ 
is  the  superior  soul,  emanating  from  tbe  ethereal  part  of  the  cosmos,  the  great  Yang  $H 
principle.  It  is  manifested  by  th<-  k'i  ^,  or  breath.  After  death,  it  ascends  to  the  higher 
regions,  there  to  live  on  as  lurid  matter,  Sben-ming  jf$  (JJj.  The  hwun  z$|  is  the  energy  of 
the  SI  in  i  jjSiJI.  De  Groot.  The  Religious  System  of  China.  Vol.  IV.  p.  5.  (the  soul  in  philosophy). 

(2)  During  lifetime,  Chinese  adniii  the  temporary  separation  of  the  soul  from  the 
body,  as  in  dreams  and  occasionally  in  trance  and  coma.  These  cases  are,  however,  hut 
insensibility.  After  death,  the  soul  may  also  return,  and  this  may  take  place  after  months 
and  years.  Cases  of  revival  are  even  chronicled  in  the  Standard  Histories  All  these  tales 
heir  a  deep  Buddhist  tinge.     De  Groot.     The   Religious   System  of  China.   Vol.   IV.  p.  123j 

nscitation  by  one's  own  soul). 

(3)  Or  at  least,  in  a  condition  good  enough  for  the  soul  to  re-settle  in  it.  I>e  Groot. 
Ibid.  p.  130. 


■*3*^ 


o 

"© 
535 

s 


tc   — 

>       ©> 

en 
+j 

'5 

O 
u 
a. 

yj 

u 

y}     S 

- "-    '  — 

c     w 

CO       CO 

XI      o 


o 

v. 

© 


to 
3 

© 


-Sf^ 


CD 


S 

50 


3 

C 

e 


s 


d 


0> 

a 

(D 
r-   V> 

a  s 

c 

Ft 
c 

t  c 


i  c 
c 


—  137  — 

upted  corpse  of  a  man,  or  the  body  of  a  brute,  it  may  enter  therein, 
and  make  it  a  substitute  for  its  own  body.  It  corruption  has  but 
invaded  a  single  member  or  part  of  the  body,  this  would  ool  prove  an 
insurmountable  obstacle  to  the  above  end,  as  is  shown  by  the  legend 
of  T'ieh  Kwai-li  g$  #}  ^,  whose  soul  entered  the  body  of  a  beggar, 
though  already  in   process  of  corruption  (I). 

4°.  By  way  of  rebirth.  This  is  the  ordinary  process.  The 
excarnated  soul,  that  seeks  to  be  reborn,  enters  into  the  womb  of  a 
pregnant  woman  (2),  and  animates  the  foetus,  which  so  far  had  but 
an  inferior  soul.  Frequently,  it  enters  into  the  foetus  in  the  latter 
stage  of  pregnancy,  and  then  childbirth  is  generally  advanced.  Le- 
gends even  state  that  sons  were  thus  reborn  in  the  womb  of  their 
own  mother,  and  died  at  the  very  instant  that  their  new  bodv  saw 
the  light  of  day. — The  same  theory  applies  to  rebirth  in  the  body 
of  a  brute.      The  souls  of  men  may  be  re-incarnated  as  beasts  (3). 

It  must  be  remarked  that  the  souls  of  those  who  die  through 
suicide,  or  by  the  hand  of  an  enemy,  constitute  a  special  class 
among  the  "hungry  ghosts"  Ku-hwun  Jg£  j$|,  who  wander  in  space, 
and  may  be  assimilated  to  the  Indian  Pretas  (4). 

Unable  to  secure  rebirth,  at  least  in  general,  until  they  have 
taken  vengeance  on  their  murderer,  they  seek  to  put  to  death  a 
living  person,   or  persuade  him  to  commit  suicide,    in  order  that    his 


U)     See  Wieger.     Folklore.  N°  19. 

(2)  This  process  in  generally  known  by  the  term  t'eu-t'ai  $£  j}r,  "to  make  cue's  way 
into  a  uterus".  De  Groot.  The  Religious  System  of  China.  Vol.  IV.  ch.  9.  p.  143  (the  re- 
incarnation of  souls  through  birth). 

(3)  In  the  Buddhist  system,  souls  of  men  may  lie  re-incarnated  as  bi  asts,  as  a  punish- 
ment  for  their  demerits  in  life;  while  reversely,  souls  of  animals  may  pass  into  men  as  a 
reward  for  their  virtuous  life  and  conduct.     De  Groot.   Ibid.  p.  153. 

A  little  after  death,  if  a  |  erson  examine-  carefully  what  pari  of  the  body  remains  warm 
the  longest,  one'may  devine  what  the  character  of  the  next  birth  will  be.  Beal.ACatena 
of  Buddhist  Scriptures  from  the  Chinese,  p.  41. 

(i)     The  highest  ord«r  of  famishiui;  ghosts.     Some   live    on    earth,    ami    are    visible   at 
night.  They  comprise  36  classes.     Others  live  in  hell  or  in  the  world   underneath   the 
continent.     All  persons  who  have  acquired  an  evil  '"Karma"  by  tlicii  covetous,  m-uavd  dis- 
position, are  reborn  as  Pretas.  They  are  tormented  bj  an  unappeasable  hunger.  Beal.  Ibid. 

p.  67. 

IS 


—  138  — 

soul  may  take  the  place  of  their  own.  When  they  have  thus  found  a 
substitute,  they  may  seek  a  new  rebirth.  It  happens,  however,  that 
some  of  them  who  consent  to  forgive  their  enemies,  may  be  re-incar- 
nated earlier. 

The  souls  of  persons  who  have  died  by  hanging,  or  assassin- 
ation, accuse  unceasingly  their  murderers  before  the  infernal  judges, 
until  they  obtain  full  justice.  When  they  are  re-incarnated  before 
having  taken  vengeance  on  their  enemies,  they  ever  seek  to  commit 
suicide  in  their  new  existence. 

The  annexed  illustration,  taken  from  the  "treatise  on  the  Budd- 
hist hell1'  Yuh-lih  cli'ao-ch.w'a.n  3£  jjj§  j$  fijj£,  represents  the  10th  divi- 
sion of  Hades,  where  each  one  secures  re-incarnation  in  a  subsequent 
existence,  there  to  be  rich  or  poor,  to  be  reborn  as  a  brute,  a  bird, 
a  fish,  or  an  insect,  according  to  one's  merits  or  demerits  in  a 
previous  life. 


—  139  — 

ARTICLE    IX. 

MURDEROUS    GHOSTS. 

Pi-shah  jg  f*. 

It  is  commonly  believed  among  the  people,  that  the  soul  after 
death  may  return  to  the  house,  and  kill  the  survivors.  Hence  ori- 
ginated the  custom  of  fleeing-  from  this  murderous  -host,  or  perfor- 
ming a  special  ceremony  to  receive  it  when  it  returns,  so  that  it 
may  not  injure  anybody. 

The  serious  Historic  Annals:  Tze-chi-L'ung-kien  kang-muh  i|f 
la  M  im  §S|  §eJ  (1),  mention  as  an  important  event  the  apparition 
of  the  ghost  of  Yiu  ^f ,  a  member  of  the  family  then  ruling  the 
principality  of  Cheng  ffj$  (2),  who  was  assassinated  B.C.  542.  Men- 
tion of  the  very  name  of  Yiu  ^  made  everybody  tremble.  Did  it 
cross  the  mind  of  a  person  to  say:  "Yiu  ^f  is  coming",  imme- 
diately everybody  took  to  flight.  Now,  it  happened  in  the  second 
month  of  the  year,  at  the  time  the  penal  code  was  modified,  that 
somebody  saw  the  ghost  ol  Yiu  ^f  in  a  dream.  He  was  arrayed  in 
military  armour,  and  addressed  to  him  the  following  words:  "this 
year,  on  the  49th  day  of  the  cycle,  1  will  kill  Tai  ^,  and  the  follow- 
ing vear  on  the  39tl3  day  of  the  cycle,  it  will  be  Twan's  fx  turn. 
Evervthing  happened  as  announced,  and  the  people  were  so  wild 
with  fear,  that  the  minister  Ch'an  /§r  officially  ordered  Liang-chi 
j^  jh>  Yiu's  ^  son,  to  sacrifice  to  the  Manes  of  his  father.  This 
prevented  all  further  evil,  and  the  fear  of  the  people  was  allayed"  (3). 


(1)  Published  at  the  close  of  the  Ming  HI)  dynasty  bj  Cli'eii  Jen  sih  [$  -fc  t$r,  national 
historiographer.  Revised  later  on.  a  new  edition,  comprising  !»1  books,  was  issued  in  17<»S. 
Wylie. Notes  on  Chinese  Literature,  p.  26. 

(2)  An  important  feudal  State  at  the  time  of  the  Chow  jg)  dynasty,  B.C.  771  500.  To- 
day the  prefecture  of  K'ai  fung-fu  |pj  §f  Jff\  in  Honan,  of  which  province  it  occupied  aboui 
a  half.     Williams.  Dictionary  of  the  Chinese  Language  .§£. 

(3)  See  Tze-chi-t'ung-kien  kang-muh  ^  j£  M  £g  M  @.    MB  A  * 3  M  YX  i&  *•  H  id 

*  m  £.  m  %  £.  *  *n  m  #.  m  m  «  2.  m.  -  n<  m  m  m  ft  #  w.  <f.  0  s  *  £ 

»isffi!!.ii!ifiS,^x)i?asifc^i:f-s*.aAa  if-  s  ^  ft  #.  n 
a  $  it.  #  w  n.  f-  *  a  &  «  &  it.  m  »  £,  7>  it. 


—  140  — 

The  work  entitled:  T'an-t'ai-ch'ang  poh-shi  Lu  Ts'ai  peh-ki- 
llh  M  -k  %  If  i  S  ^  W  ,§i  M,  which  treats  of  superstitious 
practices  at  the  time  of  the  T'ang  ^  dynasty,  has  the  following': 
"in  these  days  people  lied  from  returning  murderous  ghosts.  The 
soul  of  a  person  who  dies  on  a  Sze  g,  day  of  the  calendar,  is  a 
murderous  masculine  ghost.  It  returns  to  the  house  on  the  forty- 
seventh  day  after  death,  and  kills  little  girls  of  thirteen  and  fourteen". 

"The  feminine  murderous  ghost  comes  from  the  South,  and  kills 
pale-faced  boys  in  the  third  house.  It  returns  twice  to  the  house 
of  death,  to  wit  on  the  twentieth  day  and  on  the  twenty-ninth". 

On  such  days,  those  who  are  afraid,  run  away.  During  the 
Sung  5Jc  dynasty,  Yi'i  Wen-pao  jfc  ~$C  $fy ,  wrote  the  following: 
"Soothsayers  consider  the  number  of  days  that  have  elapsed  since 
the  demise  of  a  person,  and  deduce  therefrom  that  the  murderous 
ghost  will  kill  all  those  who  arc  born  on  such  or  such  days.  Even 
the  most  filial  son  will  run  away  on  these  occasions"  (1). 

At  the  present  day,  only  those  who  dwell  to  the  North  of  the 
deceased  person's  house  take  to  flight.  Those  living  to  the  South, 
invite  Taoist  priests,  Tao-shi  ^ff  -j^,  to  come  and  receive  the  ghost, 
and  recite  incantation  classics  to  ward  off  all  danger.  Soothsayers 
indicate  beforehand,  the  persons  the  ghost  will  kill  on  the  burial 
day,  on  the  day  of  his  return  after  the  burial,  directions  that  render 
places  particularly  dangerous,  and  what  persons  are  exposed  to  his 
malevolence. 

To  corroborate  their  predictions,  they  quote  Peh-hoh  f=l  $!§• 
who  saw  the  soul  of  a  deceased  person,  after  passing  through  the 
twenty-four  departments  of    Hades    (2),    return    therefrom    to    molest 

(1)  See  Ch'ui-kien-lub  wai-tsih  pft  £l]  ft  fl.  %.    M  ±  &  M  ±  &  t  W  &  M  if.  1" 

m  m  ft  m  #.  in  e  n  e  #.  m  m  #.  m  ra  +  -t  h  ®  %.  %  m  -i-  s  m  m  &.  m 

®  *b  *.  m  m  #  £  s.  %  ft  &  x  ii3.  i?  m  m  %.  vi  a  k  z.  b  *i  «.  m  =?  b  n 
%.  m  *  *  w  m  ^  m  sl  z  a.  #  $  b#.  /l  &  %■  it  #.  m  m  ?  #  &  as  at. 

(2)  That  is  the  eight  hot  hells,  the  eight  freezing  ones,  and  the  eight  of  utter  dark- 
ness. Life  may  last  hundreds  of  years  in  each  of  these  hells.  Eitel.  Sanscrit-Chinese 
Dictionary,  p.  82, 


—  1  VI   — 

the  living.  To  protect  mortals  from  any  evil  that  may  then  befall 
them,  he  composed  his  work,  entitled  the  "classic  of  the  six  trans- 
migrations'1, Luh-lun-king  ■>'-  i^  |t£.  According  to  this  work,  if  the 
deceased  has  departed  from  this  world,  on  the  days  marked  in  the 
calendar  by  the  cyclic  characters  Ch'eu  ^ft:,  Wei  ^,  HsiXh  /£,  the 
murderous  ghost  will  appear  in  feminine  form.  If  the  demise  has 
taken  place  on  the  days  marked  by  the  characters  Tze  ^ .  Yin  jpf, 
Sze  f^,  Wu  ^p,  Shen  ^,  the  returning  ghost  will  assume  a  mascu- 
line form. 

Should  the  deceased  die  on  the  days  corresponding  to  the  cha- 
racters Mao  ^p,  Ch'en  j|p|,  Yin  ]|f,  Ilni  ^.  the  returning  ghost  will 
be  hermaphrodite. 

The  returning  ghost  of  a  person  deceased  on  a  Tze  ^  day, 
murders  men  aged  between  thirty  and  forty  ;  if  a  person  has  died 
on  a  Kiah-tze  Ep  -^  day,  the  ghost  murders,  when  its  corpse  is 
buried,  all  male  persons  born  in  the  year  Sin-ch'eu  ^  $■.  The 
spectral  visitor  is  eighteen  feet  high,  and  returns  on  the  eighteenth 
dav  after  death.  Persons  deceased  on  a  Ping-tze  p^  -^  day,  murder 
when  the  corpse  is  entombed,  all  those  born  in  the  cyclic  year  Ting- 
ch'eu  ~~f  J.  The  phantom  is  sixteen  feet  high,  and  returns  on  the 
sixteenth  day  after  death. 

If  a  person  dies  on  a  Ch'eu  jJ:  day,  his  returning  ghost  will 
murder  in  the  Eastern  quarter  all  young  girls  aged  between  twenty 
and  thirtv.  Should  one  die  on  a  Yih-ch'eu  £  ^  day,  the  ghost  will 
murder,  when  the  corpse  is  cncoffined,  all  persons  born  in  the  year 
Sin-sze  -5£  Q.  The  spectre  is  sixteen  feet  high,  and  returns  on  the 
sixteenth  dav  after  death.  At  last,  if  a  person  dies  on  a  Ting-ch'eu 
-y  :g.  dav,  his  returning  ghost  will  murder,  when  the  coffin  is 
entombed,  all  those  born  in  the  year  Kwei-wei  ^  ^.  The  phan- 
tom is  fourteen  feet  high,  and  returns  on  the  fourteenth  day  after 
death. 

Should  a  person  die  on  other,  days  than  the  above,  a  similar 
reckoning  is  made,  based    on  the   combination    of  the    "ten  celestial 


—  142  — 

stems",  Shih-kan  -f-  -^  (1),  and  the  "twelve  earthly  branches",  Ti- 
<'l}i  ^lil  ^  (2l,  and  thence  soothsayers  foretell  what  kind  of  people 
may  be  attacked,  the  direction  from  which  the  ghost  will  come,  his 
height,  and  the  exact  day  in  which   he  will  return. 

Preservation  from  ghost  attacks.  —  The  following-  is  the  method 
employed  to  escape  from  the  malevolent  attacks  of  a  returning  ghost. 
On  the  day  in  which  he  is  to  return,  Taoist  priests,  Tao-shi  j$j[  J^, 
are  invited  to  the  house,  and  draw  up  written  charms,  which  those 
threatened  wear  on  their  persons.  The  priests  must  be  numerous 
for  the  reciting  of  prayers  and  incantation  classics.  Should  the  per- 
sons [exposed  to  danger  be  of  the  poorer  class,  and  unable  to  bear 
the  expenses  required  on  such  occasions,  then  their  only  remedy  is 
to  leave  the  house  on  the  ill-starred  days. 

At  the  present  day,  the  above  are  the  practices  generally  follow- 
ed  (3). 

Ask  a  Taoist  priest,  Tao-shi  jj£  -J-,  how  he  ascertains  the  exact 
height  of  the  returning  ghost?     He  will    tell    you    the    phantom    will 

(1)  These  cyclic  characters  are  the  following  :  Kiali  ^.  Yih  £,.  Ping  JS],  TingT,  Wn 
J'£,  Ki  cL.  Keng  [$[.  Sin  3p,  Jen  :£,  Kwei^.  They  have  dual  combinations,  corresponding 
to  the  Yang  |j§  and  Yin  $§£  principles,  the  five  elements  and  the  planets. 

(2)  The  12  branches  are  thus  enumerated  by  the  Chinese:  Tze  -£-,  Ch'eu  3t,  Yin 
H,  Mao  0[J,  Ch'eu  Jg.  Sze  El-  Wn  T-  Wei  £,  Shen  p£,  Yiu  j§.  Hsiih  $,  Hai  %.  The  com- 
binations of  the  10  stems  with  the  12  branches,  form  the  sexagenary  cycle  or  Kiah-tze  ^ 
■J-,  invented  it  is  said  B.C.  2637,  and  designed  to  give  names  to  years.  Other  combinations, 
owing  to  the  supposed  connection  of  these  characters  with  the  elements,  the  symbolical 
animals,  and  the  zodiacal  signs,  play  a  great  part  in  Chinese  divination,  and  furnish  the 
groundwork  for  the  soothsayer's  skill  in  forecasting  the  destiny  of  mortals.  Mongols,  Ko- 
reans, Japanese.  Siamese  and  Annamese,  all  believe  in  these  occult  influences. 

:!      See  the  "Classic  of  the  six  transmigrations".  Lull  lun  king  ^  $fa  M.     ii  3t  ZA<  $Z 

h  %  #,  m  m  &.  fSB^f*  b  n  #,  m  m  #.  w  u  m  %  h  jb  m,  m  mm  #. 
;i  =r  B  *e#,^fii**H  +  w±  m  +  vi t it  m  f •  ^  f  e  ft #, & n# 4k & 
$  3i  %■  m  £  £  a,  ^  ■§;  -  *  a  x,  t§  +  a  b  ^  isi.  n  -f  a  %  #,  $  m  #  ft 

Ti^i4iA,^S-*>NJi,  S  +  *  B  &  0.  HlBJEt,  t#-t 
W  _h  H  +  \>X  T  *  *  f  •  £  a  H  »  #,  SSt  B$  ^  ft  ¥  Ei  ^  #f  £  ;£  A,  #  Hi  -  * 
*  K,  £g  +  *  B  ^  0.  T  ft  B  %  #,  $  "#  &  41  51  *  ¥  Jff  4  2  A,  &  «  -  5t 
ffl  /*,  M  +  ffl  B  fs  0.  &  %  ^  4&  B  #,  Ig  *  T  5  #,  SO  gfc  «  ffl  #  -fnj  A,  M  « 
«  T  ot  H,  £g  fi  H  ^  0.  £  «*  SM  £  S,  JK  B#  W  ffi  ft  H  ft,  IR  «  %  ±,  #  3£  ^ 

mm i^mm m k.  % §l % z m,  mnmm mm,  m b  *$ & *i> S  &.  «; a & 
iii  $s  £  ffi  ■&. 


Fig.  62 


bis 


mm 


Hiong-cha.   La  mauvaise  dtoile  masculine  du  mort.    Tse-cha.    La  mauvaise  dtoile  feminine  du  mc 
Hsiung-shah.  Ghost  of  deceased  in  rnasculine  form.    Tz'e-shah.  Ghost  of  deceased  in  female  form 


—  143  — 

be  as  many  feet  high,  as  the  number  of  days  that  intervene  between 
death  and  his  spectral  apparition.  Thus,  if  he  returns  alter  sixteen 
days,  he  will  be  sixteen  feet  high. 

What  is  this  phantom,  this  returning  ghost,  called  Shah  fffc, 
and  which  assumes  a  male  and  female  form,  Hsiung-shah  "Jjfe  fik  and 
Tz'e  shah  jlfc|  ^C?  This  spectral  visitor  or  Shah  ^t,  is  the  murderous 
breath  of  the  departed  soul,   Hwun-h'i  zji|  ^  (1). 

In  apparitions,  the  feminine  spectre  has  the  head  of  a  woman 
and  the  body  of  a  hen  ;  while  the  masculine  phantom  appears  with 
the  head  of  a  man  and  the  body  of  a  cock  (2). 

For  this  reason,  during  the  ceremony,  which  takes  place  on  the 
day  of  the  ghost's  expected  return,  a  rough  sketch  is  made,  called 
"the  image  of  the  returning  ghost";  a  hen  is  also  attached  to  the 
leg  of  a  small  table,  with  the  purpose  of  insinuating  to  the  trouble- 
some visitor,  that  all  precautions  have  been  taken  to  protect  the 
household  from  his  petty  annoyances,  and  hence  he  must  behave 
himself  properly. 

How  is  it  known  that  the  returning  ghost  has  the  body  of  a  hen? 

Formerly,  in  the  province  of  Hupeh  $$  4fc,    Shang-liang  ^  J^, 

grandson  of  the  prince  of  Ch'u  $£  (3)',  a  man  endowed  with  extraor- 
dinary strength  and  courage,  did  not  believe  in  returning  ghosts.  On 
the  appointed  day,  when  his  brother  recently  deceased,  was  to  return 


il)  The  Chinese  are  haunted  with  a  continual  fear  of  spectres,  and  believe  that  the 
departed  soul  may  frequently  become  a  malicious  ghost.  The  Shall  i&  belong  -  to  this  latter 
class.  The  word  denotes  "murderous,  killing",  and  attests  amply  its  dangerous  character. 
It  is  a  metamorphosis  of  the  breath  of  the  corpse,  the  "Mara"  (evil  influence)  of  the  Yin  $§£. 
It  always  escapes  from  the  corpse  at  night,  on  the  first,  second,  or  third  day  after  death,  or 
even  later.  Expert  soothsayers  inform  the  family  of  the  exacl  date.  De  Gn>oi  The  Reli- 
gious System  of  China.  Vol.  V.  p.  777. 

(2)  A  hook  of  the  ninth  century  described  them  as  bird-shaped.  One  of  these  birds 
was  caught  in  a  net  in  the  plains  of  Shansi  |i|  glf.  It  was  of  a  blue  colour  and  over  five 
feet  high.  Scarcely  was  it  taken  out  of  the  net,  when  it  disappeared  from  sight.  De  Groot« 
Ibid.  p.  770. 

(3)  A  large  Feudal  State  in  the  Chow  j§  dynasty,  existing  from  B.C.  74n:i:'o.  It 
occupied  Hukwang,  and  parts  of  Honan  and  Kiangsu.  Its  capita]  was  King  ehow-fu  Iff]  •|ii 
!ff.  Williams.  Dictionary  of  the  Chinese  Language. 


—  144  — 

(in  ghost  shape)  to  the  house,  Shang-liang  /fpj"  ^  sat  down  at  a 
small  table  beside  the  coffin,  and  began  to  quaff  wine  till  the  mid- 
night-hour. 

He  then  beheld  a  numerous  band  of  demons  surrounding'  the 
house;  the  air  shook  with  their  presence.  All  of  a  sudden,  a  hen  as 
big  as  a  crane,  striking  with  its  bill,  and  its  eyes  aglow  with  anger, 
alighted  on  the  coffin. 

Shang-liang  'fpj  ^  advanced,  and  seized  it  with  his  left  hand, 
his  right  meanwhile  holding  his  glass  brimfull  of  wine.  Then,  add- 
ressing the  monster,  he  said:  "You  returning  ghost,  why  don't  you 
fear  me?"  Sightseers,  standing  near  the  door,  hearing  these  words, 
were  so  alarmed  that  their  knees  quaked,  and  they  trembled  from 
head  to  foot.  Shan-liang  'jpj'  fj^  showed  the  L;host  out,  without 
receiving  the  least  harm,  and   lived  afterwards  to  a  ripe  old  age. 

Another  extraordinary  fact,  T'ai-tsu  \^  jjj§_,  founder  of  the  North- 
ern Sung  4fc  5|c  dynasty  (A.  I).  960),  before  he  became  emperor, 
chanced  to  enter  one  day  into  a  house.  The  inmates,  fearing  a  ghost 
who  was  to  return,  had  all  lied.  The  prince  found  a  cock  in  the 
guest-hall,  and  had  it  placed  over  the  lire  to  be  cooked,  but  he  was 
compelled   to  leave  without  enjoying    it. 

When  the  people  of  the  house  returned,  they  saw  in  the  cooking- 
pan  the  head  of  a  man.  It  was  thus  ascertained  that  returning 
ghosts  had  the  head  of  a  man  and  the  body  of  a  cock  (1). 

But  why  then,  in  the  ceremony  prepared  for  the  receiving  of 
the  ghost,  is  a  hen  always  chosen,  and  never  a  cock? 

Formerly,  say  the  Taoist  priests,  Tao-shi  ^ff  J^,  all  returning 
ghosts  assumed  a  masculine  form,  but  from  the  time  that  Sung- 
T'ai-tsu  ^  -fc  jjj§  had  one  stewed  in  the  cooking-pan,  there  were 
never  since  only  feminine  ones. 

Finally,  are  not  people   constantlv    found    who  do  not  believe  in 


(1)     See  Kien-hu-tsib  $*  %  ^,  &  ^  jg  $  B#,  ffi  A  A  %  K  M  VI  &  #  *  ffi,  W 

ii  £  m,  m  m  #.  £,  *  &  m  m,  £  %  &  %  %.  *  a  m. 


Fig.  62 


Song  T'ai-tsou  et  le  revenant. 
Sung  T'ai-tsu  and  the  Ghost. 


—  145  — 
these  ghosts,  and  on  the  days  when  they    are    announced  to    return, 
stay  quietly  at  home  and  never  experience  the  least  annoyance? 

These  ghosts  exist  when  one  believes  in  them  ;  if  one  does  not 
believe  in  them,  then  they  do  not  return.   Such  is  the  answer  given. 

Who  is  Pek-hoh  £  $|,  the  author  of  the  "Classic  of  the  six 
transmigrations",  Luh-lun-hing  ;£$&$£,  which  lays  down  the  rules 
governing  the  return  of  these  ghosts,  indicating  the  day  when  it 
will  take  place,   and  what  persons  will  be  killed  by  them? 

We  know  nothing  about  him,  reply  the  Taoist  priests,  Tao-shi 
M  i;  "*e  S°  wherever  we  are  invited  to  perform  certain  ceremonies. 
Although  we  generally  follow  the  same  method  as  our  predecessors, 
still  we  sometimes  make  a  few  modifications,  so  that  the  liturgy 
varies  according  to  places.  This  business  is  our  means  of  subsistence, 
and  we  have  no  time  to  investigate  these  questions. 

Such  is  the  practical  dialogue,  which  may  be  imagined  as  hav- 
ing taken  place  between  a  Taoist  priest,  Tao-shi  ^  -£,  and  any 
one  who  wishes  to  understand  thoroughly  these  vain  practices.  How 
explain  why  the  ghost  returns  on  such  or  such  a  day,  and  is  unable 
to  do  so  on  others?  Why  doesn't  it  stay  a  little  longer?  What  makes 
it  depart  in  such  haste? 

If  on  the  appointed  days,  some  annoyances  occur  in  homes, 
they  must  be  attributed  to  the  Evil  One,  whose  interest  it  is  to 
maintain  these  erroneous  opinions;  certainly  it  is  not  the  soul  of 
the  deceased  person,  that  returns  to  its  former  home,  to  molest  the 
inmates  thereof. 

Chao  Tung-shan  j|j|  jff  \[\ ,  a  scholar  of  Chekiang  ffi  yX  pro- 
vince, kept  watch  beside  the  coffin  of  his  father  before  it  was  borne 
to  the  grave,  and  said  in  reference  to  this  subject:  "what  son  would 
ever  leave  the  coffin  of  his  father  shut  within  an  empty  room,  and 
flee  to  escape  from  his  malevolent  influence?  And  is  it  admissible 
that  a  father  would  harm  his  own  son,  even  if  the  latter  slept  alone 
in  the  mourning"  shed  from  morning  till  night?''  (1). 


(1)     See  Ch'ui-kien-luh-wai-tsih  pfc  glj  #  ^  ft.      £  ti  $L  % I  £.  ^  Sfc  &  M  &  # 

mmm. 

19 


—  146  — 

This  sorry  custom  has  taken  a  general  hold  on  the  common 
people,  and  only  those  who  belong  to  the  enlightened  class  can  have 
courage  enough  to  break  off  with  a  state  of  things  so  universally 
admitted. 

The  work  entitled  :  Yao-yih-kia  kwei  t'ung-suh-pien  |^  E  ^ 
S  j|  fl?  II'  speaks  in  a  similar  manner.  Its  author,  Ku-mei  j||  $g, 
says:  "through  hearing  soothsayers  talking  about  ghosts,  the  entire 
population  of  Kiangsu  jj  (ifo  has  ended  by  believing  in  them.  As 
for  me,  I  believe  in  no  such  nonsense.  When  my  mother  died,  1 
sat  up  alone  beside  her  mortal  remains,  to  fulfil  my  duties  towards 
her,  and  I  never  saw  or  heard  anything  whatsoever.  Hence  1  conclude 
that  all  these  ghost  stories  are  absolutely  unfounded"  (1). 

N.  B.  In  several  families  among  the  common  people,  ashes  are 
strewn  on  the  floor,  or  before  the  door-way  of  the  deceased  person's 
home.  The  following  morning,  a  minute  examination  is  made,  to 
see  whether  there  are  any  footprints  or  other  marks  found  thereon, 
indicating  that  the  soul  has  returned.  Sometimes  a  ladder  made  of 
reeds,  is  placed  against  the  garden-wall,  to  enable  the  ghost  to  climb 
over  it  easily. 

In  case  the  footprint  of  a  bird  has  been  noticed,  it  is  forthwith 
inferred  that  the  soul  has  been  re-incarnated  in  the'  body  of  a  bird. 
Should  Pussy  happen  to  run  over  the  sifted  ashes,  immediately  the 
conclusion  is  drawn  that  the  deceased  has  been  transformed  into  a 
cat.  From  the  marks  left  on  the  ashes,  one  is  enabled  to  conjecture 
what  is  the  destiny  of  the  soul  in  the  nether  world. 


ill     See  Ku-mei  chi  wen-kih  M.  M  £3  BM&     flf  ±  S  W-  gfc  IB1  &  $k •  &  <%  it  |£ 

m  n  £  m.  -?  m  *  m.  jg-  %  «i  $s,  m  ^  /t  m  %  m  m  ±,  m  m  &  m.  &  s  a  % 


«$M 


liti^";4  'iiA'vV mvtiAi  V'i  '  ••"*»* 


Ceremonie  de  revocation  des  morts. 
Evocation  of  the  Dead. 


—  147  — 

ARTICLE    X. 
EVOCATION  OF  THE  DEAD. 

Cha.o-vja.ng  :fg   £;. 

The  evocation  of  the  dead  is  practised  as  a  general  custom 
in  all  pagan  localities. 

Whenever  a  member  of  a  family  dies,  his  relatives  go  and 
consult  a  magician  or  a  witch,  well  known  in  the  country  as  a  me- 
dium, who  is  wont  to  conjure  up  the  soul,  and  question  it  as  to  its 
condition  in  the  nether  world.  This  is  the  evocation  of  the  dead,  as 
we  see  it  practised  in  many  other  parts  of  the  world,  the  method 
only  being  a  little  different  owing  to  the  influence  of  local  circum- 
stances. 

Generally,  at  least  in  these  provinces,  it  is  an  old  woman  or  sor- 
ceress, who  acts  the  principal  part.  This  is  in  the  main  only  a  pure 
comedy,  whence  the  Evil  One  benefits,  implanting  thereby  more 
strongly  in  the  minds  of  pagans,  a  thousand  absurd  errors  on  the 
state  of  the  soul  after  death.  Whosoever  desires  to  evoke  a  departed 
soul,  must  do  so  through  a  living  medium.  In  the  apartment,  where 
the  ceremon}T  is  to  take  place,  a  table  is  prepared  upon  which  are 
placed  offerings  for  the  soul :  mushrooms,  cooked  vegetables  and 
even  meats. 

A  lamp  is  lighted,  doubtless  to  guide  the  soul  in  the  realm  of 
darkness,  whence  it  is  requested  to  return.  Beside  the  table  is 
placed  some  rice  in  a  bushel  or  other  vessel,  and  over  the  rice  a  ba- 
lance is  laid.  Such  are  the  articles  generally  employed,  though  they 
may  vary  according  to  the  wealth  of  the  family,  and  the  resources 
of  the  place.  The  sorceress,  fulfilling  the  office  of  medium,  covers  her 
head  and  face  with  a  piece  of  cloth,  evokes  the  departed  soul  with 
whom  one  wishes  to  communicate,  then  mutters  in  a  drawling  and 
inarticulate  tone  some  twaddle  about  her  visits  to  the  "land  of 
shades". 

The    only    requisite    conditions    to    be    a    reputed    medium    is    a 


—  148  — 

thorough  grasp  of  the  erroneous  opinions  which  prevail  in  the  locality, 
and  ability  to  turn  them  to  account  in  a  clever  manner.  The  follow- 
ing are  some  of  the  questions  generally  addressed  to  the  deceased, 
whose  soul  is  believed  to  use  the  mouth  of  the  medium,  to  commu- 
nicate for  a  moment  with  those  interested  in  its  welfare. 

Do  you  suffer  in  the  nether  world?  Will  your  punishment  last 
long?  When  will  you  leave  Hades?  What  is  your  state  in  the  un- 
derworld? Do  you  fulfil  any  official  function?  Are  you  in  need  of 
money,  clothes?  What  may  we  do  to  help  you?  Will  such  an  un- 
dertaking, in  which  we  take  great  concern,  succeed  or  not?  When 
are  we  going  to  die  ourselves? 

One  can  thus  see  what  a  vast  field  is  open  to  inquiry.  Satan 
seizes  the  opportunity  to  sow  the  seeds  of  error,  either  by  allowing 
the  medium  to  descant  as  he  pleases,  or  inspiring  him  to  deliver 
misleading  replies.  All  the  errors  of  Buddhism  are  exhibited  in  a 
sitting  of  a  few  minutes:  hell  is  not  eternal;  the  dead  eat,  drink, 
need  clothes  and  money  in  the  nether  world,  hold  honourable  posi- 
tions, and  may  be  re-incarnated  in  men,  animals,  fish  etc... 

Generally  these  sittings  are  but  a  clever  blind,  in  which  the 
medium  deceives  those  simple  folks,  who  are  so  silly  as  to  have 
recourse  to  him.  It  is  a  trade,  a  remunerative  business,  which  he 
carries  on  dissembled  beneath  the  thick  piece  of  cloth  covering  his 
face,  and  hiding  the  movement  of  the  lips,  while  he  counterfeits  his 
voice  to  render  his  oracular  sayings  more  mysterious. 

If  sometimes,  there  are  answers  which  apparently  surpass  the 
average  knowledge  of  these  cunning  knaves,  they  must  be  attributed 
to  the  "Father  of  lies",  who  seeks  to  excite  the  admiration  of  his 
deluded  victims. 

Some  fewr  }rears  ago,  a  wealthy  man,  named  Hsu  Shi-yin  ]f£  -^ 
|i£,  died  at  Yun-ls'ao  jig  \fj .  His  widow,  anxious  to  know  how  he 
fared  in  the  nether  world,  proceeded  to  Wuhu  fiiE  $JJ,  in  the  provin- 
ce of  Nganhwei  ^  ^,  to  consult  an  old  sorceress  highly  reputed 
in  the  neighbourhood.  To  make  some  return,  at  least  in  kind  words, 
for  the  handsome  remuneration  she  received,  the  disconsolate  widow 


—  149  — 

was  assured  that  her  husband  held  an  official  position  in  the  under- 
world, "the  land  of  shades11,  Yin-kien  |^  f0^,  and  therefore  she  should 
but  rejoice  over  his  happy  lot. 

Not  unfrequently,  these  magicians  employ  a  youth  (I),  from  12 
to  25  years  of  age.  They  hypnotise  him,  either  directly  or  through 
some  expert,  who  administers  to  him  ashes  from  a  burnt  charm, 
adding  thereto  various  gestures  and  hand-signs  made  over  the  head. 
All  persons  are  not  equally  capable  of  being  hypnotised  ;  the  better 
subjects  are  generally  frail,  hysterical  youths  (2),  whose  life  has  been 
rather  disorderly.  When  the  medium  has  been  hypnotised,  the 
sorceress  questions  him,  and  the  departed  soul  replies  through  his 
mouth.  This  kind  of  evocation  is  practised  at  Wuhu  Jim  ;$j,  one  of 
the  Open  Ports  in  the  province  of  Nganhwei  ^  Jjfjfc.  I  have  had 
ample  proofs  thereof,  and  have  known  all  those  concerned  in  the 
case.  In  one  case  even,  after  the  ceremony  was  over,  a  widow 
who  had  consulted  the  medium  on  the  state  of  her  husband,  wished 
to  burn  mock-money,  and  in  so  doing  set  fire  to  a  neighbouring 
house. 

In  some  places  of  Kiangsu  yX  H  province,  these  magicians  em- 
ploy little  images  of  idols  or  Pu-sahs  |£  j|§.  They  must  pray  long 
and  fulfil  manv    ceremonies  before   rendering  their  image    efficacious 

(3). 

When  at  last  it  is  possessed  by  the  God,  divinised,  ling  H,  as 
pagans  say,  they  use  it    as    a    medium,    placing   it    on    their  bosom. 


(1)  These  youths  are  called  Ki-t'ung  fil  ]§£,  that  is  divining  youths,  or  simply  T'ung- 
tze,  jf£  -J-,  young  diviners.  When  attached  to  a  temple  or  family  altar,  they  are  called 
Shen-t'ung  jjjf  jf,  youths  possessed  by  a  god.  De  Groot.  The  Religious  System  of  China. 
Vol.  VI.  p.  1269. 

(2).  They  must  be  a  nervous,  impressionable,  hysterical  kind  of  people,  physically 
and  mentally  weak,  and  th:  ivfore  easily  stirred  to  ecstasy.  The  strain  on  their  nerves 
cannot  be  borne  for  many  years,  and  hence  they  all  die  young.  De  Grcot.  The  Religious 
System  of  China.  Vol.  VI.  p.  1269  (possessed  mediums). 

(3;.  In  Southern  China,  this  image  is  made  of  the  wood  of  the  willow-tree  It  is 
exposed  to  the  dew  for  49  nights,  after  which  it  is  believed  to  have  the  power  of  speaking. 
The  holder  professes  to  send  it  into  the  world  of  spirits,  to  find  the  person  about  whom 
intelligence  is  sought.     Doolittle.  Social  Life  of  the  Chinese.  Vol.  II.  p.  115. 


—  150  — 

begging  it  to  find  out  such  and  such  a  soul  with  whom  one  wishes 
to  communicate,  and  the  little  statue  replies  to  all  questions  add- 
ressed to  the  departed  soul,  as  if  the  spirit  dwelt  within  the  image. 
It  may  be  admitted  that  there  are  frequently  cunning  feats  of  ven- 
triloquism, which  completely  delude  the  beholders  (1).  There  are, 
however,  cases  in  which  it  is  difficult  to  hazard  an  opinion. 

The  following  custom  is  found  in  some  places,  as  in  Hsii-chow- 
fu  ^  '}\\  Jft,  and  elsewhere.  When  a  woman  wishes  to  become 
a  medium,  she  goes  to  an  old  witch,  and  begs  her  to  communicate 
to  her,  her  evoking  power.  The  initiation  is  carried  out  as  follows: 
the  old  witch  has  in  her  possession  several  funerary  urns,  each  of 
which  contains  sealed  up  the  soul  of  a  deceased  person.  The  appli- 
cant approaches  quite  close  to  one  of  the  urns  ;  the  old  witch  then 
uncorks  the  vessel,  and  the  imprisoned  soul  of  the  dead  person 
escapes  into  the  body  of  the  novice,  and  henceforth  abides  within  her. 
its  indwelling  presence  is  apparent  to  her;  she  is  fully  conscious 
that  it  accompanies  her  everywhere,  and  can  inform  her  on  the  state 
of  such  or  such  a  soul,  which  has  departed  to  the  underworld. 

The  annexed  illustration  exhibits  the  customary  ceremony  em- 
ployed in  this  branch  of  necromancy.  The  petitioners  may  be  seen 
kneeling,  addressing  their  questions  to  the  medium,  and  listening 
to  the  answers  which  she  deigns  to  give  them. 


(1)  Doolittle  admits  also  this  conclusion:  "the  questions  are  addressed  to  the  me- 
dium ;  the  replies  appear  to  come  from  her  stomach.  There  is  probably  a  kind  of  ventri- 
loquism employed.  The  fact  that  the  voice  proceeds  professedly  from  the  stomach  of  the 
medium  doubtless  helps  to  delude".  Social  Life  of  the  Chinese.  Vol.  II.  p.  115  (Female 
mediums  between  the  living  and  the  dead). 


Fig.  64 


La  ceremonie  du  Tso-tchai. 
Tso-chai.  Buddhist  service  for  releasing  souls  out  of  Hades. 


—   151   — 

ARTICLE    XI. 

CEREMONIES  FOR  RESCUING  DEPARTED  SOULS. 

Tso-chai  ffc  %  —  Ta-tsiao  fl*  !§• 

These  ceremonies  vary  from  place  to  place,  and  even  when  perfor- 
med by  one  Buddhist  priest  or  another.  Each  one  follows  his  own 
fancy,  his  peculiar  contrivances,  calculated  to  impress  the  ignorant 
and  bring  grist  to  the  mill.  They  may  be  performed  by  Buddhist  or 
Taoist  priests,  Tao-shi  ^  ^,  at  the  pleasure  of  the  family.  The 
Buddhist  ceremony,  however,  is  generally  called  Tso-chai  f$[  j|f, 
performing  services  for  releasing  a  soul;  while  that  performed  by  the 
Taoists  is  styled  Ta-tsiao  :jT  |$|,  thanking  their  gods  for  deliverances. 

1°.      Passing  over  the  magic  bridge.   Kwo-sien-k'iao  j^  f[Jj  ;ffj. 

The  disembodied  soul,  according  to  Buddhists,  must  pass  over 
a  long  and  dangerous  bridge  (I),  which  spans  a  foaming  torrent, 
and  obstructs  the  road  towards  a  new  existence.  Demons  hold  all 
the  dangerous  points,  and  cast  into  the  surging  waters  beneath,  the 
unfortunate  souls  that  venture  on  the  way.  To  help  to  pass  over  it, 
Buddhist  priests  have  imagined  to  construct  a  mock-bridge  made  out 
of  tables  and  boards,  erected  in  front  of. the  deceased  person's  house  (2). 

The  tables  on  the  top  are  placed  with  the  feet  turned  up,  and 
from  each  foot  is  suspended  a  lantern  ;  pieces  of  cloth  tied  to  bam- 
boos act  as  a  railing  and  help  to  prevent  the  spirits  from  toppling 
over.  At  nightfall  the  bridge  is  lighted  up,  and  a  procession  of 
Buddhist  priests  arrives,  beating  wooden  clappers  and  playing  on 
various  instruments.  While  they  mutter  their  formulas,  others  climb 
on  to  the  artificial  bridge,  and  play  the  part  of  infernal  imps  (3). 


(1)  Only  those  who'are  good  are  supposed  to  be  able  to  pass  over  it  safely  ;  the  wicked 
are  believed  to  fall  over  its  sides  into  the  waters  beneath  it,  where  they  perish.  Doolittle. 
Social  Life  of  the  Chinese.  Vol.  II.  p.  105  .popular  superstitions). 

(2)  The  ceremony  is  supposed  to  render  the  passage  of  the  bridge  more  feasable  and 
safe.     Doolittle.  loc.  cit. 

(3)  In  Southern  China  these  imps  have  their  faces  painted,  and  are  dressed  in  green- 
ish or  striped  clothing,  as  the  Chinese  thus  imagine  spirits  to  dress.  They  generally 
comprise  a  tall  white  devil,  short  black  devil,  and  sometimes  a  beggar  or  a  female.  Doolittle. 
Social  Life  of  the  Chinese.  Vol.  II.  p.  105. 


—  152  — 

The  filial  son,  who  wishes  to  see  his  parents  over  this  bridge 
of  sorrows,  takes  in  his  hands  the  tablet  of  the  deceased,  and  sets 
out  to  cross  the  bridge.  He  is  stopped  by  a  Buddhist  priest,  person- 
ating an  infernal  imp,  who  opposes  his  passage  ;  the  filial  son  falls 
on  his  knees,  begs  and  entreats,  but  all  to  no  purpose.  In  order 
to  proceed,  he  must  pay  down  a  certain  amount.  A  few  paces  fur- 
ther on  another  imp  gesticulates  frantically;  money  must  be  again 
disbursed,  otherwise  he  will  hurl  over  the  railing  the  son  and  his 
tablet.  After  much  parleying,  a  bulk  sum  of  money  is  agreed  upon 
and  paid  out  on  the  spot.      And  so  on  till\the  end. 

The  passage  over  the  bridge  has  told  heavily  on  the  purse  of  the 
too  credulous  son,  but  has  swelled  the  pockets  of  the  pate-shaven 
monks.  All  is  a  regular  comedy,  as  every  reader  can  see,  but  a 
remunerative  one  indeed. 

2°.     Releasing  from  the  Buddhist  purgatory .  P'o-ti-yuhffiffcffi. 

Buddhist  and  Taoist  priests,  Tao-slii  JH  J^,  vie  with  one  an- 
other in  inventing  all  kinds  of  cunning  devices,  designed  to  deliver 
departed  souls  from  the  hands  of  Yen-wang  ff*]  3E>  the-  ruler  of 
Hades.  One  of  the  principal  ceremonies  is  that  known  as  "rescuing 
from  purgatory"  P'o-ti-yuh  $$f  f|jj  $^  (1).  The  images  of  the  ten 
rulers  of  Hades  are  exposed  ;  offerings  are  made,  and  prayers  add- 
ressed to  each  of  the  superintendents  of  the  ten  departments  of  the 
lower  world.  When  they  have  been  duly  informed  and  propitiated, 
the  soul  is  deemed  rescued  from  hell  or  rather  from  purgatory,  as 
this  place  of  expiation  is  of  but  temporary  duration  (2). 

Five  written  charms,  printed  on  five  different  sheets  of  paper, 
are  employed  in  this  ceremony  of   "releasing    from    purgatory1'    P'o- 


(1)  Ti-yuk  Jft  Jfft  Earth-prison,  corresponding  to  the  Sanscrit  "Naraka",  that  is  the 
abode  of  wicked  men.  It  contains  8  large  hot  departments,  8  cold  ones,  and  8  of  utter 
darkness,  with  minor  small  ones.  The  torments  and  length  of  life  differ  in  each.  Yama 
and  his  lictors  rule  over  the  unhappy  wretches,  and  the  various  degrees  of  torture.  His 
sister  performs  the  same  duties  in  regard  to  female  criminals.  Eitel.  Sanscrit-Chinese 
Dictionary. 

(2)  The  Buddhist  hell  or  purgatory  is  not  a  place  of  final  retribution, but  one  of  the 
six  phases  of  transmigration,  or  conditions  in  which  sentient  beings  may  find  a  new 
existence.  See  above,  p.  92.  Note. 


CO 


(MO 


*ft» 


0> 

£ 

CO 

p- 


<u 


HI 
<L> 


Cu) 


^M-o? 


>» 


V^-b    ">^CZ 


-*r 


>. 

-  X 

c 

£    °> 
S 

<L)     *~ 

_ 


c    "c 

—     %j 


fe 


U£?ii»^ 


^^  «^K- 


10 
CO 

be 


^•T 


■fj 


Ci 


(J 


p 

i1 


3     • 


M4r^ 


be 


f£\$+4*  ^9 


4' 


2 


0     • 


u 

3 

o 


3 

In 


u 

c 
0) 


a 

-= 


» 


#fc#3i**H&^ 


4&*i£  firt* 


8 

- 


so 


:_      o 

a 

o     K 


\ 


—  15:5  — 

ti-yuh  $£  -jfe  |R,  which  is  performed  by  Taoist,  Tao-shi  ^T  ±,  and 
especially  by  Buddhist  priests.  During  the  ceremony,  these  sheets 
are  hung  up  facing  the  four  points  of  the  compass  in  the  order 
prescribed  by  the  text;  a  fifth  one  is  suspended  in  the  middle  oJ  the 
hall.  When  the  chanting  of  the  liturgy  is  over,  music  played  and 
fire-crackers  exploded,  these  five  charms  arc  burnt  and  thus  forwarded 
to  Hades,  in  order  to  deliver  from  the  sufferings  of  hell,  the  soul  for 
whose  benefit  the  expiatory  ceremony  has  been  performed. 

This  ceremony  of  releasing  from  the  Buddhist  purgatory,  P'o- 
ti-yuh  $£  jjjj  ^,  is  frequently  practised,  and  is  a  profitable  source 
of  income  to  the  clergy  (1). 

3°.     Rescuing  from  the  bloody  pond.  Hsueh-hu  jjfl.  $J]. 

This  detestable  Buddhist  doctrine  condemns  to  be  plunged  into 
a  bloody  pond,  all  women  who  die  in  childbirth,  and  even  married 
women  who  die  several  years  subsequent  to  their  having  children. 
They  have  no  hope  of  being  rescued  therefrom,  and  must  remain 
immersed  in  this  filthy  sink,  amidst  intolerable  suffering,  until  they 
become  totally  annihilated,  that  is  till  the  end  of  the  world.  The 
only  remedy  available  is  to  have  recourse  to  Buddhist  and  Tin  list 
priests,  Tao-shi  |f|  -j^,  who  by  their  magic  formulas  are  empowered 
to  deliver  them. 

A  rough  sketch  of  the  deceased  woman  is  sometimes  made, 
with  the  eight  characters  of  her  horoscope,  Pah-tze  /V  '/-*,  at  the 
foot.  This  pictm-e  is  pasted  on  the  monastery  bell  (2),  in  order  thai 
through  its  tollings,  the  soul  of  the  deceased  may  be  gradually  res- 
cued from  the  pool  of  mud  and  blood  in  which  it  is  plunged. 

At  other  times,  the  priests  burn  paper-boats,  called  "life-boats", 
designed  for  crossing  this  bloody  pond.  The  reader  may  see  above. 
Chapter  IV,  Article  II,  a  written  charm  and  the  Chinese  text  of  the 


(1)  Buddhist  or  Taoist  priests,   Tao-shi  *|  ±,   can   alone  deliver  souls   out  of  this 
ahode  of  suffering.     Williams.  Dictionary  of  the  Chinese  Language,  life  ©t 

(2)  See  above,  p.  125,  how  the  tolling  of  Buddhist  bells  procures  relief  and  solace  to 
the  souls  in  hell. 

20 


—  154  — 

prayer,  designed  to  rescue  all  women  who  have  brought  forth  child- 
ren, from  the  bloody  pond  into  which  they  are  plunged,  as  well  as 
the  story  of  this  horrible  practice,  invented  by  the  Buddhist  priest 
Muh-lien  g  jg,  or  rather  propagated  in  China  through  his  efforts  (1). 

Pagan  women  have  a  terrible  fear  of  this  "bloody  pond",  and 
when  the  mother  of  a  family  dies,  no  expense  is  spared  (2),  and  Budd- 
hist and  Taoist  priests,  Tao-shi  ^  -^,  are  invited  to  chant  prayers, 
in  order  to  rescue  her  soul  without  delay  from  the  "bloody  pond". 


(1)     See  p.  81  -85.     The  precious  formula  of  the  "bloody  pond",  composed  by  Buddha. 

("2)  In  Southern  China  the  rich  have  this  ceremony  performed  several  times,  or  at 
least  once  on  a  grand  scale,  before  the  conclusion  of  their  public  mourning  ceremonies. 
Doolittle.  Social  Life  of  the  Chinese.  Vol.  I.  p.  197. 


155  — 


•z&fe 


Dore,  Henri 

Researches  into  Chinese 
superstitions. 

v.  1 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
SUPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 


UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO 
LIBRARY 


// 


"*» 


i